Home

Manual

1. Rotate the Return A On Off SoftKnob to set the audio level of Aux Return A Push the knob to toggle Aux Return A On or Off Rotate the adjacent Assign Take knob to choose which of the four Program buses to assign the output of Aux Return A Push the knob to Take the assignment Rotate the Return B On Off SoftKnob to set the audio level of Aux Return B Push the knob to toggle Aux Return B On or Off Rotate the adjacent Assign Take knob to choose which of the four Program buses to assign the output of Aux Return B Push the knob to Take the assignment Rotating the Select Preview knob allows you to select either of the Aux Return mixes for au ditioning in the Preview channel the on screen menu indicates which Aux Send is selected Push the knob to preview release it to end the preview Figure 5 22 Aux Returns menu screen Press the Sends amp Returns key one more time to exit the menu e Fader Options Key Element supports fader normal and European style fader start channel activation methods Fader style is now set on a per fader basis As a result the global Fader Options key is no longer used to control this func tion Each input s Source Profile contains a Fader Mode choice which lets you determine the activation method of individual faders Note Pressing and holding the Fader Options key for five seconds enters the IP Address Book discussed in Chapter 1 and 2 Timer Section The Timer
2. Pressing the channel ON key for the CR Operator Mic while the channel is already on will mute the chan nel until the button is released acting as a cough func tion for the board operator On air status and speaker mutes are unaffected by this action The CR Operator microphone channel will mute the CR Monitors Moni tor 1 and the Preview speakers whenever the channel is On or if Preview or Record Mode Engage keys are selected Producer Microphone Channel Operation The Producer s microphone is meant to be used at a position within the Control Room where a morning show or talk show producer would normally sit This mic type mimics the operation of the Control Room mic described above but does not include the cough func tion also a Producer mic can use Talkback to talk to the board op but cannot talk directly to the Monitor 2 talkback channel Control Room Guest Microphone Channel Operation There are often microphones in the Control Room other than the board operator s i e an in studio guest wing or perhaps an announcer located physically near the board op These microphones also control the mut ing of the Control Room monitor speakers The Studio 1 monitor speakers and Preview speak ers will mute when this channel is turned on or when Preview or Record Mode are selected Control Room Guest mics can be turned on and off remotely and pro vide on off status to a remote logic device Remote Talk and
3. Appendix D Working With Hybrids e 152 If you don t see this or if the ID or Module informa tion is incorrect you will need to Capture your current module configuration This is normally done at the fac tory but if you have added the phone module yourself you will need to execute the Capture so that the Element can see the newly added module To Capture press and hold the Help key on Element s Navigation Module for 5 seconds until CAPTURE ap pears in the source name displays On the phone module you will see the assigned ID number in the upper left line icon position You can change this by pushing the adjacent line button End Capture Mode by pressing the Enter key on the Navigation Module Configuring an Element Show Profile for use with VX Note Entry of your VX s IP address in Phone Channel screen is no longer required At pres ent this screen is left in the Element Control Center so that you can see the Connection sta tus of your VX The VX IP address is now stored in Element s Show Profile settings allowing you to create different show profiles that connect to different VX Engine studios and shows 1 Enter your VX s IP address Use your Web brows Sen rofe VIT Phone configzotion Phone Module i Prone Ut vas les Pfuserf pass Gjhost 59 gt 18 0 9 Show Name Host Studio Name Sho i Show Password Reversed Hybrid ist on right Mode Auto 12 Lines 24unes Save changes
4. Figure 2 1 PowerStation MAIN and AUX Block Diagrams 2011 Axia Audio Setup and Connections e 11 Element with PowerStation 2 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections e 12 The Basics If you are using a single PowerStation with an Ele ment control surface there is not too much planning re quired since the factory default configuration is designed for out of box stand alone operation If however you plan to interconnect your new PowerStation with other Livewire gear in a larger network you will need to be organized This is no different than any other studio project Lets have a peek under the hood and see what the PowerStation can do Figure 2 1 illustrates the build ing blocks of the PowerStation MAIN and PowerStation AUX The PowerStation inputs are the sources in your studio such as microphones cd players and other audio playback devices The audio outputs of the PowerSta tion will be connected to control room monitors preview cue speaker headphones amplifiers and possibly some audio recording devices These external audio devices may be analog or AES devices as shown in Figure 2 1 The GPIO ports are used for control interfaces with other external devices such as air lights recorders and CD players The 100 Mbps Ethernet ports may be used to connect PCs running Axia s IP Audio driver or expand your sys tem by adding other Livewire devices such as Axia 8x8 nodes or a PowerStation AUX
5. HIGH FREQ Sets the active frequen cy for high band EQ Pushing this knob toggles the EQ model between Shelf and Bandpass modes If set to Shelf the HIGH FREQ knob determines the top of the shelf If set to Bandpass it sets the center frequency of the BP filter SmartQ determines the width of the BP filter as described above MID FREQ Sets the center frequency of the midrange parametric band LOW FREQ Sets the center frequency of the low parametric band Pushing this knob toggles the EQ model between Shelf and Bandpass modes If set to Shelf the LOW FREQ knob determines the top of the shelf If set to Bandpass it sets the center frequency of the BP filter The four knobs at the bottom of the module are the PAN controls The upper left knob PANs the sound field left to right The FRONT BACK knob moves the soundfield front to rear in 5 1 mode The SURROUND knob pans the rear speakers left to right in 5 1 mode The LFE knob adjusts the gain of the Low outboard audio effects processing custom IFB mix es etc Each Aux Send control has 50 dB of adjust ment range from to 10dB Rotating the knobs 2011 Axia Audio Frequency Effects channel in 5 1 mode Standard Monitor Module Controls The Standard Monitor Module Figure 5 5 con With the 2 fader monitor module the various Chan nel Options are selected by navigation with the Soft tains direct access controls for all of Element
6. The 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports are used to connect to your PowerStation to other PowerStation MAIN units or an Ethernet core switch The remaining connectors are used to connect your control surface and its DVI D monitor Getting Prepared Before you dive into the hardware you ll need to de termine a range of IP addresses to assign to each studio and log each device s IP as you assign it Appendix F contains an IP Assignment Worksheet you can use for this purpose IP addresses used in an Axia network must be valid Unicast IP addresses Determine your network s subnet mask settings at the same time typically this val ue is set at 255 255 255 0 for intranet applications A PowerStation MAIN with a PowerStation AUX will require a range of four consecutive IP addresses You will specify the first of these addresses and the oth ers will be assigned automatically be sure to accom modate these four consecutive addresses in your IP plan Unicast vs Multicast IP Addresses Data is routed over IP networks in one of two ways point to point unicast or multicast Livewire devices use common TCP IP unicast IP addresses for control and web browser access These are numbers you assign within the range used by your network Since most Livewire networks are not intended to be accessed via the Internet we recommend you use the non routable IP addresses such as the range of 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 255 These IP ad dresses
7. Welcome NE Soe Bement Saar ince Sate 3 Pree Made Version information Package acar Versione 2 2 0 0 0 02 207 apres oea 108 Pov Ove System Kemet Uren 2 6 17 10680 eters Odes G10 CPU useage 10 Netmerk no riommon Net moge Ro 31 05 Mps fe 128 580 Mos File System Information Noytics Sire Used Avaliable Use s Memory WAD 18 SOME 2 47 MB 205 4 107 40 MB ISR STM 284 42 8 Prtbewetet ye fs GTM VI IMANIA pa a 77 DM Anna Welcome 4s q P Version information 1a ia 1s ty ewe Mente Sevan ee oe CAN ike weer Othe re Mon wrah Omk Kenet bmn 24 Ot Orya Ue Oday OOF Pakage chemert 2204 26 Versione 22 0 0 0 Cet 2009 Bae 18 System OU usage 6 9 wrp Ake eee ee manun OU berg aE Pris Oul om yare Sie OWN ur Ateak noyoroi 100baseT tD Pi Ene Net mage Ra 0 004 Maps Te 0 000 Migs nares A Pres File System Information Re ed Fesystom See Used Awatlebile sete roy TIOM TLIO ME 161 620 Th f DSM 12M 11 11 ae Mat 37190 M 4513M 17606 M 203 Fig 8 2 Element Control Center with StudioEngine 2011 Axia Audio Advanced Element Controls e 111 8 8 Advanced Element Controls e 112 The Setup Menu We touched briefly on the Setup screen in Chapters 1 and 2 Now let s look at the rest of the tools on this page e Network Configuration contains the fields for the Element s IP Address and other network functions Hostname is the unique
8. 137 Table of Inputs and Outputs 20 138 Appendix B CE Declaration of Conformity 141 Appendix C FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance 143 Installing A New Module 145 Module Diagnostics i ceee e wae urra 148 Fader Cleaning Procedures 148 Appendix D Working With Phone Hybrids 151 Telos VX Broadcast VoIP System o naaa 151 Nx12 Nx6 TWOx12 Series 2101 systems 154 Call Controller Operation lt s sane e ee t 156 Telos Two ISDN Hybrid sacs aoe wos ma aona 158 Telos One and Delta Hybrids oaaao 159 Telos ONE x Six Direct Interface and 1A2 Systems 160 Appendix E Accessory Panels and User Panels 163 Appendix F Channel IP Worksheets 167 Warranty sess a a ra e wer aw Bw OS a 171 2011 Axia Audio A Note From The CEO of Telos In 2003 Telos launched the Axia Audio division based on an idea That idea sparked a whole new approach to radio consoles using Ethernet as a high speed expressway the routing infrastructure for audio and data inside the radio station Howard Aiken the scientist responsible for the conceptual design of IBM s groundbreaking Harvard Mark I computer once advised Don t worry about people stealing your ideas If your ideas are any good you ll have to ram them down people s throats Sure enough during our first few years the idea of using Ethernet to transport audio was so novel that
9. EQ STATUS Bypass or make Active EQ for this source EQ HIGH MODE Choose between shelf or band pass filter for high frequency EQ EQ HIGH FREQUENCY Sets the active frequency for high band EQ Variable from 1 25 kHz to 20 kHz If EQ HIGH MODE is set to Shelf this setting deter mines the top of the shelf If EQ HIGH MODE is set to Band pass this sets the center frequency of the BP filter SmartQ determines the width of the BP filter as described above EQ MID FREQUENCY Sets the center frequency of the midrange parametric band Variable from 125 Hz to 2 0 kHz EQ LOW FREQUENCY Sets the center frequency of the low parametric band Variable from 20 Hz to 320 Hz 2011 Axia Audio 3 Configuring Inputs 35 3 Configuring Inputs 36 EQ HIGH MID amp LOW GAIN Provides 40 dB of adjustment range for boost or cut of the three para metric bands from 25 dB to 15 dB The following options dealing with dynam ics processor settings apply to Mic Codec and Phone sources only If applied to other source types these settings will be ignored NOISE GATE STATUS Turns the voice processor s noise gate on and off Choose Bypass or Active COMPRESSOR STATUS Turns the voice proces sor s compressor functions on and off Choose By pass or Active DE ESSER STATUS Turns the voice processor s de esser module on and off Choose Bypass or Ac tive NOISE GATE THRESHOLD Determines the point at which the Noi
10. Power Supply AC Input StudioEngine Auto sensing supply 90VAC to 240VAC 50 Hz to 60 Hz IEC receptacle internal fuse Power consumption 100 Watts Power Supply AC Input Element Power Supply GPIO Auto sensing supply 90VAC to 240VAC 50 Hz to 60 Hz IEC receptacle internal fuse Power consumption 150 Watts Power Supply AC Input PowerStation Aux amp Main Auto sensing supply 9OVAC to 240VAC 50 Hz to 60 Hz IEC receptacle internal fuse Power consumption 500 Watts Operating Temperatures 10 degrees C to 40 degrees C lt 90 humidity no con densation Dimensions HxWxD and Weight Microphone node 1 75 x 19 x 10 inches 6 pounds Analog Line node 1 75 x 19 x 10 inches 6 pounds AES EBU node 1 75 x 19 x 10 inches 6 pounds Router Selector node 1 75 x 19 x 10 inches 6 pounds GPIO node 3 5 x 19 x 13 inches 8 pounds Studio Mix Engine 3 5 x 19 x 15 inches 10 pounds PowerStation Main Aux 7 x 19 x 15 5 inches behind rail Front panel extends 2 25 inches in front of rack rail PowerStation Main xx x pounds PowerStation Aux xx x pounds 2011 Axia Audio Specifications 137 Appendix A Specifications 138 Appendix A Main Outputs Program 1 Program 2 Program 3 Program 4 Program 4 Record Program 4 Phone Aux Inputs and Outputs Aux Send A Output Aux Send B Output Aux Send C Output Aux Send D Output Aux Return A Input Aux Return B Input Monitor related Outputs Monitor 1 C R Monit
11. Studio Name Show Password F Reversed Hybrid 1st on right Mode Auto 12 Lines 24 Lines Figure D 6 Setting connections is telos and the IP address follows like so pa iT pi nt wi pet wi 2 Configure the Show In the same screen where you entered the IP address of your Telos phone system enter the Telos Show running on that device In the screenshot example the show is called Hybrid 1 amp 2 If the Nx12 was configured for two shows an other show could have been Hybrid 3 amp 4 Refer to the configuration of your Telos device to determine which show name you need to enter into this field Possible shows from a Telos TWOx12 are Hy brid1 amp 2 Hybrid1 and Hybrid2 Possible shows from an Nx6 or NX12 are Hybrid 1 amp 2 Hybrid 3 amp 4 and Hybrid 1 4 Telos Series 2101 show names are generated in the configuration of the system Again it is important that you refer to your Telos device to determine which show is running The Host Studio Name field can remain blank A Show Password is used only if there is a pass word assigned to the Show of your Telos unit Other wise leave this field blank 3 Configure other options Element s Call Controller module uses the left row of telephone line selection buttons to control Hybrid 1 the right row to control Hybrid 2 If you wish to use the right row of Call Con troller buttons to control Hybrid
12. Ventilation Warning The Axia PowerStation StudioEngine and Power Supply GPIO Nodes require the free flow of air for adequate cooling Do not block the ventilation open ings in the top and rear of the unit PowerStation StudioEngine and the Power Supply GPIO Node must be mounted with a blank rack spacer above or damage may occur Failure to allow proper ventilation could damage the unit or create a fire hazard Do not place the unit on a carpet bedding or other materials that could inter fere with the rear and top panel ventilation openings Customer Service We support you By Phone Fax in the USA e You may reach our 24 7 Support Team anytime around the clock by calling 1 216 622 0247 For billing questions or other non emergency technical questions call 1 216 241 7225 between 9 30 AM to 6 00 PM USA Eastern Time Monday through Friday By Phone in Europe e Service is available from Axia Europe in Germany at 49 8161 42467 By E Mail e Non emergency technical support is available at Support AxiaAudio com Via World Wide Web e The Axia Web site has a variety of information which may be useful for product selection and support The URL is http www AxiaAudio com Feedback We welcome feedback on any aspect of the Livewire products or this manual In the past many good ideas from users have made their way into software revisions or new products Please contact us with your comments Updates The operation
13. au dio mode 5 Open the Element Sources amp Profiles Configuration web page Choose Source Profiles then Create New Source Profile In your new source profile choose the Primary Source that you entered in the audio node s setup page Give it an Element source name and select Phone for source type Select a Hybrid Answer Mode of Channel ON answers hybrid or Channel ON or Preview ON answers hybrid 6 Open Element s Module Manager GPIO Configura tion web page You will see the following GPIO Configuration Poni Poia Ports Por 7 rout ERE BE HEERE HEREN emma af SEE See Bee Pon Pld Porna Pona hous BREE AARRE RATRE AARAA nupus BPE HAREE HEERE HEEE F Mame iama 1 Fura Fee Phe FUSES gt EF aul o EE Figure D 8 GPIO setup For the physical GPIO you will be connecting to the hybrid enter or select from the drop down box the Livewire source channel for the hybrid Note the Livewire channel number and name are keys to the GPIO as well as to audio signals Element will generate the appropriate control signals for hybrids when Phone is selected as the source type The status display above the entry boxes show you the GPIO status and are useful for troubleshooting Operation Load the hybrid source onto a fader channel If you are using the GPIO to control the Hybrid functions for the Telos One or Delta hybrids pressing the fader chan nel ON button turns the Hybrid ON and pressing t
14. 14319 Disabled y Cey Sobni ago VMIXISub 14320 Live Stereo oK er LL Preview 113 From source OK Qn mo VMXKIfadel 14321 Disabled Fadetene 5 5 00 400 we 12 Studio 2 Mic 4 1014 From source OK OW n NI VMOCI fader2 134322 Oisabled Fade tune 5 00 400 sec L3 VMS fader 2 14352 From source s oK OR Gm 257 VMX fades 3 4 4323 Disabled v Fadetene 5 00 G0 weed L a Ty 1028 From source OK aa OOF On p47 VMNCI faders 4 4324 Disabled if Fadetone 5 5 00 40 we LS Pan 12001 From source lor OW e VMIX I fades 3 14325 Disabled A Fade tine 00 20 sc Appt FIgure 7 1 Engine VMIX screen 2011 Axia Audio understand what these terms mean Status Audio These are status fields OK is shown for valid streams and ERR for invalid streams usu ally an invalid stream error indicates a duplicate or missing source double check your Channel Num ber entries The Audio box provides a snapshot of the audio level with color indicator Since this indica tor is not Java enabled it is not dynamically updated You will need to refresh your browser to observe changes in level Enable Turns the input channel ON or OFF the boxes just below provide an option to set the fade up and fade down times Fade Time These two fields contain time values that control the rate in which the audio goes from OFF to ON and visa versa If the source is off gain is negative infinity not adjustable just a
15. 2011 Axia Audio If you re using certain Telos broadcast phone sys tems pressing the Set key transfers the phone line assigned to that fader to a handset These buttons are mutually exclusive across all faders touching a Set key on any Phone Fader switches the handset to the line assigned to that fader and cancels any previous line selection For details on Telos phone systems that utilize the Set key please refer to Appendix D Working With Phone Hybrids e Hold Key Pressing Hold sends a hold command to the connected Telos phone system When connected to European ISDN lines a hold signal is sent to the network With USA ISDN lines no network hold function is available so the hybrid enters a virtual hold state Note The Element s 2 Fader Monitor Mod ule also includes two Phone faders com plete with Set and Hold buttons Call Controller 2 Fader Phone Module The faders on this module can be used as faders for any console source however they are most commonly as sociated with phone hybrids This module Figure 5 3 has a high level of integra tion with Telos multi line talk show systems It features the hybrid controls found on Telos talk show controllers flanked by two faders Typically the left fader is linked to the left hybrid control and the right fader to the right hybrid control The faders and controls are identical to those described for the 4 Phone Module in the previous section For details on
16. CR headphones EQ active CR headphones EQ high mode CR headphones E high frequency 1250 Htet CR headphones CQ md Fraquency 125 Se CR headphones EO low Frequency 20 Stee CR headphones EQ figh gan 25 1545 CR headphones LO mid gan 25 1840 CR headphones EQ low gan 25 1530 Cet te 0 0 REAN enacting sathng Reto Left Rije C Sum C Astan eistir setting C Follow wartos O Ure hesdhones source select Retan miting setting m oti C Seren O se Retan misting setting Sros C atve O Raan castro setting O fe Pes C Retan enstinn seting Ue Lo C Ratan existing sating G Vsa 400 C Relan mntraj sting vee ja RERAN esting sethng We o o F Retain aning selling We oo D Relan enst seng We 0 9 C Ratan esting setting Figure 6 7 Show Profile CR Headphone Options 2011 Axia Audio 6 Show Profiles e 99 6 Show Profiles e 100 mono and fed to the left headphone CR HEADPHONE EQ ACTIVE Set headphone EQ for Bypass Active or Retain Existing Setting CR HEADPHONE EQ HIGH MODE Switches high frequency EQ model between Shelf and Bandpass or Retain Existing Setting CR HEADPHONE EQ HIGH FREQUENCY You can specify the top of the High Frequency Shelf or the middle frequency of the Bandpass filter depending upon which model was chosen for EQ High Mode or Retain Existing Setting CR HEADPHONE EQ MID FREQUENCY EQ LOW FRE
17. Controller Area Network CAN is a multicast shared serial bus standard originally developed in the 1980s by Robert Bosch GmbH for connecting electronic control units ECUs Although initially created for automotive purposes nowadays it is used in many embedded control applications The CAN data link layer protocol is standardized in ISO 11898 1 2003 Figure 1 3 Locating the grounding stud One end of the Element power communication ca Capturing Your Console ble is fitted with a strain relief Connect this end to Upon power up of your Element some or all of any one of the four Molex connectors on the back of the alphanumeric displays above the faders may read the Element GPIO Node Power Supply Connect the IHACTILE This means that the Element CPU must be other end to the Molex socket on the Element con initialized To do this you Il need to enter Capture Mode nection panel Figure 1 4 Detail of data communication cable ends Connect a VGA monitor to the 15 pin VGA connec tor on the back of the Element GPIO Power Supply IMPORTANT Element s power cable is also host to all data communication between the ac tual surface and its CPU housed in the Element Power Supply GPIO Node by CANbus technol Figure 1 6 Identifying the Standard Monitor Module ogy it does not require a separate Ethernet left and Monitor 2 Fader Module right connection Never connect any of the RJ 45 ports on the Element
18. Ethernet switch using CAT 5e or CAT 6 cable Do not power up the Power Supply yet Figure 1 2 Accessing Element s connection panel 2 Element must be connected to a grounded metal per VGA Ethernet Display Port CLEVENT GAO amp POWER MODULE MADE NDE USA POIIIOIIIDIOOIIOOIODIOIODIOIOIIICOIOIIIIIIIIII I swm gt A s PIOIIIAIIINIIIII e roms gt enen gt a ea gt a 7 a GPIO Ports an DC Power CANbus to Element Figure 1 1 Rear panel of Element GPIO Power Supply showing connections 2011 Axia Audio nection of Element fader and accessory mod manent wiring system or other equipment grounding ules only connecting them to a powered Ether net switch could damage the board s electronics and void your warranty conductor using the threaded grounding stud located inside the connections bay Open the bay by flipping open the overbridge above the faders as shown in Figure 1 2 For ground sources we recommend in order of preference Station Ground the heavy copper strap found in the walls and floors of many radio studios AC Safety Ground the 3rd prong of a nearby outlet Figure 1 5 Element connection panel Circled connector is for power data cable RJ 45 s connect to A bonded electrical conduit fader and accessory modules 12 AWG GREEN stranded wire is the minimum wire gauge acceptable for grounding Element What is CANbus
19. Figure D 1 Show Profile setup er to navigate to Element s Sources and Profiles gt Configuration gt Show Profiles web page Select the Element Show Profile you wish to config ure and click on Phone Inthe PhoneURL field entertheIPaddressofyourV X In the screenshot above a VX IP address is shown as ola bale Lita tie S where 192 168 0 9 is the IP of a VX Engine You can also specify a username and password if need ed If you use the default settings where the user name is user and the password is empty you don t need to enter anything 2 Configure your VX Studio and Shows In the same screen where you entered VX IP number you can enter a VX Studio name In the Host Studio Name field simply enter the studio name you used in your VX s configuration In the example above the VX Studio name is Studio 1 If you wish to change a VX Show using an Element 2tudio Configuration ISDN 1 0 Figure D 2 Show Configuration screen Show Profile simply specify the name of the VX Show you wish to load in the Show Name field If you leave it empty no VX Show will be changed and whichever show is currently loaded will continue to be used Leave the Show Password field empty There are no passwords for Shows in the Telos VX 3 Configure other options Element s Call Controller module uses the left row of telephone line selection buttons to control Hybrid 1 the right row to control Hybrid
20. HTTP interface so connect a computer loaded with an Internet browser to the local switch This computer should have an IP address in the same range assigned to the Element and StudioEngine Note Axia web interfaces have been tested with Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5 or later but may also work with other browsers Whatever browser you choose Java must be enabled and your pop up blocker if any must be disabled in order to work with Axia equipment Note that Windows Vista versions do not have Java installed by default as in prior versions You must install the Sun Java package found at nttp www java com In a Livewire network individual devices audio nodes studio controllers etc are identified by unique IP addresses But what about the audio streams these devices generate Think about how many audio sources and destinations there are in even a small studio there are a lot to keep track of In the analog days we d affix a numbered label to each cable that entered the terminal room to identify each audio circuit Obviously we can t attach pieces of paper to digital packet streams but we can give each one a label We refer to these labels as Network Channel Num bers Each Livewire system can support 32 766 channels of audio which enables us to give each audio source or destination its own unique numeric channel number d Monitor Outputs Mozilla Firefox wie Jools thet terfii
21. Mix minus is handled naturally and automatically without the need for the usual installation and operator contortions And each fader channel has its own mix minus capability so you will never run out of busses Since advanced Telos telephone interfaces have Eth ernet connections they are easily connected to your studio network to be controlled by the Element phone modules Sophisticated control signaling may then pass between the two systems without the need for the usual parallel connections But we recognize that not everyone owns a Telos phone system even though we wish they did so we ve included GPIO capability in Element to control simpler telephone equipment that does not have a Livewire in terface This Appendix describes how to configure Element for use with Telos talkshow systems The methods de scribed here pertain to Element software v2 5 0 so you must have this software or later to use the features for these phone hybrids described here Telos VX Broadcast VoIP System This section will help you configure your Axia Ele ment console for use with the Telos VX broadcast VoIP telephone system If you have not yet configured your VX system please refer to the Telos VX User Manual to do so before proceeding You will need to know the following things in order to configure Element for use with your VX system 1 The IP address of your VX Engine 2 The user name and password of your VX Engine 3 Th
22. Monitor GPIO What s External Preview for The word Ex ternal refers here to any source not generated by the studio you re working in Let s say you have an intercom system that you want to feed the console s Preview channel To do this you would take the GPO from the intercom and use it to gate open the external preview input which would be fed by the intercom audio Voila 2011 Axia Audio 6 Show Profiles e 97 6 Show Profiles e 98 e TALKBACK GAIN Use up to 30 dB attenuation or 10 dB gain on the contents of the Talkback bus You can also turn gain adjustment Off or Retain Exist ing Setting e FEED TO SOURCE SUM GAIN Specify a gain com pensation 6 to 3 dB for mono sum of talkback au dio sources e GPIO CHANNEL FOR EXTERNAL PROFANITY DELAY Enter the Channel Number of the GPIO port connected to your station s Profanity Delay Unit This assigns the Delay keys on the Element Master Module to control your external delay unit e GPIO CHANNEL FOR UP TIMER CONTROL Enter the Channel Number of the GPIO port you wish to use for external control of your UP timer e GPIO CHANNEL FOR DOWN TIMER CONTROL Enter the Channel Number of the GPIO port you wish to use for external control of your DOWN timer Additional Meters fetes Meter eet free Rieter 5 rout Curra O4 bucdwed M ZEH Eata Meter 2 rout Pore v Geeta nota arat Etara 3 Erti Meter 4 rout Etara 2 ety Mete
23. OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT NC 5 4 3 2 1 8 17 Te Ts Ta l3 To fi EE EE EE E E E 80 SOURCE GPIO v 1 2012 2011 Axia Audio GPIO External Timer Control Logic INPUTS a hi OUTPUTS SE a POWER amp COMMON Source Supply 10 NOT CONNECTED OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE C Active Low Input Starts timer tii mee Active Low Input Holds timer display while active Active Low Input Illuminates while timer is frozen Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 mS PULSE sent when mon Return Timer is started Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 mS PULSE sent when mon Return Timer is stopped Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 mS PULSE sent when mon Return Timer is reset Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 mS PULSE sent when mon Return Timer is frozen Open Collector to Logic Com mon Return Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon e tes Active Low Input Stops timer Can be connected to Pin 10 if source is not providing voltage active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 Logic Supply Individually Fused OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT N C 5 4 3 2 1 s l7 Te Ts l4 f3 To Th eee0e08e8 0 GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio Configuring GPIO e
24. Position one person at each end of Element and grasping the metal enclosure at the bottom simulta neously lift upward out of the shipping crate Remove packing materials and store them in the crate for future use Carefully lower Element into your counter top cut out taking care to lower both sides at an equal rate to avoid becoming jammed in the cabinetry Important Element is a drop in style control surface and requires a counter top cutout For cutout dimensions please refer to Appendix A Unpack the GPIO Node Power Supply that came with your Element and place it in its rack ensuring ad www AAs rom equate ventilation Connections Cable connections for Element are entirely different from any other mixing surface you may be familiar with There are no audio inputs Element needs only a single data power connection to operate Important Your Element MUST be ground ed Grounding reduces the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current Improper grounding can result in a risk of electric shock Check with a qualified electrician if you are in doubt about how to properly ground this equip ment If your local electrical code prohibits the use of a Station Ground for this purpose as de scribed above use the specific Safety Ground your local regulations mandate 1 Rack mount the GPIO Node Power Supply unit and connect it to a 100Base T port on your studio s
25. codec or IFB channel Surround is only used if the console is in Sur round 5 1 2 mixing mode e Status and Audio indicate the health of each par ticular channel Status indicates OK to inform you that a stream is working normally Audio shows a colored tally to indicate audio presence e Audio Mode is the magic box that transforms your stereo stream into something else You may choose from any of the following options Pass Stereo Passes the Left and Right channels as is without modification Upmix from L In Surround mixing mode takes Left channel and creates 5 1 upmix In Stereo mixing mode creates mono sum from Left chan nel Upmix from R In Surround mixing mode takes Right channel and creates 5 1 upmix In Stereo mixing mode creates mono sum from Right channel Upmix from L R In Surround mixing mode sums Left and Right channels and creates 5 1 up mix In Stereo mixing mode creates mono sum from both channels Upmix from stereo In Surround mixing mode creates 5 1 upmix from stereo input In Stereo mixing mode passes Left and Right channels without modification Downmix from 5 1 In Surround mixing mode takes 5 1 Surround source and creates stereo downmix In Stereo mixing mode mutes audio do not use y Pass all In Surround mixing mode passes 5 1 Surround input without modification In Stereo mixing mode passes Left and Right channels without modificatio
26. depth information on the topic of GPIO Note The Element console can be used with a combination 8 port GPIO Node PSU that also contains the Element CPU a PowerStation that includes four GPIO ports one or more standalone 8 port GPIO node These units are all convection cooled and we strongly recommend that when rack mounting these units you leave at least 1RU of space above and below to ensure adequate ventila tion GPIO Port Definitions Each Axia GPIO device has either four or eight DB 15 connectors on its back panel Each connector also known as a GPIO port can be associated with a device in your studio and provides five opto isolated inputs and five opto isolated outputs per device for machine control lamp drives and remote channel controls GPIO ports can also be monitored and controlled by our Pathfind erPC software GPIO ports are programmed to support several dif ferent types of devices How does a GPIO port know which type of device is assigned to it Back in Chapter 3 when you constructed a Source Profile for a telephone hybrid you defined the source type see Adding Backfeeds and GPIO to a Source Pro file in Chapter 3 This is important because when that source is assigned to a console fader Element uses this Source Profile selection to tell the GPIO Node what sort of command to send to the attached device If Element sees in the Source Profile that the as signed device is a
27. drop down box FEED TO SOURCE MODE Specify PGM 1 2 3 4 AUX SEND A B C D or AUTO mix minus for this source or Retain Source Setting Choosing Auto for any phone source feeds the caller PGM 1 minus when the fader is On and Phone PGM 4 pre fad er when the fader is Off AUTO START TIMER Determines whether turning this fader on will start reset the Event Timer You can Enable Disable or Retain Source Setting SIGNAL MODE Choose from Stereo Left left channel fed to both sides Right right channel fed to both sides Sum sum L R to mono and feed to both sides or Retain Source Setting SIGNAL MODE LOCK Unlock or Lock the tal ent s ability to change the Signal Mode or Retain Source Setting FADER TRIM GAIN Adjusts signal gain just before the fader if required Specify a value in the range of 25 dB or Retain Source Setting FADER TRIM LOCK Unlock or Lock the talent s ability to change the Fader Trim or Retain Source Setting PANORAMA POSITION Use Pan Balance adjust ment for this source or Retain Source Setting PHASE Adjust for phase errors May be set to Nor mal Invert Left Invert Right Invert Left And Right or Retain Source Setting EQ ACTIVE Make EQ Active for this fader source combo Bypass it or Retain Source Setting EQ HIGH MODE Switches high frequency EQ mode between Shelf and Bandpass peak or Re tain Source Setting EQ HIGH FREQUENCY You can specify the top of the Hig
28. informational in nature Others Options System contain options and settings that are used for setup of your StudioEngine The Fader Channels Menu Settings shown here are not adjustable Useful for remote assistance or diagnostics this page can tell you what sources are loaded to each fader of the Engine s associated control surface along with the headphone monitor source and backfeed mix minus if any is be ing fed to each loaded source inet a Fa wa Saaae Ce fF _ ee pe Pains 2 Eg F Es Fair m S EE t p E f f lE am ee es ed tt Fao foe fe NE rhs ee fate ai d ries a pa as a eanne faites S a ox Fig 9 2 Fader Channels screen The Return amp Monitor Inputs Menu Another informational screen choosing this menu option shows you what audio sources are currently as signed to your console s e Auxiliary returns e Control Room monitor and headphone channels e Studio Monitor channel e Source Preview Cue channel e External Preview channel The Status and Audio boxes will allow you to view the health and levels of audio that is present The Host Name field at the top of the page shows the name you ve defined for this Engine for confirmation should you be viewing the page remotely 2011 Axia Audio StudioEngine Controls 119 9 9 StudioEngine Controls e 120 zhon Input Chaumet Status Audio Source Name Patam pE Je fe ie Return 2 pr See eee
29. line of the display marked Het Ficici is underlined Push the knob again to select this line 4 You ll see a flashing underline under the first digit of the IP address Push and rotate the control knob to select the value for this digit Push again to take the value 5 Continue this sequence until your IP address is prop erly entered When finished turn the control knob until the check mark at the end of the line is high lighted and push the knob to apply the new IP ad dress value 6 When you ve set the subnet mask and gateway IP ad dress choose at the bottom of the screen 7 Youll be asked if you d like to reboot for changes to take effect select YES and connect the Ethernet 2011 Axia Audio 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections 7 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections 8 cable to your StudioEngine Secret Button Function Here it is the first of many secret controls hidden about Ele ment and meant for your Engineering eyes only If during bootup you press the StudioEngine s control knob within 6 secs of the initial screen display you ll be asked if you want to reset the front panel and HTTP passwords to factory de fault This is your backdoor into the system should you forget the login password to the front panel Changing these passwords forces a reboot StudioEngine Channel Settings For the next steps we ll be using the StudioEngine s
30. s products are to be used with registered protective interface devices which satisfy regulatory require ments in their country of use 2011 Axia Audio Warranty e 171 Warranty e 172 TCP IP How did we live without thee Anatogicly 2011 Axia Audio PS we A THLOB COMPANY Axia Audio a Telos Alliance Company 1241 Superior Ave e Cleveland Ohio 44114 USA e 1 216 241 7225 e www AxiaAudio com
31. trol when processing is being applied to a signal Compression controls the dynamic range of an audio signal It generally reduces the volume of very loud audio helping to keep from blowing out the mic channel with too much volume It can be used to make your mic channel sound fatter evening out the highs and lows of your vocal pattern It can also increase the overall perceived fullness of your voice Too much com pression however can make your voice sound hard and squashed Use it sparingly To use compression you must first set your threshold value usually expressed in dB When the audio signal is louder than this threshold its gain is reduced The amount of gain reduction applied depends on the Compression Ratio setting For example with a 2 1 ratio for every 2 decibels the input signal increases the output is allowed to increase only 1 decibel The Freeze Gate is used to prevent suck up of room noise during speech pauses When ac tive gain is not increased by the compressor when audio is absent Freeze would be the default since it almost always improves results De Essing is just what you think it is a way to electronically remove extra sibilance from your mic channel If your mic is particularly sensitive Won to s and th sounds and accentuates them on air De Essing helps reduce these sounds to more manageable levels As with compression too much de essing will prod
32. vot iis geile allie nadine Foe J Parid Pari PotD em Ue es Pbi Fari 1 ere DESAT Poe ii Lb car ane hihi E 4 VE emd 1 oa TEn El igma PETEN E E Ayn IMA E E amp keie IE aag Re Tees E E ple 1E Oat Glia eed gt E A le 1 a ee El Im Figure E 5 GPIO status indications Now assign the Mic channel you re working with to one of the channels of your Element Navigate to the the Element GPIO Configuration page as shown in Figure E 5 above and observe the status indicators for the lights and input commands on your mic controller as you tog gle the accessory panel from On to Off Refer to the table in Figure E 6 for the Mic GPIO profile Programming a Mic Control Panel connected toa GPIO Node Connection This section applies when connecting a Mic Control accessory panel to the GPIO port of an Axia GPIO Node It assumes you have already made the cable connection described above in Installation Using a PC connected to the Axia network enter the configuration page for the GPIO Node to which your ac cessory panel is connected Create a name on the listing that corresponds to the port to which you wired your Mic Control Panel and enter the channel number of the mic source you want it to control Now assign the Mic channel you re working with to one of the channels of your Element Navigate to the GPIO Node s Configuration page and observe the sta tus indicators for the lights and input commands on
33. 3 Settings for configuring Element for operation with Telos phone systems Note For complete instructions on how to use thes options when setting up a phone system with Element please refer to Appendix D Working With Phone Hybrids 2011 Axia Audio Preview rang Preview switching mode Hybrid ancwer mode C Pre fader ten AMter fader kiten Solo go ANEL ON bara Preview OFF Preven Of tars CHANNEL OFF Noetmal auto aduer Geatled O unne ON mowers brydei Ounae ON ce Preire ON serovone brybrid Knob Function Nore G Fader Tren Level CO Pretenp Gain Adhat Backward feed enabled Geabled Dsatied Backward feed den gain 30 0 a8 off Ute 0 0 Logs port Osatied PIO Ready enabdled dsatled Feed to source mode Exchstve mode Shared mode Osabled Enabled Pho POMLIPHONE Prone O MORAM I PROGRAM PROGRAMI PROGRAM 4 O AKAWA AK SENDS O AK SEND C AK SENDD Figure 3 4 More Source Profile Settings PREVIEW ROUTING Determines where the Pre view signal originates Pre fader listen is the legacy CUE function that most broadcasters use After fader listen SOLO is preferred by some users and is selected here PREVIEW SWITCHING MODE Determines what will happen to a source s off air Preview assign ment when that source is taken to air Normal Auto Switching Disabled The Pre view bus assignment will be retained even after
34. 55 4 4 Configuring GPIO 56 Assigning GPIO to a Source As you ve seen by studying the previous pages a lot of the work of assigning logic to a source is done for you once a GPIO port is linked with a Source Profile all that remains to do is to solder cables connecting the GPIO s DB 15 connectors to the device s control interface So how do you link a GPIO port with a Source Pro file It s very easy let s do it step by step Note This procedure assumes that you have already defined at least one Source Profile using the instructions outlined in Chapter 3 Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of your Element console or if so equipped your PowerStation Choose GPIO Configuration from menu Enter your password if prompted default log in is user leave the password field blank Note If your systems includes a PowerStation you will have four GPIO ports If your system uses an Element Power Supply GPIO unit you have eight GPIO ports as shown in Figure 4 1 2 If you haven t previously assigned any GPIO ports the GPIO definitions screen will be blank Notice the status indicators at the top of the page showing the state of the input and output pins of each port Click on the list icon to the right of an unused line element s Element Control Center GPIO Configuration Pure more hostie 31 CR Host Mego gt 2 Guest N Guest we pande S 3 Out ot aaral ust s ours
35. AUX send the other control is adjusting Pressing this knob will exit the Aux Sends Menu screen Send A B C D Rotate these knobs to adjust the level of the audio yov ll be sending to any or all of the four Aux Send buses Pre Post Fader Pushing any of the four Send SoftKnobs toggles the activity state of that par ticular Send The state is indicated in the display above On Pre sends the source assigned to the fader to the selected Aux Send bus prior to having its gain adjusted by the fader fixed level On Post sends the source assigned to the fad er to the selected Aux Send bus after having its gain adjusted by the fader variable level Off sends no audio to the Aux Send bus Pressing Aux Sends again returns to the Chan nel Options screen e Feed To Source Key If the assigned source i e a codec or phone hybrid has an associated backfeed or mix minus pressing this key allows the board op to change the audio supplied through the backfeed This selection is normally pre set when a Source Profile is constructed see Chapter 3 Working With Sources for information on Source Profiles but can be modified on the fly Figure 5 13 Feed to Source menu screen The Select Take knob when rotated scrolls through the list of available audio sources that can supply backfeed or mix minus 2011 Axia Audio Automatic backfeeds audio from the Phone bus when the channel is Off and audio from the P
36. Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 OUTPUT COMMON RETURN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT NIC 5 4 3 2 i V GND SOURCE IN N N N N IN 45V 5 4 3 2 1 COM POWER SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio Configuring GPIO e 45 4 Configuring GPIO e 46 4 GPIO Line Input Logic INPUTS ON Command OFF Command PREVIEW Command RESET Command READY Command OUTPUTS ON Lamp fIvee Notes Active Low Input Turns channel ON Active Low Input Turns channel OFF amp sends 100 msec STOP pulse Active Low Input Turns preview ON Active Low Input Turns channel OFF while not sending a STOP pulse Active Low Input Illuminates OFF lamp to indi cate source s readiness 1 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return ON OFF Lamp 2 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return OFF and READY is active PREVIEW Lamp 3 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when PREVIEW mon Return is ON START Pulse 4 Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 msec pulse when the mon Return channel status changes from OFF to ON STOP Pulse Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 msec pulse when the mon Return channel status changes from POWER amp COMMON ON to OFF Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Logic 5 Volt supply Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon Logi
37. Countdown timer to Trigger Command preset max time and starts timer Element only Not Used OUTPUTS Studio ON AIR Lamp Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates whenever Studio mon Return monitors are muted DIM Studio Monitor 2 Lamp Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates whenever Studio mon Return monitors are DIMMED Event Timer Trigger Output 3 Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 ms PULSE sent when mon Return event timer is started from zero Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 ms PULSE sent when mon Return countdown timer is started from preset max Element only Countdown Timer Trigger 4 Output TALK TO STUDIO MONITOR 2 Active Lamp Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates whenever the mon Return TALK TO STUDIO MON2 func tion is active Source Common Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Logic Common Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon Logic 5 Volt supply Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 Fused if source is not providing voltage active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 5 7 10 Source Supply NOT CONNECTED OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT N C 5 4 3 2 1 s 17 l6 Ts l4 l3 To Ti eeee0e00 SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia A
38. If you find anything in this manual that you feel needs clarifica tion or correction please let us know by sending an e mail to cnovak AxiaAudio com About This Manual This manual covers the details of the Element broad cast console PowerStation and StudioEngine How ever it is assumed in this document that you are fa miliar with Livewire s basic concepts as outlined in the companion Introduction to Livewire System Design Reference and Primer or Audio Over IP Building Pro AoIP Systems with Livewire by Steve Church and Skip Pizzi available from Elsevier Press If you have not done so please review that mate rial first In it we explain the ideas that motivated Livewire and how you can use and benefit from it as well as nitty gritty details about wiring connec tors and the like Since Livewire is built on standard networks we also help you to understand general network engineering so that you have the full back ground for Livewire s fundamentals After reading Introduction to Livewire you will know what s up when you are speaking with the network guys that are often hanging around radio stations these days New in this Element v 2 0 Manual This manual update written in December 2011 de tails the workings of the Axia Element console when used with StudioEngine or PowerStation Major changes in this manual are located in Appendix D Working With Phones where new methods of con necting to Telos IP ph
39. Just provide a channel num ber to each VMIX Fader you d like to send out e Out Stream Type Set the stream type you want to provide to the network for each VMIX output Live Stream Standard Stream or Disabled After you ve given the Submix output a unique Channel number enable it here Normally all of the VMIX fader channels remain Disabled unless you have other uses for them e Status Audio An indicator field to tell you whether the stream is valid and audio is present Note that if you have just enabled VMIX streams you will need to click Apply to commit your changes This will re load the browser page and refresh the Status fields What can you do with a VMIX Now that you know how to set up and enable VMIX what might you do with it Here are some examples A mix of sources to monitor Some facilities may need to monitor one or more sources in addition to program audio like the squawk channel some satellite feed providers use to relay an nouncements If you wanted to monitor this squawk audio on your Preview speaker without taking up a fader assignment you could create a mix of the squawk source and the Preview mix from the engine The Sub mix Out would be the audio source that you would route to the Preview speaker Note In this example the squawk audio would not be muted if the CR Mic were turned on aS a normal Preview channel would be GPIO control of your VMIX
40. Line drop down box Phone For Hybrid Nr Pear select the hybrid that cor Figure D 3 Selecting a source on Hybrid 1 the right keys answer lines on Hybrid2 In 24 line mode both left and right key banks will answer lines using Hybrid 1 To answer lines on any other hybrid operators will use the module s SET key to choose which hybrid to use Selecting Auto uses the configuration of the VX Show to dynami cally set the number of lines used 4 Click Save when done Note that after editing and saving a Show Profile you must reload it from your Element console in order for changes to take effect responds to the Primary Source audio you selected above Telos VX supports unlimited number of hy brids per studio To find out what Hybrid number corresponds to the audio source you selected go to the VX Engine Studio configuration page and check the sequence number of the Selectable LW channel that you are using as the audio source here The first Selectable LW channel counts as Hybrid 1 Conferencing Allowed lets you permit button mash conferencing Unless you specially wish to prohibit this type of conferencing select Yes from the drop down box e Fixed Line lets you assign a line permanently to a Configuring an Element Source Profile for Inkak use with VX ns s In the Element Control Center navigate to Source PEE EE RE gt Profiles Click New Source Profile and a source list o Use 24
41. Pees fox CR Monitor INTERNAL PGMI j law CRHesdphoms INTERNALPGMT p Se Mentor SRCTS TBR Fig 9 3 Return amp Monitor Inputs Screen The Program amp Monitor Outputs Menu This is where you enable and assign unique channel numbers to all of your console s outputs If any of your Element s outputs or monitor feeds are disabled in this menu that channel will have no audio output Host name Studio Engine 11 Chamel 1 32767 Mods Statw Audio Propam 1 101 liveSteeo wO Progam 2 102 Live Steso vlo Progam 3 103 liveSteeo vifoK Program 4 104 Live Stereo mlo Progam 4 Record 1105 Live Steso xlo Aux Send 1 106 Disabled m psss pa AuxSend2 107 Outed vif Aux Send 3 108 Onabled bo fass fiam Aux Send 4 109 Disabled an eee cee CR Monitor Direc 710 dse vif CR Monitor 11 lve Steso wv 0k CR Headphones 1712 liveSteeo vlok Preview 3 Live Steteo vj OK Talk to CR 114 Disabled w Ess pa Guest Headphones 115 Live Stereo A Sto o Monitor 116 Disabled mi ey Talent Haphones 117 Live Stereo v o tak me aed a a Ca a Ormia Processing Process Progam in all monitoring paths CR besiphonss for any selection Select preset Bypass iv Cae Fig 9 4 Program amp Monitor Outputs Screen The outputs you control are Program 1 4 Your console s main Program bus outputs Program 4 Record Special output for recording devices which feeds the contents the Program 4 bus post fader an
42. PowerStation web pages Note If you are using an Element console with PowerStation this chapter is for you If you are using your Element with StudioEngine please refer to Chapters 8 and 9 Be k ye Hgoy Bockmerts jos Hie TL C X aw tipuna a a _ e KB Donaet Contr Career PomerStation Central Center PowerStation Control Center Welcome p M San Meman Surtaro Sarii P O ine Mom CAL PEnio Version Information Package Version 220 8 0er 200 Fase 109 System Kermek Umax 2 6 17 14 606 Uptime Ody O20 CPU usage 1 0 Network co rfomatcn Net usage Fx 20 001 Moos Du L26950 Mes File System Information hirtysem we Used Available Larta Macncry eR BR Bee Bike 417 ROM 139 97 0 204 42 MB 1 9 fortipersstert mets 45 57M0 17 2660 WM 27 0 botipi 759M i20 GNM Fig 10 1 PowerStation Home Page PowerStation Configuration Screens Home Page This is the jumping off point for PowerStation specific settings Previous chapters have covered the basic items including Source Channel allocation and configuration of Element Source and Show Profiles Chapter 8 covered the Element Advanced Controls and that information will not be repeated here This chapter will cover advanced topics related to the PowerStation s configuration and advanced features Figure 10 1 shows the PowerStation home page From here you can see li
43. Preview audio to the board operator s headphones When inactive audio from the Preview bus is heard exclusively in the Pre view speakers The Preview To HP key illuminates when this function is active There are three different Preview to HP modes the current mode is indicated by an annunciator on the Ele ment display screen just below the headphone selection tally Off When Preview to HP is off the selector key is unlit No preview audio will be heard in the board op s HP path Stereo Pressing the Preview to HP key once from the Off state sends preview audio when present into both sides of the operator s head phone feed overriding the Monitor audio The Preview to HP key is now lit Split Pressing the Preview to HP key a second time toggles SPLIT mode In this mode audio from the Preview channel overrides the Head phone Monitor selection in the left headphone channel only Program audio is still present in the right channel of the operator s headphones Global Options Section The Global Options keys are used to load Show Profiles and to customize Monitor Meter Aux Sends Returns and Fader settings 2011 Axia Audio e Profile Key Pressing this key allows the board operator to browse gram 1 fader up channel On The board op loads a new Show Profile to ready Element for the next show the Show Profile he s load ing has a CD player assigned to Channel and select from the list of
44. Profile which specifies a Locked fader the gain value is locked to the posi tion of the fader at the moment the Show Profile is loaded When you Unlock the fader using the Channel Options menu the fader will resume working normally from the current position You can move it and lock again in a different position if you wish If the fader has been moved the first touch after Unlocking immediately resets the gain to the fader s current position GROUP START Specify whether this fader is a Master Slave or Indepen dent This setting is tied to those dis played in the Show Profile Group Start Screen a change made here will apply on the Group Start Screen and vice CURRENT SOURCE The source cur rently specified for monitoring in the Mon itors page of the Show Profile e SOURCE FOR PRESET 1 Specify the source that will load when the acces sory panel s Ext 1 key is pressed SOURCE FOR PRESET 2 Specify the source that will load when the acces sory panel s Ext 2 key is pressed HEADPHONES MASTER GAIN Specify the initial amount of gain that the Individual Headphone Feed will have when the Show Profile loads Turn then Off or Use up to 85 dB of cut Figure 6 2 an Element accessory panel with headphone selector s TALKBACK START VOLUME LOW LIMIT Specify a minimum gain value for versa For information on the Group Start Function talkback 72 to 10 dB This prevents talent from ple
45. Protocol The failure or disconnection of any PowerSta tion will not affect the operation of others and any audio from common sources connected to an operating Power Station will continue uninterrupted Ethernet Core Switch Trunk mode for an uplink port supports the connec tion of a PowerStation to a 1000 Mbps port on a properly configured Ethernet core switch 2011 Axia Audio 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections e 15 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections 16 Line Inputs and Outputs 4dBu analog Microphone Inputs 50dBu analog GPIO Ports 5 GPI and 5 GPO per port AES EBU Digital Inputs and Outputs mot COCOOCOOCOOCOCOOOOOOOOOOO000000000000000 eeecceee eo 100 Mbs Ethernet Backup PSU Connector Figure 2 3 PowerStation AUX Rear Panel Connections Other Ethernet Configurations The configuration of a system using redundant core switches and other fault tolerant configurations is pos sible Contact Axia technical support or your network administrator for guidance See Chapter 10 Power Station Controls for more details on Ethernet SFP Modules Both 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports are equipped with SFP Small Form Pluggable slots that can be used for media converters Some facilities have Ethernet runs that could exceed 100 meters Since 100 meters is the maxi mum distance allowed for UTP cable a fiber trunk must used in these cases and various SFP modules provide a
46. Remote Mute functions are also provided and can be activated using a remote On Off Talk Mute panel Remote Talk lets talent and guests communicate with the board operator When Talk is remotely activat ed on a CR Guest mic channel outputs to program buses for that channel are muted and the mic audio is fed to the Talkback bus While this is active the Status Symbol on the guest s fader strip displays a T icon When the user stops talking the channel returns to normal The opera tor can then reply using the fader s Talkback key When the Remote Mute function is activated the Status Symbol displays and all the channel outputs are muted until the command is released Control Room Guest Microphone channels will mute the Control Room speakers and the Preview speakers whenever the channel is ON or if Preview or Record keys are selected If only the Phone key is selected the Control Room speakers will mute independently leav ing the Preview speakers un muted Finally Control Room Guest Microphone channels have provisions for an individual Headphone feed This 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations 87 5 Element Operations 88 is especially useful for talent and guests in the same room as the board operator their headphone feeds will all monitor the audio selected on the Monitor 2 selec tor but the board op can communicate with each person privately using Talkback key on their fader strip Studio Micr
47. an additional setting that con figures the sample rate convertors for these sources 2011 Axia Audio 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections e 25 Setup and Connections 26 Element with PowerStation 2 There are two possible settings e Asynchronous this is the usual setting and enables sample rate conversion Any valid AES source can be used in this mode without con cerns about dropouts due to mismatched clocks e Synchronous This setting may be used for standalone AES nodes but is not suitable for a standalone PowerStation since the PowerStation cannot sync to an external AES clock Source Configuration MixEngine The PowerStation includes an integrated Studio Mix Engine This section of the PowerStation creates all of the Program Bus sources that are delivered to the net work as well as those sources associated with monitor and headphone feeds Figure 2 19 shows the configura tion web page for this section To get to this page select Mix Engine Prog and Monitor Out Channel Name and Number This section is where you specify the Livewire chan nel number You will observe that the names are prede termined and cannot be changed As discussed in the previous section the channel number can be any number from 1 to 32 766 You may wish to follow the convention of using the last octet as a base for your Livewire chan nel numbers For example if the Element IP address is 192 168 0 100
48. as the external preview source in Element show profiles Call drop flash The amount of seconds for which the Listen indicator will flash after the call was dropped to help identify the station which initiated the call Trigger Level Defines the priority of this station for cases when multiple stations call the same loca tion The receiving location will provide priority in accordance with each devices setting Dim level Define the degree of dimming in dB which will be applied to lower priority calls 0 de feats the Dim command Tap to latch timeout Defines the amount of time in which a press is considered a Tap to latch The intercom has a latch feature where momentarily pressing the talk button latches the Talk function The amount of time defined here defines the maximum time the button is in the down state before the call is considered a press and hold call A value of 0 de feats the Tap to latch feature This is a global setting to the module Intercom Key Assignment The options in this field will vary based on the type 2011 Axia Audio 9 StudioEngine Controls e 121 9 StudioEngine Controls e 122 Intercom Configuration GPIO Configuration Intercom Label Studo Sep ma 10 characters LNGUE MNOM mame Intercom Alternate Label maax 10 characters alo Livewire source name meee Livewire channel mamber 1 32767 Preview Mix channel mmber 1 32767 Call drop flash Trigger Level 4 Defaut Din lower pri
49. channels In this scenario each VMIX submixer becomes one 5 Channel ACU GPIO hardware devices can also be mapped to the Channels within PathfinderPC and it will allow those triggers to pass through to Prophet if the associated audio channels are turned on just like the ACU The PathfinderPC suite also includes a Bridge ap plication that may be run on the Prophet sys tem to convert the serial data to TCP which can then be passed to multiple clustered Path finderPC servers for redundancy Finally PathfinderPC s Software Authority pro tocol translator includes commands to control any VMIXer present on Element consoles in the system any machine that can send user defined serial or TCP commands can also control and read VMIX functions through PathfinderPC Using these techniques VMIX can be used as a fully automated virtual mixer in the background of each Element See the PathfinderPC manual for the specific details on configuring Pathfind erPC with VMIX Manipulating Streams With VMODE What does VMODE do As you know audio processing in the modern world requires DSP The StudioEngine provides the DSP for Axia IP Audio networks You ve probably noticed that nearly all audio within an Axia network travels as stereo Livewire streams Au dio Node inputs with the exception of Mic Nodes are stereo and so are Engine default sources Most of the time this is just what you need But in some cases an 2011 Axia Au
50. conjunction with a PowerStation AUX chassis This is a type 7W2 DB combo connector to be used exclusively for this purpose If there is a failure of either the PowerStation MAIN or AUX s power supply it will automatically uti lize backup power provided by this connector and the PSU indicator on the front panel will indicate the failure condition Note The PowerStation MAIN and AUX provide backup power to each other The failure of a power supply in either a MAIN or AUX unit will cause it to automatically and seamlessly use the backup power supplied by the remaining healthy unit Do not connect the PSU2 connector to any device other than a PowerStation MAIN or AUX chassis If you are connecting an AUX to a hot MAIN be sure the AUX unit is powered up by first connecting PSU1 to your mains power supply Audio Connections The PowerStation s rear panel contains all of the connectors used for audio I O Ethernet GPIO power supply and the connections to your Element control sur face Note that we use RJ 45 connectors are used for four purposes e Analog audio inputs and outputs e AES audio inputs and outputs e CANBus Element internal modules and exter nal accessory panels e Ethernet some with PoE Power over Ethernet It is important to follow the proper conventions for wiring these connectors and ensure that the connector functions are not confused as some damage may result with improper connections An
51. control keys operate Element s onscreen event and countdown timers and allow users to set op tions determining the behavior of these timers 2011 Axia Audio Figure 5 23 Timer menu e Timer Options Key Pressing the Timer Options key on the Standard Monitor module opens the Timer Menu Figure 5 21 This menu allows users to adjust how the onscreen tim ers behave Note that the SoftKnobs are divided into two sections Countdown Timer and Count Up Timer The 2 Fader Monitor has a slightly different display that changes from Count Up to Count Down with the first and second press of the Timer Options button A third press closes the Timer Options The Countdown timer is useful for counting down to network joins top of hour IDs and oth er events which require exact timing The Count down timer is started stopped and reset manu ally using the controls displayed when the Timer Options key is pressed To use Rotate the SoftKnob marked Begin Time Reset to set the interval from which the countdown will begin As you rotate small numbers below the red counter onscreen will inform you of the new countdown interval Press the Begin Time Reset knob to set the new time you ve dialed in Press the Start Stop knob to begin or end the countdown Pressing Freeze holds the on screen Timer display so you may take note of it the timer continues to count while the display is frozen and a second press o
52. for any purpose nor claims any responsibility for operation or accuracy Warranty This product is covered by a five year limited war ranty the full text of which is included in the rear section of this manual Service You must contact Axia before returning any equip ment for factory service Axia will issue a Return Authorization number which must be written on the exterior of your shipping container Please do not include cables or accessories unless specifically re quested by the Technical Support Engineer at Axia Be sure to adequately insure your shipment for its replacement value Packages without proper authori zation may be refused US customers please contact Axia technical support at 1 216 241 7225 All oth er customers should contact their local representative to arrange for service We strongly recommend being near the unit when you call so our Support Engineers can verify infor mation about your configuration and the conditions under which the problem occurs If the unit must return to Axia we will need your serial number lo cated on the rear panel Credit Where Credit s Due Much gratefulness and declarations of kinship to Bruce Wilkinson Milos Nemcik Gints Linis Mi chael Dosch and the rest of the Axia team in help ing to assemble this manual Kudos guys you are owed more beers than I can count c n Introduction iv Feedback is welcome At Axia we love to hear your feedback
53. generated mix minus feeds as it has fad ers If the Feed to Source mode is set to Auto the most common option see Chapter 3 Working with Sources for the section entitled Source Profile Op tions phone callers hear the output of the Program 1 bus minus himself when the channels they re assigned to are ON When the caller s channel is OFF their chan nel s Talkback key is lit and they hear the Board Opera tor s mic routed to their Talkback feed When a Phone Channel has been assigned to an Element fader the Status Symbol display located above the channel name will display an icon to show the board operator what is being fed to the caller Phone feed to source outputs can also be locked to backfeed only PGM 1 PGM 2 PGM 3 or PGM 4 us 2011 Axia Audio ing the options provided when constructing the Source Profile for your hybrid This automatic switching mode makes it very easy to prep callers and then seamlessly put them on the air with a minimum of button pushes See Chapter 3 Channels configured for Phone sources can be turned on and off remotely and will provide on off status to a remote logic device Remote Preview is also provided as are lamp drivers for On Off and Preview Start and Stop pulses can be sent when the channel is turned on or off respectively See Chapter 4 Configuring GPIO for information interfacing to GPIO inputs and outputs Codec Channel Operation The Codec Channel
54. has only two software banks If both banks are op PE Waie Sytem ahont dir mining oialiyatio nto full you must eliminate one or you will not see Linh peat ma the File Browse or Upload controls Instead semi wom te oe et you ll see Menem wage Ne ieee metan Eneee eppi were from maani and Tempera lerc on ped CI The Commit to Bank 0 button Pressing this fanet COE button takes the software in Bank 1 and loads it Mew pamests 4 aes iw e testy a mer punais sh Sidhe Dague 2 4e ORUOLIGUOEE 16 DeeOU Oa into Bank 0 which opens Bank 1 for new soft Cea GDeki do Engen 26 be HL LNOLINE OCI 1690 58 TEE ee tee ware a EOE You can run Engine software from either Bank 0 Hew peeved tng to etme or o Wema Linton m mtd gter chamewe the moment bend Panty ta a ponent or Bank 1 Simply click on the radio button next C Cien to the software bank you wish to run from and Fide Sadie Engine System screen click Apply Selected Bank The Engine will re boot after changing banks so plan this operation e The Restart section lets you remotely Restart the for off hours or switch program output to another StudioEngine performing a complete reboot Of course if the StudioEngine is rebooted it will stop delivering audio until is has reloaded its operating system and the StudioEngine software This will studio to avoid program interruptions The Errors message field will show diagnostic messages about the state of
55. have been set aside specifically for use with local networks Multicast allows efficient one to many connec tions so Livewire uses that for its audio streams source advertising and synchronization signals You do not need to assign these multicast ad dresses because the system does this automati cally For more information on network construction please refer to our companion Introduction to Livewire System Design Reference and Primer available at www AxiaAudio com downloads When you install the PowerStation please mount it in an equipment rack that has free air flow DO NOT ob struct the air flow to the PowerStation since it is depen dent on convection cooling The PowerStation does not have any fans so you can use it in a quiet studio environ ment but you MUST provide adequate ventilation Do not obstruct the air flow above or below the PowerSta tion Those vents serve a very important purpose To install the Element control surface in your studio furniture you ll need to prepare a cutout in the counter top A dimensional drawing with all pertinent measure ments is found in Appendix A Specifications Make certain that there s adequate clearance inside the furni ture for the required power cable entry into the console knockout plugs are located at both bottom rear corners of Element for cable routing access 2011 Axia Audio PowerStation s configuration is web based so you ll need a computer with a w
56. hybrid s Source Profile the Source Type option is set to Phone and the Feed to Source Mode is set to Auto Also set the Back feed Enabled Disabled option to Enabled 2 Use your Web browser to connect with the Audio Node or PowerStation I O you ll be sending your backfeed to Choose festinatione from the main menu to enter the Destinations screen Figure 3 7 we ll set up our mix minus for output 5 3 Just to the right of each Channel name box you ll see a list icon Click on the list icon for output 5 A list of available sources will pop up Figure 3 8 Notice that the names and channel numbers of the Wap dy te 1 40 5 AT i amp van S PronGamniwedivne ALOL Agre Phora eer Modia soe twit rnd ng werna kag ry Wed kay ahg Cabana Sr Mix Ungve Fak derw Pe wel ree a PowerStation Control Center 10 Subsystem Main re Sorte Dewtingticns ato veer Destinations tama t centr aut ce mortrgao a 2 ce wathue 2012 oP tear E 2 cram aos soavon DE DCN ayapa DE LIAD Puto aere 5 zan auro i ane Ea Tore M e E oe sore TAL Sys ered ER Hoson awr Figure 3 7 PowerStation I O Destinations screen 2011 Axia Audio 3 Configuring Inputs 37 3 Configuring Inputs 38 sources are both displayed for easy identification We ll choose Studio 1 Phone from the list the list window closes and you re returned to the Destina tions screen The
57. hybrid control operation and descrip tion of Status Symbols used please refer to the Opera tor s Manual supplied with your Telos phone system Tip If the caller cannot hear the operator the most common cause is having the phone chan nel turned ON Remember when the phone channel is ON the backfeed to caller is a mix minus of PGM 1 default Only when the phone channel is OFF will the caller hear what is as signed to PGM 4 Phone Appendix D Working With Phone Hybrids pro vides details on the configuration of various Telos phone systems when used with your Element console Note The Element s 2 Fader Monitor Module also includes two Phone faders complete with Set and Hold buttons 2011 Axia Audio CALL CONTROL MODULE Figure 5 3 Call Controller 2 Fader Phone Module 5 Element Operations 67 5 Element Operations 68 Production Module Controls adjusts the send level pushing the knob toggles the send between PRE FADER and POST FADER The Element Production Module gives production room gurus quick access to often used EQ and position ing controls for each loaded source Its controls provide direct access to the op tions presented in the EQ amp DYNAMICS options screens detailed later in this chap ter About Element EQ Our EQ model is three band quasi parametric Con trols are provided for center frequency and boost cut with a unique SmartQ automatic bandwidth sys
58. is applied and shifts to Shelf mode when cut is applied Press ing this knob toggles EQ between Active and Bypass Note that the centre SoftKnob on the 2 Fader Master Module performs the Active Bypass toggle function Rotating the Lo Freq knob adjusts the center fre quency of the low EQ band 20 320 Hz Rotating the Mid Gain and Mid Freq SoftKnobs adjust gain and center frequencies of the mid range EQ band 125 Hz 2 kHz The Hi Gain knob adjusts the boost cut of the high frequency band 1 25 kHz 20 kHz Hi Freq Shelf Peak Rotating this SoftKnob adjusts the center frequency of the high EQ band 1 kHz 16 kHz Pushing this knob toggles the high band EQ method between Peak and Shelf modes Pressing EQ amp Dynamics again displays the Dy namics screen Standard Monitor Module only Note High Mid and Low band adjustments provide up to 25 dB of cut and 15 dB of boost Element EQ features SmartQ automatic band width system that varies the Q of the selected parametric band to provide the most pleasing EQ effect Dynamics controls are available if the selected source is a Mic Codec or Phone input Pressing the Dy namics amp EQ key twice Standard Monitor Module in vokes the Dynamics menu With the 2 Fader Monitor Module use the functions knod to select the Dynamics function From here you can add Gating Compres sion and De essing to a microphone channel Nor mally these values are part o
59. is used for codec sources Like the Phone Channel each codec source is brought up on its own channel and an individual Feed to Source mix minus output is provided for each codec Codec Chan nels can be turned on and off remotely and provide on off status to a remote logic device Remote Talk and Remote Mute are also provided allowing talent to take control using their own On Off Mute Talk panels Talk enables remote talent to communicate with the board op using the Talkback bus When Talk is acti vated all outputs for that channel are muted and the source audio is fed to the Talkback bus the channel s Talkback key lights and its Status Symbol displays T When the user stops talking the channel returns to normal and its Talkback key flashes for three seconds alerting the board operator to the guest who spoke to him and enabling him to reply using the Talkback key When the remote mute function is activated the Sta tus Symbol displays fi and all the channel outputs are muted until the command is released The mix minus output normally feeds Program 1 audio to the remote but can be switched to Program 2 The Feed to Source output on a Codec Channel is a dual mono output occupying both sides of the stereo pair The Left output is normally used for remote talent s headphone feed and is interrupted by Talkback audio when the board op talks to the remote The Right output sends uninterrupted program audio without ta
60. law of na ture When the source goes ON the time in which the audio adjusts form OFF to ON the gain value set in the first field is the Up time It the field is set to 1 second the audio will fade up to the gain value in 1 second If the field is set to 0 the audio will have no fade period and simply just turn on at the gain value specified The second field controls the ON to OFF fade time This function can be used to create cross fades between sources when PathfinderPC is dynamically making changes to the VMIX based on conditions met Gain You ll find a Master gain setting for the Sub mix the mix of all five inputs at the top of this col umn followed by individual gain settings for each input that establish the gain for the input when it is in the ON state Out Name This column shows the name of the stream as it will appear when viewed in source as signment boxes elsewhere on the network Channel the 2nd instance of it Assigns a chan nel number to the VMIX output which is a Livewire source Just as each audio source from an Audio Node and each mix and monitor feed from a StudioEngine must have a unique channel number so do each of the VMIX sources that you want to make available to the network In most cases only the Submix output itself needs a unique channel number but if you so desire each VMIX input can also be sent back to the network as a unique source post the ON OFF and gain stage of the VMIX
61. line for output 5 now displays the channel number and name of the source 4 Now comes the step that makes this output a mix minus Each Destination entry line has a drop box at the end click on the drop down and choose To source Automagic If the hybrid source is loaded to an Engine and the engine is generating a mix minus source already the list box will show TWO iden tical channels for the source but one will have a description of TO in front of it Selecting this source automatically selects TO SOURCE in the TYPE box Figure 3 8 Picking a source from the list box 5 Click Apply 6 Now point your browser back to your Element Con trol Center page or IO Subsection if you are using a PowerStation and choose GFIO Configuration from the menu sidebar You may also use a GPIO Node other than the Power Supply GPIO or Power Station that shipped with your Element just point your browser to that node s IP address instead 7 The GPIO setup screen uses the same method of as signing devices to ports as the Analog Node Pick a port to map your hybrid s contact closures to us ing the list tool and click Apply Figure 3 9 shows the four port GPIO section of a PowerStation MAIN The Element and GPIO node are similar but have eight ports IO Subsystem Main Home Sources Destinations GPIO Meters System QoS GPIO Configuration Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 hpt BREE SEES Be Bee Outputs P
62. lt Provew stadic E 1038 lt CCCEC RES 10 CH 11105 lt Pgm Rogas Ff DAt Load Output Gain dB From saro hr Gefaut OO From source hi Z Gefauk 0 0 From source hiz default 00 From source hiz default 00 Tosorce hZ defauk 0 0 From source hZ defa 00 in From source v 0 0 Erl From tource Y oo Figure 2 20 PowerStation I O Destination Configuration Channel The Channel will be determined by the Livewire channel you wish to deliver to this destination You may enter the Channel Number directly if you happen to know the Livewire channel number or you may use the pop up box to select the appropriate Livewire source Once you make your selection and appreciate the de scriptive name you used to identify the source click Apply to confirm and save the Destination setting Type The Type field identifies whether the destination is a from source or to source output Lets briefly review this concept You will recall from the Introduction to Livewire System Design Reference amp Primer manual that Livewire permits special bidirectional streams for use in cases where a source and destination are associated such as a codec or hybrid The return feed to such devices is usual ly a mix minus clean feed generated by a mixer or mix engine fed back to the device that is the primary audio source and usually the name of the stream in question You can create a bidirection
63. name you give the con sole to identify it in the Web interface You might want to name it after the studio it s in y IP Address This Element s unique network ad dress In the case of the PowerStation the Ether net switch and Audio I O will be automatically assigned the next two addresses in sequence If a PowerStation AUX exists it will be assigned a fourth address in this sequence Make sure all of these addresses are available y Netmask Enter your network s submask here y Gateway If you have a core switch or a network gateway to allow access from outside your facil ity enter that address here A gateway is required for advanced IP address configurations and for connection to an external NTP server DNS 0 amp DNS 1 If your Axia network is con nected to the outside world you can specify your ISP s DNS servers in these fields Why would you want to do this Well you could simplify NTP access by entering the server s name mzdu instead of 128 243 1 1 Or if you set up a DNS server in house you could give real names to your StudioEngines and Phone systems then use those names instead of IP ad dresses in Element configuration pages e Web Access Password By default the user name is set to 42er and the password is blank If you want to add a password type it in and click Change Note that passwords will not display here once changed so be sure to make a record of
64. network audio streams To avoid confusion we ll call Element channel strips Faders Sources are assigned to faders for use on air or in production During initial configuration the Source Profiles are programmed by the engineer for appropri ate logic and options as outlined in previous chapters afterwards whenever that source is assigned to a fader source logic follows Fader settings are instantly reconfigured whenever a source is selected to accommodate the unique require ments of the source For example a fader controlling a microphone source also controls appropriate monitor mutes A fader controlling a line source sends start and stop commands when the channel is turned on and off Sources such as an off air feed can also be fed di rectly to the monitors for auditioning without being as signed to a fader Mix Minus Mix minus setup especially for live broadcasts has always been one of the most confusing aspects of run ning a radio console Element makes mix minus easy by automating it The operator never has to worry about sending a source back to itself it just can t happen Several mix minus choices fixed and switching are possible and are configured for each source when Source Profiles are defined by the engineer see Chapter 3 for details Once this setup is done no further tweak ing is needed the operator simply uses the source A Sta tus Symbol display on each
65. on the screen Turn the knob to adjust the values of these settings Rotate the HP LINK knob to choose whether the headphone source will follow the Monitor 1 source selection Push the knob to Take your selection Linked means that Headphone and Monitor 1 selections will mirror each other making a selection from one bank of keys on the Moni tor Module will automatically choose the same source on the other bank Unlinked allows Monitor 1 and Headphone sources to be selected independently of each other The strongest link You ve noticed that there are no Direct Selection Keys for the headphone source on the Monitor 2 Fader Module By de fault CR Headphones and Monitor 1 sources are linked the phones will play whatever source is assigned to the monitor speakers So how can the operator select a headphone source if s he chooses to Unlink the headphones When Unlinked is chosen in the Headphones Follow Monitors box the Preview knob doubles as the headphone source selector When the operator pushes the Preview knob the Head phone Source menu is displayed Voila 2011 Axia Audio The H P PROC knob allows the board op to turn Headphone Processing on and off define how it operates if active and change Headphone Pro cessing settings These controls are adjusted in a manner similar to Channel Options EQ settings Pushing the HP Proc knob selects Change Set tings onscreen and takes the operator to t
66. operating systems use differ Soene gt T ent methods to do this please consult your OS s docu oe ver aA mentation for specific instructions ae oe Source Profile Options a garaun 1 Enter the IP address of your Element or PowerSta PEDROIA Sa tion in your browser yov ll see the Element Control uson S mant Center or PowerStation Control Centre displayed Trinar mananami cnt onscreen Choose the Sources amp Profiles menu aaa re item choose the Configuration submenu for the Ele Ea ment Enter the user name user leave the pass se word field blank and click OK so Gea pea 2 Choose the Source Profiles menu item from the woe 3 main screen and click the New Source Profile link BESOA C cata at the bottom of the screen You re now in the Source oe Profile creation screen It will look something like mae the image in the previous frame Figure 3 1 We are showing you the entire web page so you can see OP tener Le AOE ie Peewee oe Forages Eat mon a oe pe femames msu 2 it all at once and appreciate the power of source profiles Let s now break it down into smaller sections so you can eE hears nSt a actually read the text in the figures and consider those Me ae caa eens aa logical blocks with the explanation following the Figure We will start with Figure 3 2 and the descriptions that follow Reminder Did you define your audio sources from the Engin
67. panel input connectors Other audio sources PGM1 PGM2 etc are generated internally by the PowerStation s DSP the MixEngine There are several parameters associated with the PowerStation Sources This section will discuss each of these in detail We rec ommend that you configure all Livewire sources before you attempt to configure any Destinations First we will consider the sources that originate at the rear panel con nectors the PowerStation I O Source Name Each Source needs a name so you will know what it is and where it is located We suggest that you make this name as descriptive as possible Don t make it too brief As an example don t just name MIC 3 because that doesn t tell you enough Use something more descrip tive like Studio 4 Mic 3 since this will tell you the loca tion of the source as well as describe the type of source Livewire names can contain any printable character and can be up to 24 characters long Channel This is where you will enter the unique Livewire channel number we discussed briefly a couple of pages back This number must be unique and must be less than 2011 Axia Audio 32 766 Many Axia users find PS AUX IO Sources Mozilla Firefox Eje pk yw Hiatery Bockmaris Jooks biep it helpful to choose a number that is related to the unit s IP 3 PS AUx 10 Sources address For example if the IP address of the PowerStation I O is 192 168 0 123 you might as sign Livewi
68. per son job so grab a partner Important Like any electronic device Element can be affected by static electricity Use of a personal grounding device is strongly recom mended while handling the unit Position one person at each end of Element and grasping the metal enclosure at the bottom simulta neously lift upward out of the shipping crate Remove packing materials and store them in the crate for future use Carefully lower Element into your counter top cut out taking care to lower both sides at an equal rate to avoid becoming jammed in the millwork Important Element is a drop in style control surface and requires a counter top cutout For cutout dimensions please refer to Appendix A Connections Cable connections for Element are entirely differ ent from any other mixing surface you may be famil iar with There are no audio inputs or outputs Element needs only a single data power connection to operate Important Your Element console MUST be grounded Grounding reduces the risk of elec tric shock by providing a path of least resis tance for electric current Improper grounding can result in a risk of electric shock Check with a qualified electrician if you are in doubt about how to properly ground this equip ment If your local electrical code prohibits the use of a Station Ground for this purpose as de scribed above use the specific Safety Ground your local regulations mandate Fi
69. phone type audio source has an associated back feed There are some user configuration options that affect which audio sources are fed to the hybrid under various conditions explained in the mix minus back feed section of this manual Operation Load your newly created hybrid source on a 4 Phone Module fader This can be done either manually or auto matically using Show Profiles Pressing the fader channel On button answers a ring ing in call or selects an inactive line for an outgoing call Pressing Preview has the same effect on the hybrid The keypad located on the Element Monitor module can be used to dial outbound calls It is automatically assigned to the last line that was selected You ll see the number as it is being entered on the main Element screen After the number is complete press the Enter button to start the connection Caller ID is displayed for incoming calls The icon in the overbridge near the source text name changes to show the line status The first time you press the Off button the channel audio is switched off The second time you press the Off button the call will be dropped Pressing the module s Hold button puts the call on hold The Set button on 4 Phone Module channels is not used with the Telos Two and pressing it has no ef fect Telos One and Delta Hybrids These hybrids can be controlled using Element s hardware GPIO ports Either normal 4 Fader Modules or 4 Phone Fade
70. planation of what these controls can do A Gate is a dynamics device whose function is to remove unwanted audio material below a certain threshold A gain circuit is employed to raise or lower the volume of the audio signal when the signal falls below a certain set thresh old the audio level drops down to a predeter mined level The reason they are called gates is because when they close it sounds as if the audio has suddenly stopped or has been gated You might use this on a mic channel to eliminate background noise during times when you re not speaking Threshold settings determine at what level the processor will begin working For example on a compressor when signal level exceeds the threshold setting it will be compressed below the threshold the signal will remain uncom pressed On a gate threshold determines the minimum input level required to cause the gate to open up and pass signal when input level drops below the threshold the gate will be closed pre venting signal from passing Carefully setting the threshold allows you to very specifically con trol when processing is being applied to a signal Compression controls the dynamic range of an audio signal It generally reduces the volume of very loud audio helping to keep from blowing out the mic channel with too much volume It can be used to make your mic channel sound fatter evening out the highs and lows of your vocal pattern It can als
71. players will have fader assign capability only while sources such as off air receivers will have monitor only capability About Mics and Headphone Feeds Element provides you with several headphone options all selectable from Element s Monitor Mod ule The Monitor 1 control room headphone output provides a feed intended for the Host board op s mic position and includes the abil ity to monitor the Preview bus in headphones Guests can talk to the host directly using the Talkback keys on their remote control panels The Monitor 2 headphone output sends au dio to talent and guest mic positions Talent positions include a talkback channel that the host or board op can use to communicate us ing the Talk To Monitor 2 function guest positions do not have this Talkback channel An individual headphone feed can also be con structed to associate a dedicated headphone channel with a specific mic This allows the board op to send individual targeted talkback to a specific individual using the Talkback keys without other talent or guests hearing SOURCE TYPE Define your source as a micro 2011 Axia Audio 3 Configuring Inputs e 31 3 Configuring Inputs 32 phone a line input a telephone input a codec or a computer source Operator is the board operator s mic It is the source mic for Element s TALK TO functions Its On button serves as a COUGH MUTE button Its associated logic mutes t
72. return to zero configuration option for use in returning Ele ment to a blank slate condition New Show Profile Choose this option when you want to construct an entire Show Profile completely from scratch y Capture Show Profile Takes a snapshot of the current board state and saves it for recall This is the option we ll use in just a moment You ve already set up your Element so now you can just capture your settings for further use Choose Cap ture Show Profile from the menu You ll be prompted to give your new profile a unique name after you do it ll be added to the list of available profiles Voila You ve just created and saved a Show Profile which can now be recalled for use whenever you wish Note To avoid accumulating 10 6 show profiles your operators cannot arbitrarily capture their own show profiles This intentionally controlled by using the pro cess described above and by assigning the task to an in telligent and responsible person such as the one reading this manual However there may be a few more options you d like to tweak some options not accessible from Element itself Let s go a little deeper into Show Profiles to find out exactly what s available to you Suggestion As part of Element training show your talent how to use the Channel Options and Monitor Options menus discussed in Chapter 5 to assign sources and set monitor options Then let them
73. s options and features Constantly used controls like headphone and monitor selection and volume plus command keys for the on screen timers controls for an external pro fanity delay unit and a nu meric keypad for convenient dialing of telephone systems and codecs are included Nav Keys amp Control Knob At the bottom right of the standard monitor mod ule is a Control Knob sur rounded by a set of naviga tion keys Up Down Right and Left an Enter key and a Help key These controls provide another way to navigate Element option screens Operators can use the directional keys to navigate through on screen lists and the Enter key to take a se lection The Control Knob can also be used to scroll through on screen lists Channel Options Section These keys found on the standard monitor mod ule allow the operator to customize the behavior of individual faders The operator first presses the Options key atop the fader to be modified the Channel Options box is displayed on Element s screen Figure 5 7 and the Channel Options keys then become active Knobs fi CHANNEL OF TIONS sase Hi GLOBAL OPTIONS Figure 5 5 Standard Monitor Module SoftKnobs Channel Jumping If any fader is in Op tions mode you can quick jump to set op tions for other fader channels by pressing the Options key at the top of their channel strips For example if you need to change
74. set a password for HTTP access you will not see your password displayed in this field upon re entering the IP Address book This is a security feature intended to prevent over the shoulder password theft e If you want to reverse changes you ve made and haven t saved press the Undo knob to erase Figure 2 15 IP Address Book them Continue down the screen and in the same way en e Press Save to save changes you ve made e Reboot immediately reboots the PowerStation Note After making changes to any Element IP address settings you must reboot the console ter the other fields values as appropriate e Rotate the Select Set SoftKnob to scroll through the list of available options To select an option to Use the REBOOT soft key to begin an immedi modify push this knob While modifying an options ate reboot sequence rotate the knob to change an option s value and push the knob to move to the next field Available options Setting IP using the Monitor 2 Fader Module include When the PowerStation has completed its start cycle meter screen appears find the numeric keypad at the top right of the Monitor Module Press and hold the star 7 amp 4 keys simultaneously for five seconds to enter the IP Address Book Figure 2 15 To set the IP address rotate the left most SoftKnob to highlight the line titled Element IP Address and push the knob to select that lin
75. setting of 6 will increase the sensitivity of your faders by 6 dB The faders in this example would have to be run 6 dB lower in order for the PGM audio output to be the same as the 0dB default setting Your meters will always represent the actual audio levels Screenshot Compression You can save a shot of the Operator s display for documentation trouble shooting or training purposes You may choose to save your screenshot in JPEG or PNG format with three levels of compression quality using the Com pression Type and Compression Quality drop down boxes Click Save Settings when you are done Element Configuration This section lets you Backup and Restore all Element configuration set 2011 Axia Audio 8 Advanced Element Controls e 113 8 Advanced Element Controls 114 tings Backup file format is standard XML Save your work We recommend backing up your Configuration files whenever a major change is made or is about to be made to your Element Whether you are re configuring Show or Source profiles en masse or about to perform a software update it s always a good idea to have a copy of your important data Log Log History and Log Setup Menus Element keeps a detailed log of each button press fader movement and other system events Choosing the Log menu item lets you examine the last 100 logged ac tivities choosing the Log History menu item allows you to view an entire day s log at one time and delete
76. the Q of the selected parametric band to provide the most pleasing EQ effect For details on SmartQ please refer to Page 44 of this manual The H P PREV knob controls whether audio from the Preview bus can be fed to the board op s headphones and if so in what manner Note that operators can also press the Preview to HP key on Element s Monitor Module to toggle through these settings Rotating this knob selects from the following options Off The operator will not hear Preview au dio in the headphone channel ON Stereo audio from the Preview chan nel overrides the Headphone Monitor se lection and is sent to both the left and right channels of the operator s headphones Split Audio from the Preview channel overrides the Headphone Monitor selection in the left headphone channel only Program audio is still present in the right channel of the operator s headphones After making a selection push the knob to Take the new value MONITOR MODE knob Rotate to select from the following monitor mode options Stereo The selected source will be present ed in stereo on the Monitor speakers Left The left channel of the selected source will be presented in both Monitor speakers Right The right channel of the selected source will be presented in both Monitor speakers Sum L R Both channels of the selected source will be summed and presented to both Monitor speakers After making a selection p
77. the Source on several channels select the first chan nel using its Options key and then choose the Channel Options Source key The Source Selection list will appear on screen Once the source reassignment is made simply press the Options key on the next channel you want to assign a new source to the Source screen will remain active and you re now adjusting settings for the new channel The channel number is displayed on screen as confirmation Placing a channel in Op tions mode lets you change inputs change apply EQ or dynamics processing change pan position invert phase set Aux Send and Aux Return levels adjust mix minus settings for that channel and adjust channel gain The various Options displays Figure 5 7 give detailed channel informa tion that will vary a bit de pending on the type of source you are viewing the Ele ment channel number the physical fader position from left to right the source and type assigned to that chan nel source ownership information and a small VU meter displayed for confirmation 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations 69 5 Element Operations 70 2 Fader Monitor Module Controls The Monitor 2 Fader Module Figure 5 6 al lows users to customize their console design adding two full function faders at the cost of some direct access control keys in the Monitor section No flexibility has been sacrificed however all the functions provided
78. the capabilities of your StudioEngine new Element and StudioEngine from installation to ad 8 Refer to the User s Manuals packed with your vanced functions This Quickstart section isn t meant other Axia Audio Nodes for information on how to take the place of the following chapters but it will to configure IP addresses for these units help you get everything connected fast and point you to the parts of VGA Monitor the manual you ll need to get up and running with a minimum of fuss Making Connections You ve probably unpacked your gipa te boxes and are sitting next to a pile Microphone Node ofS of Axia gear wondering what to do Analog Node o z gt me first StudhioEngine y Take a look at the diagram above it represents a typi cal Livewire connected studio After configuring your Software Setup Ethernet switch here s what you should do to get going 1 Using CAT 5e or CAT 6 Ethernet cable con When yov ve completed physically connecting your nect all of your Axia Audio Nodes Analog Axia hardware read through the remainder of this man AES EBU Microphone and Router Selector to ual to begin configuring the software options that deter 100Base T ports on your studio s Ethernet switch mine how your new Element will operate 2 Use CAT 6 Ethernet cable to connect your StudioEngine to a Gigabit 1000Base T port on Chapter 1 Element with StudioEngine the switch e Chapter 3 Working with Sources explains ho
79. the processing block This may compensate got pro cessing gain losses You may also choose to Retain Source Setting BACKWARD FEED DIM GAIN Set how much the program audio being fed back to this source will be dimmed when the source is being talked to using the Talkback feature Adjustment range is OdB to 30dB or Retain Existing Setting Setting this to OFF will mute the program audio backfeed during Talkback CHANNEL ON OFF STATUS Allows you to turn fader On or Off when the Show Profile is loaded 2011 Axia Audio CONTROL LOCK MAP Place a check mark in any Individual Headphones Section of these boxes to keep the board op from changing Note These controls apply ONLY IF the selections for this fader s bus assignments On e The loaded source is a Mic type source Off state fader position and several other parameters e The loaded source has an individual head phone feed associated with it About Channel Lock and Fader Operation e The position at which the mic is installed also Say that your station runs syndicated program has an Element accessory panel that allows ming overnight and you want to eliminate the talent to select their own headphone feeds possibility that the feed could be inadvertently such as the one shown in Figure 6 2 disrupted Choose Lock for the channel the feed is assigned to and the channel cannot be turned off or bus assignment changed until the channel is unlocked When you load a Show
80. to all data communication between the actual surface and its CPU housed in the Element Pow er Supply GPIO Node by CANBus technology it does not require a separate Ethernet connection Never connect any of the RJ 45 ports on the Element connection panel to an Eth ernet switch These ports are for connection of Element fader and accessory modules only connecting them to a powered Ethernet switch could damage the board s electronics and void your warranty Capturing Your Console If you have carefully followed to steps on the preced ing pages it is now time to apply power Connect PSU1 and watch as your PowerStation and Element come to life Upon power up of your Element some or all of the alphanumeric displays above the faders may read IHACTINIE Before you can use your Element you will need to run the Capture routine Figure 2 10 Identifying the Standard Monitor Module left and Monitor 2 Fader Module right Press and hold the and 2 keys on the Monitor Module for 5 seconds The alphanumeric displays above the facers will change to read Capture Now you will want to verify that LED displays above the faders display the channel numbers in the order you desire If not you can adjust them individually using the PGM1 and PGM2 buttons above each fader to change the channel number to the one you desire When you re done adjusting channel number dis plays press the enter or if you have a Moni
81. type of audio source some fader functions change their behavior depending upon the type of source as signed Also certain fader modules have extra controls for specific uses The controls found on the Element 4 Fader Line Module Figure 5 1 are common to all Element modules so we ll look at these first e Fader Assignment Display The 10 character alpha display shows the source presently assigned to this channel If the fader s Options button is pressed and the opera tor changes sources this display changes too If a channel is ON and the operator changes its source the display will flash between the source currently on air and the newly selected source The fader will not take the new source until the operator has turned the channel off pre venting on air errors If a Show Profile is loaded that mise an unavailable source the display reads Requested source mot found Just above the alpha display is a Status Symbol display This display indicates the fader s channel number or presents a Status Symbol to indicate when backfeed or talkback is active e Channel Options Key Pressing this key activates the Channel Op tions keys located on Element s Master Module Refer to the sections on Monitor Module controls later in this chapter for detailed functions New in version 2 1 is an A B switch function This function enables operators to quickly toggle through sources available to any particular
82. ve been using for this demonstra tion is a telephone hybrid we can now observe the pin status indicators change as we turn the channel on and off as shown in Figure 4 3 Port 1 Figure 4 3 Pin status indicators showing GPIO port activity Referring to the Hybrid Logic Chart on Page 48 we can see that when the Element channel is Off the 2011 Axia Audio indicator representing Output Pin 2 the Off Lamp A wor d about the GPIO Por ts logic command is high Turning the channel On we see Pin 4 pulse briefly before Pin 1 goes high Input Connections the GPIO has just sent a Start pulse then lit the Current on these inputs must be limited to 20 mA or On Lamp If you turn the channel Off again you ll less through the use of a current limiting resistor An observe a Stop pulse and the Off Lamp command external power source 24 volts DC maximum is rec once again become active ommended for all inputs and outputs to prevent ground loops between equipment However if customer equip See how easy that was Simply assigning an existing ment is completely isolated using power from the GPIO audio source to a GPIO port automagically configures port connectors is acceptable Figure 4 4 shows details the port for the type of device supplying the audio and for both types of connections send the appropriate logic commands to that port when the source is assigned to a Element channel Customer DC Power Source WW C
83. version is changed What s Next Congratulations There s no test at the end of this manual but if there was one you d surely pass it There is more great information on specific topics in the Ap pendices feel free to check them out too If you have spotted any errors or omissions in this manual we want to hear about them so we can make necessary changes in the next manual update Thanks for your participation and thanks for choosing Axia 9 2011 Axia Audio Dati 782 108 0 n b E A X PS SW 2 Te System gt Host mame PS Su62 b 12 daens betters pembers hyper Necwrck adores fiozieoos21 Kamak pss 252550 Syyaling serat IP athas 9 0 9 0 Syslog eranty level fer Abed achon mutt be tasken enmediately New passwort seneenee CSS charnerers letters and namber Retype Dew parme seeeenee Daes Hanhen revs AXIA PewesStaton ETH suiich rev j O Beto ye lOTO Fis Sep 04 19200 EST 2000 Bask vee 03a teed Pri Cet 02 12 1537 EST 2007 Z coment this warn to Bank Weereng System wil reboot ether changing cement baal Ley Fig 10 10 PowerStation MAIN Switch System Appendix A Specifications Microphone Preamplifiers Source Impedance 150 ohms Input Impedance 4 k ohms minimum balanced Nominal Level Range Adjustable 75 dBu to 20 dBu Input Headroom gt 20 dB above nominal input Output Level 4 dBu nominal Analog Line Inputs Input Impedance gt 40 k ohms balanced
84. we spent most of our time simply telling people our story sleeping in hotel beds and bring ing home very few sales After what seemed like an endless stream of hotel desks and airline food the idea took hold thanks to forward thinking engineers who understood the power of using data networks for audio transmission Our first installations proved that the technology was real Then those engineers began sharing stories of their own telling other folks how much they loved what Axia did for them Word got around and we sold thousands of consoles enough that Element consoles are now one of the best selling broadcast boards ever As more and more broadcasters embraced IP dozens of companies partnered with us to make in novative broadcast products that connect to Axia net works with just the click of an Ethernet cable And we conceived of some interesting new devices and applications to help broadcasters take full advantage of their networked environment For example we introduced broadcast VoIP tele phone systems that integrate with consoles merging telephony into the studio network without adding infrastructure and giving broadcasters the world s first consoles with integrated Telos hybrids Inter com systems that connect via Ethernet and permit users to take broadcast quality intercom calls to air instantly Networked codecs and audio processors like the Telos Zephyr 1Port and Omnia 8X which concentrate mu
85. you may use 10001 through 10018 for the Livewire channel assignments of the Program and Mon itor channels The numbering convention easily extends to the VMIX and VMODE sections that are discussed later in Chapter 7 Virtual Mixer VMIX Mode The Mode function here is identical to that described in the I O section Live Stereo should be used for any sources in your air chain or monitoring chain as this will minimize latency Standard Stereo is frequently used for Record busses Talkback and Studio functions Other options include Surround and Disabled Status This box allows you to view the status of the Pro gram and Monitor audio streams You should see OK for streams that are enabled and the box should be blank for idar E3 amp Pwr_Stn_Studio_1 Program and B Channel 1 32767 Mode Guest Headphones 12015 Live Stereo v O Studio Monitor 12016 Live Stereo w O Talent Hdphones 49917 Live Stereo O Status Audio Program 1 12001 Live Stereo o Program 2 12002 LveStereo Mox Program 3 12003 Live Stereo w E ees Program 4 12004 LiveStereo wox Program4 Record 12905 Standard Stereo v JoK By Aux Send 1 12006 Disabled 2 JC AuxSend2 12007 Disabled A ol iy AuxSend3 12008 Disabled 2 Aux Send4 12009 Disabled x E CR Monitor Direc 42010 Live Stereo v o
86. you should consider yourself an advanced user In keeping with your dawning guru status it s time for a thorough look at all of the controls found in the Element configuration Web pages The HTTP interface to the Element is very similar whether you are using the Element with StudioEngine or PowerStation The home page for the PowerStation has more options since this is an integrated product includ ing the Element and other modules Note The Element can be used with either the StudioEngine or the PowerStation Advanced Settings for StudioEngine are found in Chapter 9 and PowerStation settings in Chapter 10 Element Configuration Screens The Element Control Center Figures 8 1 and 8 2 show the first screen you will see when you log into your Element or PowerStation from your Web browser The main menu runs down the left side and gives access to all of Element s options and set tings In the main window you can see at a glance what version of Element software is loaded system informa tion such as console uptime network link integrity and CPU stats and more This information screen is acces sible without a password clicking on any menu heading will prompt you for a password As you can see the Pow erStation menu has many more options that are related to its integrated MixEngine IO subsections and Ethernet switch We will deal with those later this chapter is focussed on the Element console and its configuration
87. your mic controller as you toggle the accessory panel from On to Off Refer to the table in Figure E 6 for the Mic GPIO profile Special Programming for Mic Control Panels It is possible to connect the mic controller to a GPIO port either on a GPIO Node or on the Element Power Supply and program it using PathfinderPC logic control For more information on this please refer to the Pathfin derPC User s Manual TALK Command TALK Lamp 5 VDC lo MUTE Command MUTE Lamp Input Common froeuses e Figure E 6 GPIO pinout diagram for Mic profile 2011 Axia Audio Appendix E Accessory User Panels 165 Appendix E Accessory User Panels 166 Meeting coffee black Less Powerpoint I beg you Must keep eyes open 2011 Axia Audio Appendix F Channel IP Worksheets The scalable nature of Axia Livewire audio networks makes it possible to construct systems of any size from a single room to an entire multi studio facility Since Livewire components Audio Nodes Elements StudioEngines PowerStation etc are connected with Ethernet each one requires a unique IP Internet Protocol address IP addresses are four bytes long and are written in dotted decimal form with each byte represented decimally and separated by a period For example in the IP address 193 32 216 9 the 193 is the value for the first byte 32 for the second etc Since a byte can hold values from 0 to 255 this is the range for each dec
88. your Ele ment hardware modules and associated software Press ing this key will pop up this information in the centre section of the Element display Pressing it a second time will return to normal The Element will continue to op erate as usual when this display is active Magic Key Sequences for Standard Monitor Module The list of Magic Key sequences for the Standard Monitor Module are e IP Address Book Press and hold the Fader Op tions key for 5 seconds or press and hold the and 4 and 7 keys for 5 seconds Press the SoftKnobs as prompted to edit save reboot or Exit Be sure to Reboot after making any changes to this page e Clock amp Timer Options Press and hold the Timer Options key for 5 seconds e Capture Mode Press and hold the and 2 keys for 5 seconds e Test Mode Press and hold the and 2 and keys for 5 seconds e Module Information Press or press and hold the and keys for 5 seconds e Magic Key Help Press and hold the key for 5 seconds or press Magic Key Sequences for Monitor 2 Fader Module The list of Magic Key sequences for the Standard Monitor Module are e IP Address Book Press and hold the star 4 amp 7 keys on the keypad for 5 seconds That s I P Press the SoftKnobs as prompted to edit save re boot or Exit Be sure to Save and Reboot after mak ing any changes to this page e Clock amp Timer Options Press and hold the Timer Opti
89. 0 005 1 kHz 38 dBu input 18 dBu output Analog Input to Analog Output lt 0 008 1 kHz 18 dBu input 18 dBu output Digital Input to Digital Output lt 0 0003 1 kHz 20 dBFS Digital Input to Analog Output lt 0 005 1 kHz 6 dBFS input 18 dBu output Crosstalk Isolation Stereo Separation and CMRR Analog Line channel to channel isolation 90 dB isolation minimum 20 Hz to 20 kH Microphone channel to channel isolation 80 dB isolation minimum 20 Hz to 20 kHz Analog Line Stereo separation 85 dB isolation minimum 20Hz to 20 kHz Analog Line Input CMRR gt 60 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Microphone Input CMRR gt 55 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Audio Processing Equalizer Frequency Bands 20Hz to 320Hz 125Hz to 2KHz 1 25KHz to 20KHz Cut Boost range on each band 25dB to 15dB Q factor Automatic bandwidth varies based on amount of cut or boost Compressor Threshold 30dB to 0dB Ratio 1 1 to 16 1 Post processor Trim Level Adjustable from 20dB to 20dB Expander Noise Gate Threshold 50dB to 0dB Ratio 30dB to 0dB De esser Threshold 20dB to OdB_ Ratio 1 1 to 8 1 Power Supply AC Input Audio Node Analog AES EBU Microphone Router Selector Auto sensing supply 90VAC to 240VAC 50 Hz to 60 Hz IEC receptacle internal fuse Power consumption 30 Watts Power Supply AC Input GPIO Node Auto sensing supply 90VAC to 240VAC 50 Hz to 60 Hz IEC receptacle internal fuse Power consumption 33 Watts
90. 1 and the left row to control Hybrid 2 click the Reversed Hybrid box Some Telos products provide support for up to 24 lines You can select either Auto 12 Lines or 24 Lines with the Mode Selection radio buttons In 12 line mode 12 lines are displayed on both columns of the Call Controller mod ule the left key bank answers lines on Hybrid 1 the right keys answer lines on Hybrid 2 In 24 line mode both left and right key banks will answer lines using Hybrid 1 To answer lines on any other hybrid operators will use the module s SET key to choose which hybrid to use Select 2011 Axia Audio Working With Hybrids e 155 Appendix D Working With Hybrids e 156 Appendix D ing Auto uses the configuration of the device to dynamically set the number of lines used 4 Click Save when done Note that after any chang es made in the show profile pages the show must be loaded or re loaded from the Element surface in order for the new settings to become active Configuring an Element Source Profile In the Element Control Center navigate to Source Profiles Click New Source Profile and using the Pri mary Source drop down box select the audio channel that you configured in the Telos device In the list you should see a Livewire channel number and short descrip tion of the Hybrid give it an Element source name such as Nx12 Calll and select Phone for Source Type The Source Profile for the hybr
91. 2 If you wish to use the right row of Call Con troller buttons to control Hybrid 1 and the left row to control Hybrid 2 click the Reversed Hybrid box VX can be used in either 12 or 24 line mode You can select either Auto 12 Lines or 24 Lines with the Mode Selection radio buttons In 12 line mode 12 lines are displayed on both columns of the Call Controller module the left key bank answers lines 2011 Axia Audio Prim J fez ab Bais 2410 lt 51 Sel1 VX24 gt Ely The Source Profile for Hyb1 Show both 1446 SRC 8 OlegAnalog 2401 VIP1 VX24 eds 2410 51 5el1 VX24 Channel 2 2411 S1 Sel2 VX24 Channel 3 2422 52 Selectable 3 VX24 Channel 4 2430 53 Selectable 1 VX24 Channel 5 2440 54 Selectable 1 VX24 Channel 6 2441 54 Selectable 2 VX24 Channel 7 2450 5 Selectable 1 VX24 ae 2460 S6 Selectable 1 VX24 i ii Seierctan my Operator CR producer Show sourcename Allow application to override Leave the Phone CR Monitor inputs Studio Monitor input V mixer input the hybrid should be filled in as follows hybrid IP field empty Leave the Phone line and Phone hybrid for NX12 fields at their default value of 0 G Use 2nd show split mode for NX12 should be left unchecked The Phone Module ID field lets you select from the multiple phone modules that you may have installed CR guest Normally you will have just Studio guest abor one so select 1 from the
92. 2 1 COM POWER SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio GPIO Producer s Microphone Logic ON Command Active Low Input Turns channel ON OFF Command Active Low Input Turn channel OFF 13 TALK to MONITOR 2 Active Low Input Activates the Element TALK Command to MON2 function and routes mic audio to the Talkback bus MUTE Command Active Low Input Mutes channel outputs 15 TALK to PREVIEWED Active Low Input Activates the TALK button SOURCE Command on every source currently in Preview and routes mic audio to the Talkback bus ON Lamp 1 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return ON unless TALK or MUTE is active OFF Lamp 2 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return OFF Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when TALK to TALK to MONITOR 2 Lamp 3 mon Return MON2 is active MUTE Lamp 4 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when MUTE is mon Return active TALK to PREVIEWED Open Collector to Logic Com Iluminates when TALK to SOURCE Lamp mon Return PREVIEWED SOURCE is ac tive Source Common 7 Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Logic Common Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing common Logic 5 Volt supply Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 if Fused source is not providing volt age active only when source has been assigned to channel Source Supply 10
93. A Type of equipment Audio Mixing Surface Model No Element Serial No Year of Manufacture 2005 I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives and Standards Place Cleveland Ohio USA 44114 Date October 30 2005 Signature on file Full Name Michael Dosch Position President CE Mark Conformance October 30 2005 Axia TLS Corp 1241 Superior Avenue Cleveland OH 44114 USA Supervision and summary by Michael Dosch 1 0 Introduction 1 1 Scope This record is intended to document the Axia Element audio mixing surface conformance with Council Directives 93 68 EEC CE Marking 73 23 EEC safety low voltage directive 89 336 EEC electromagnetic compatibility 2011 Axia Audio Appendix B CE Conformity e 141 Appendix B CE Conformity e 142 CE Mark Conformance Cont d Testing was conducted during the period September 22 October 19 2005 1 2 Purpose Testing was performed to evaluate safety emissions and immunity conformance to enable CE mark ing 1 3 Conclusions The Element audio control surface was found to be compliant and CE marking was applied to the product Conformity is declared to the standards EN50081 1 EN50082 1 2 0 HF Radiated Emissions 2 1 Standards Applied The unit was laboratory evaluated according to standard EN50081 1 using Measurement Document EN55022 Class B 2 2 Testing The unit was tested and
94. ACKWARD FEED DIM GAIN This is a feature unique to Element Talkback is sent over dimmed backfeed audio If you want a hard interruption Talkback interrupts Program audio set it to OFF which mutes the audio But maybe your jocks would like to just have their program audio dimmed and the Talkback come over it so they can still monitor air while they re being talked to In this case input a value by which the program audio will be dimmed Adjustment range is OdB to 30dB LOGIC PORT DISABLED EXCLUSIVE MODE SHARED MODE Allows you disable GPIO machine logic to this audio source device or enable it in two modes Exclusive mode permits GPIO control asso ciated with only a single fader Shared mode allows more than one user to send on off start signals to a source via GPIO 2011 Axia Audio 3 Configuring Inputs 33 3 Configuring Inputs 34 GPIO READY ENABLED DISABLED Allows de vices such as CD players or tape machines to signal their READY state to the operator through the OFF button LED If a device is cueing its OFF lamp will not be lit Tying the device s OFF lamp to the Ready command means that a machine must be cued and ready before the OFF lamp illuminates If Enabled the OFF lamp illuminates only when the fader is OFF and the Ready command is active on the GPIO If Disabled the OFF lamp illumi nates normally whenever the fader is turned OFF FEED TO SOURCE MODE If there is a backfeed associated with t
95. C 4 PING command showing unresponsive Element mands the ping command will produce a 2011 Axia Audio System Design Reference and Primer which can be downloaded from www AxiaAudio com I don t see the meter displays in my Web brows er when I open the pages for my Audio Nodes The web pages use Java to render the meter displays First double check your browser options to confirm that Java is enabled and turn it on if necessary If Java is not installed on your computer you will need to install it Download the free Java installer from http www java com and follow the instructions to install Java once installed the meter displays should be visible in your Web browser How do I set the time on the Element Press and hold the Timer Options key on the Mas ter Module After five seconds the Clock amp Timer Options key will be displayed All clock adjustments may be made from this screen Q My Element GPIO Power Supply CPU doesn t boot and just beeps when I plug it in What do I do The Element CPU non PowerStation ver sion currently uses a VIA EPIA ME6000 main board with Award BIOS If your Element CPU can not boot the computer tries to tell you you what is wrong using POST codes an acronym for Power On Self Test Award states that the only POST code their BIOS uses is one long beep and then two short beeps which indicate a graphics card problem The reason that only one POST code is u
96. Home Page 2011 Axia Audio range of the address as that chosen for your PowerSta tion For example if the address chosen for the Power Station is 192 168 0 100 the address chosen for your PC must also start with 192 168 0 followed by 3 digits that are not already in use by another device There are no switches or knobs on the PowerStation all settings are configured in the PowerStation s web pages No special ized software is required and you can use any PC Windows Mac or Linux to con figure your PowerStation through the HTTP interface All Axia IP addresses are assigned and managed manually This gives you complete control of your address scheme and also per mits you to set up a series of browser book marks to quickly access your PowerStation and other Axia devices Obviously your PC s network connection is an important connection since it is through the PowerSta tion s web pages that all other settings are manipulated Note Axia web interfaces have been tested with Microsoft Internet Explor er version 5 or later but also work with other browsers including Firefox Whatever browser you choose Java must be enabled and your pop up blocker if any must be disabled in order to work with Axia equip ment Note that Windows Vista versions do not have Java installed by default as in prior versions You must install the Sun Java package found at fhttp www java Livewire Source Channels The first st
97. Imagine that you have a night jock that should moni tor all four radio stations in your cluster To help make sure this actually happens you could send all four off air signals as sources into a VMIX and take the output of its submix to a monitor An Accessory Panel or external button wired to a GPIO port could provide a press and hold function to allow the jock to monitor the sources momentarily This example is only possible with Pathfin derPC control of VMIX 2011 Axia Audio 7 Virtual Mixer e 105 7 Virtual Mixer e 106 PathfinderPC Control of VMIX PathfinderPC server can be used to control VMIX How There are two modes by which PathfinderPC can control VMIX First as a background controller PathfinderPC can monitor Livewire system parameters or receive com mands from external devices like satellites button pan els or automation systems and react to them by chang ing the state of VMIX ON OFF Gain Time Up and or Time Down fields This provides many different possibilities for facility automation Intercom functions or whatever else you might imagine For example the combo of PathfinderPC and VMIX could duplicate the function provided by other products that are controlling audio switching in many radio facilities Refer to docu mentation on PathfinderPC for further information Secondly an exciting new feature of PathfinderPC is VMIX Control This is a software fader control option that is provi
98. K CR Monitor 12011 Live Stereo si ok E CR Headphones 12012 Live Stereo v E Preview 12013 Standard Stereo v ox il Talk to CR 12014 Live Stereo 4 ok Bl fox ox ox xK po Talkback 12018 Live Stereo Mi O Integrated Omnia Proc Process Program 1 in all monitoring paths CR headphones for any selection Select preset SmoothHeadphones Figure 2 19 PowerStation Engine Source Configuration any streams that are disabled Audio This area provides you with a visible indicator for the presence or absence of audio as well as an overall indica tion of level In Figure 2 19 you can observe several bus ses that are active and levels are normal as indicated by the green color If levels are high the audio box is yel low If levels are excessive the color will change to red 2011 Axia Audio Other Sources The PowerSta PS AUX IO Destinations Mozilla Firefox E tion has other sources that may be Ele E yew Fiutery Bookmarks Joos bhp configured in its VMIX and VMODE 3 ps aux 0 pestinations sections Please see Chapter 7 kome Garces Destinations GPIO mases System O05 Virtual Mixer for more details Sale eee eee Destinations Integrated Omnia Processing hae Some of the PowerStation s DSP 1 CR MONITOR N i CR HPHONE has been assigned the task of audio f 3 CR GUEST P processing Some of the famous Omnia PREVIEW technology h
99. KE 164 0 11 joppie lt g 2 3 dram Preg and mon eat Chanel l 37767 Mode Bane Aude Pogai 11101 DeSweeo S Proga 2 11102 Lie Stereo Zk jas Proga 3 11103 ve Sioto ax p Progen 4 71104 Live Sureo kd x Program SRecord 11105 Live Stereo x Aureil 11106 Ue Sirto B a j AvurSerd 2 3110 live Sureo Ta E AurSend3 71108 Live Stereo B kes fee AwrSenda 11109 LveSereo S CRMorace Dees 31110 Lie Sirto 2 i OR Moratce 1 lve Sreo tk R CR Headptones 11112 Lim Stra fx fz Prerwa 11113 Live Stereo x a p TektOCR ia Deseo Mix f Quest Wesdphores 131115 Lim Sioto Joa f Puao Menace mne Live Stereo Y prm i Ternt M phones F117 iveSeeo Sw Tabat nne Live Stereo ax fT Ape Process Prog n ai wondtonng paths O CRbesdphones fer aniy selection Select perset Bypass Lay Figure 1 15 StudioEngine Output configuration Note 32 000 channel numbers exceeds the average human s RAM storage capacity We rec ommend using a spreadsheet program just to make sure you don t generate painful read memory register errors As soon as you connected your StudioEngine to the network following the steps in the previous section it began to generate audio using factory default channel numbers To avoid conflict with other studios you must change those default values to new channel numbers 1 Open the browser on your computer and point it to the IP address you previously set for your StudioEngine Choose t
100. Main ya Henare Pen O R Arae eters renters eT T ame Eesi Srtoce Neher sarae 702 160 012 heron 25520 Grew se 0 2 49 NIP server Spbu P siim Tre ap omin Darw beg Imerys log err neno ing AN Sagari i i eter ma ape odt User password New peel oeeeeeee Cadeas etter eel tere Patge o emer tes seressee trath veep aed TEET v Dever cre V Mion ae ters ae Fimware version Verges remo mea KEO tet et z r 2A Quid uan u Asator ri Uci iato 2A Quid Tho n 2 1 0 siysa ete wow F prti w 403 DING a eae t na EOE a virun E bart D se Waring Gwe wil Mbox Sar cfareng Sint barb yr wo Fig 10 8 Audio I O Subsystem System 2011 Axia Audio PowerStation Controls e 133 10 suggest you include something to indicate the room or studio where the unit is located Network Address Do not change this ad dress is automatically assigned during boot up Netmask Do not change this value is auto matically assigned during boot up Gateway Do not change this address is auto Aaa PowerStation Control Center IO Subsystem Main Hore Sarees ennn Gen are Serer S Synchronization Livewire Clock Leste Sock etter y arty 3 efa Leste coc nove P beiee telsJt Live Audio Clock Streams 7 s Hore bg eens matically assigned during boot up nied tyap aaa NTP Server Not currently implemented or re urputne URNE ey S pora amp quired Syslog Server and Severit
101. NOT CONNECTED OUTPUT COMMON RETURN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT NC 5 4 3 2 1 V GND SOURCE 8 17 Te Ts f4 l3 To fi e ee0e00800 IN N N N N IN 5V 5 4 3 2 1 COM POWER SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio GPIO Film Legendable User Button Module Accessory Panel Rack Panel Cr e E S INPUTS User Button 1 Lamp Active Low Input Illuminates User Button 1 Lamp User Button 2 Lamp Active Low Input Illuminates User Button 2 Lamp User Button 3 Lamp Active Low Input Illuminates User Button 3 Lamp User Button 4 Lamp Active Low Input Illuminates User Button 4 Lamp User Button 5 Lamp Active Low Input Illuminates User Button 5 E EE User Button 1 Switch e Collector to Logic Com Active User Button 1 is mon Return pushed User Button 2 Switch Open Collector to Logic Com Active when User Button 2 is mon Return pushed User Button 3 Switch Open Collector to Logic Com Active when User Button 3 is mon Return pushed User Button 4 Switch Open Collector to Logic Com Active when User Button 4 is mon Return pushed User Button5 Switch Open Collector to Logic Com Active when User Button 5 is mon a ee Source Common Logic l a to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Logic Common Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon Logic 5 Volt supply Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 Fused if source is not providing voltage active only wh
102. Nominal Level Range Selectable 4 dBu or 10dBv Input Headroom 20 dB above nominal input Analog Line Outputs Output Source Impedance lt 50 ohms balanced Output Load Impedance 600 ohms minimum Nominal Output Level 4 dBu Maximum Output Level 24 dBu Digital Audio Inputs and Outputs Reference Level 4 dBu 20 dB FSD Impedance 110 Ohm balanced XLR Signal Format AES 3 AES EBU AES 3 Input Compliance 24 bit with selectable sample rate conversion 32 kHz to 96kHz input sample rate capable AES 3 Output Compliance 24 bit Digital Reference Internal network timebase or external reference 48 kHz 2 ppm Internal Sampling Rate 48 kHz Output Sample Rate 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz A D Conversions 24 bit Delta Sigma 256x oversampling D A Conversions 24 bit Delta Sigma 256x oversampling Latency lt 3 ms mic in to monitor out including network and processor loop Frequency Response Any input to any output 0 5 0 5 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Dynamic Range Analog Input to Analog Output 102 dB referenced to 0 dBFS 105 dB A weighted to 0 dBFS Analog Input to Digital Output 105 dB referenced to 0 dBFS Digital Input to Analog Output 103 dB referenced to 0 dBFS 106 dB A weighted Digital Input to Digital Output 138 dB Equivalent Input Noise Microphone Preamp 128 dBu 150 ohm source reference 50 dBu input level Total Harmonic Distortion Noise Mic Pre Input to Analog Line Output lt
103. ODE streams you intend to actively use active streams without any activity simply clutter up your network with empty streams and create needless ex tra work for your StudioEngine Status Audio Indicates stream health and audio level indicator as explained in the VMIX section VMODE Examples Now that you know how to set up and enable Input Sre Nene Channel In Stream Status Selector 132766 Type Awto PGMI POM I 20259 Fromsouce P PHONE Phone 20260 Prom source BE EXTERNAL 20261 Fromsouce e EXTERNAL 20262 From source o EXTERNAL 20263 Fiom souca T EXTERNAL 20264 Fromsoure EXTERNAL 20265 Fromsouce e P EXTERNAL 20266 Fromsoucee Audio Mode Out Nene Charme Out Saran Status 376 Type Pass stereo VModei 148 Standard Stereo Pass stereo VMode 4269 4 khkkh TII Live Stereo Pass stereo VModed 14370 Live Stereo Pare sterao VYMode4 4437 Live Starao Pase starao w VMode gt 34372 Live Stereo v Pass stereo w VYModeo 44373 Live Stereo v Pass stereo VMode 14374 Live Stereo y Pass stereo m VMode 14375 Live Stereo Apply V Mode setings FIgure 7 3 Engine VMODE section 2011 Axia Audio VMODE here are a few examples of how you might use it Create a mono stream Imagine you ve got a satellite receiver connected to an Audio Node Sometimes the program content that in terests you is received on only the Left channel there is other content on th
104. OdB Pushing the SoftKnob toggles between Active and Bypass states De Ess Ratio sets the amount of sibilance re duction in dB that will be applied adjustable between 1 1 and 8 1 Post Processing Gain sets the amount of gain applied after processing This can compensate for gain that may be lost during compression Pressing the Dynamics amp EQ key again will re turn you to the Channel Options screen e Pan amp Mode Key This function allows the operator to adjust the pan or balance of the channel source and correct signal phase errors Figure 5 11 Pan Mode menu screen It s a Lock If a padlock icon appears in any options screen that function is locked out in the Source Profile and adjustments cannot be made In Figure 5 11 the padlock appears just below the soundfield representation above the Mode indicator The onscreen Mode SoftKnob is also grayed out to show that this function is unavailable Operators cannot unlock locked functions if you wish to make locked functions available simply modify the source profile to allow them and when the source is reloaded to the console the padlock will have disappeared Function Exit 2 Fader Monitor module only This control changes the other control operates Pan Mode or Phase Pressing this knob will exit the Pan Mode Menu screen Pan Balance Rotating this SoftKnob adjusts the Pan setting for m
105. Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 ms PULSE sent when mon Return channel is turned OFF Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon Source Common Logic Common Logic 5 Volt supply Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 Fused if source is not providing voltage active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 Source Supply NOT CONNECTED OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT NIC 5 4 3 2 1 s 17 l6 Ts l4 l3 To Ti EE EE EE E E E 0 SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio GPIO Control Room Monitor Logic INPUTS MUTE CR Command DIM CR Command Enable EXT PREVIEW Com mand TALK TO EXT Command Element Not used OUTPUTS CR ON AIR Lamp DIM CR Lamp PREVIEW Lamp TALK TO EXT Lamp Element TALK to CR Active Lamp POWER amp COMMON Source Common Logic Common Logic 5 Volt supply Source Supply NOT CONNECTED Mutes CR monitors and Pre view speakers Active Low Input Active Low Input Allows external dimming of CR monitor speakers e Active Low Input Feeds External Audio Input to PREVIEW Active Low Input Turns on Talk to External Audio on Element 1 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates whenever CR mon Return moni
106. Options key on Chan nel 2 You ll see the indicator at the top of the Channel Options screen change to read Char nel 2 to confirm that you re now program ming Channel 2 Repeat the procedure until you ve programmed all your channels You can now choose other Channel Options to configure using the same method After you ve assigned a source for each fader you can configure the rest of the Channel Options e Equalization e Pan Balance e Aux Sends and e Feed to Source When you ve configured all Channel Options con tinue on and make monitor and headphone selections and adjust Aux Send Aux Return settings if necessary since these are all saved in Show Profiles as well When you ve got the board configured to your satis faction proceed to the next section Capture It It s now time to save your Element configuration Enter Element s IP address in your Web browser When the Main Menu appears choose Configuration under the Sources amp Profiles heading on the sidebar menu This is where you ll come whenever you need to capture construct or administer a Show Profile 2011 Axia Audio 6 Show Profiles e 91 6 Show Profiles e 92 Under the Show Profiles list you ll then find four op tions Default Show Profile This is the starter pro file that comes with Element If you wish you can overwrite this with your preferred default options otherwise consider it as
107. P addresses dynamically DHCP so double check to see if your computer is actually a part of the network that its network adapter has a valid IP address and the proper subnet mask value assigned Assuming your computer is running Windows you can view these settings using a utility called IPCON FIG EXE Here s what to do 1 Double check Element s IP address press and hold the 4 amp 7 keys I P for 5 seconds until the IP Address Book appears on the display screen The IP address and subnet mask values are displayed m Type the name of program folder document or w Internet resource and Windows wil open it for you Open command x Co Cene Cerone Figure C 1 starting a command box 2 On your Windows computer click on the Start button and choose Run from the menu In the box that appears type command or cmd to start a DOS command box then click the OK button 1 A black box with white type will appear Type ipconfig in the box and press the Enter key You ll be rewarded with a screen that looks like this The screen displays your computer s IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway settings Write these down and compare them to those previously ob tained from your Element Explanation The IP address is usually ex pressed as four decimal numbers each repre senting eight bits separated by periods This is known more technically as dotted quad no
108. PE SER Bee Bee Name Channel 1 CR Monitor 12011 lt CR Monitor Pwr_stn_studio 1 gt E 2 Hybrid 12205 lt Studio 1 Phone PS MAIN IO gt EH 3 cor sd 12207 lt Studio 1 CDi PS MaINIO gt E 4 o2 12208 eStudio 1 CD 2 PS MAIN IO gt a Figure 3 9 GPIO Port Assignment The process is complete you ve made a Source Pro file for your phone hybrid created a mix minus mapped it to an audio output destination and associated a GPIO port for contact closures associated with the source To confirm choose Options at the top of any El ement fader channel and load your new Phone source Press the Talk key just below the fader yow ll see the Status Symbol shown in Figure 3 10 appear in the win dow above the channel to indicate that the operator s mic is talking to this telephone hybrid through it s backfeed channel Status Symbols are described in detail at the end of Chapter 5 Element Operations Figure 3 10 Status Symbol indicates mix minus talkback feed to phone source Also take another look at the GPIO screen on your browser Note the green indicators that have appeared on the port representing your hybrid switch the Element channel on and off and you ll observe the active tally change pins as shown in Figure 3 9 2011 Axia Audio What s Next When you re ready join us in Chapter Four Con figuring GPIO for more detail about setting up logic commands and GPIO por
109. Pressing and holding the Profile key for five seconds instantly clears changes made to the current Show Profile resetting the Show Pro file s default settings All is well and your jock once again knows where his towel is As soon as you take a new show profile Element begins loading it During the profile loading process a status line reads Leading Shaw Profle Hames to 6 inform the operator of the operation in progress LOADING A NEW SOURCE WHILE ANOTHER Monitor Options Key Pressing this key reveals all sorts of neat options re lating to Monitor and Headphone behavior The Monitor SOURCE IS STILL ACTIVE Element will nev er interrupt an active source in order to load a new one Let s say that the operator has a satellite feed assigned to Channel 10 and this source is currently on the air assigned to Pro 2011 Axia Audio Options screen is shown in Figure 5 15 Function Exit 2 Fader Monitor module only This control changes which the function of the other knob which is used for adjusting the Moni tor Options parameters Pressing this knob will 5 Element Operations e 79 5 Element Operations 80 exit the Monitor Options Menu screen Figure 5 15 Monitor Options menu screen Pushing the TALK LEV SoftKnob selects be tween adjusting the levels of the Monitor 1 Talk To and Dim levels and the Monitor 2 Dim level The active function is highlighted in yellow
110. QUENCY Choose the middle frequency of the Low and Middle EQ bands or Retain Exist ing Setting CR HEADPHONE EQ HIGH GAIN EQ MID GAIN EQ LOW GAIN dial in boost or cut for the three EQ bands or Retain Existing Setting Studio Monitor Monitor 2 Options MONITOR ASSIGNMENT Choose to load PGM1 PGM2 PGM3 PGM4 AUX A AUX B AUX C AUX D or an External source to the Monitor 2 channel Studio Monitor Options Source PGM1 Source ID for EXTERNAL Input O Peme O Poms O Pama AUX A AUXB O AUX aux D EXT no source 92 9 AIR Studio monitor master gain volume 85 0 Off dB Studio monitor dim gain 30 0 dB off GPIO channel for studio monitor Use 0 0 Retain existing setting Use 0 0 Retain existing setting 12016 Figure 6 8 Show Profile Studio Monitor Options when the Show Profile is loaded You can also choose No Source if you wish the Profile to be loaded with nothing assigned to the Control Room monitor SOURCE ID FOR EXTERNAL INPUT Use this drop down box to choose what source will be audi tioned when External is chosen from the Studio 2 monitor assignment list STUDIO MONITOR MASTER GAIN Allows you to Use as much as 85 dB of gain reduction on the audio signal sent to the Monitor 2 Speakers You can also turn gain control Off or Retain Existing Set ting STUDIO MONITOR DIM GAIN Specify the amount of volume by which
111. Symbol display will change to show that Talkback is active Multiple Talkback keys can be selected to talk to more than one source at a time Auto Talkback If a source s Backfeed mode is set to Auto the caller or remote talent will hear PGM 1 minus himself mix minus whenever the fader he s assigned to is ON and will have his Talkback channel automati cally activated when the channel is turned OFF See Chapter 3 Configuring Sources for more information on configuring backfeeds 2011 Axia Audio e Channel Preview Key Preview called cue in the old days allows the operator to listen to sources before they air Element s Preview bus allows auditioning in full stereo Individual source profiles can change Pre view to Solo Post Fader operation The Preview key acts like a latching switch Momentarily pressing any channel s Preview key assigns that channel to the Preview bus pressing it again removes the channel from Preview To enable an operator to quickly listen to various sources the Preview function can be interlocked pressing Preview on any channel will remove any other channel from Preview mode If you want to preview multiple channels pressing and holding any Preview key disables the interlock other sources can be added to the Preview mix by pressing them Conversely chan nels can be removed from a multiple Preview se lection by pressing and holding any lit Preview key and desel
112. T CONNECTED OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT NIC 5 s I7 l6 Ts 000o Open Collector to Logic Com mon Return Open Collector to Logic Com mon Return Open Collector to Logic Com mon Return Open Collector to Logic Com mon Return Open Collector to Logic Com mon Return Illuminates when channel is ON unless TALK or MUTE is active Illuminates when channel is OFF Illuminates when TALK TO MON2 is active Illuminates when MUTE is active I lluminates when TALK to PREVIEWED SOURCE is ac tive Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Internal 5 Volt return Logic Supply Individually Fused Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing common Can be connected to Pin 10 if source is not providing volt age active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 OUT OUT OUT OUT 4 3 2 1 4 3 l2 fi eee IN N N N N IN 5V 5 4 3 2 1 COM POWER SOURCE 2011 Axia Audio GPIO v ZA 4 2009 GPIO Control Room Guest Microphone Logic ON Command Active Low Input Turns channel ON OFF Command Active Low Input Turn channel OFF TALK to CR Command 13 Active Low Input Mutes channel outputs and routes source audio to PVW speakers MUTE Command Active Low Input Mutes channel outputs TALK to SOURCE Command Active Low Input Allows an external button to
113. The Host Name field at the top of the page shows the name you ve defined for this PowerStation for confir mation should you be viewing the page remotely Program and Monitor Out This is where you enable and assign unique channel numbers to all of your PowerStation s Engine sources If any of your PowerStation outputs or monitor feeds are disabled in this menu that channel will have no audio output The sources you control are e Program 1 4 Your console s main Program bus outputs e Program 4 Record Special output for recording devices which feeds the contents the Program 4 bus post fader and pre On Off switch e Aux Send 1 4 Your console s stereo Auxiliary Send buses e CR Monitor Direct This is the output of the moni tor selector before the operator s volume controls and mutes useful for feeding a Producer s position or any other monitoring station with independent head phone volume controls e CR Monitor Contains whatever audio source your operator has selected to feed the Control Room mon itors e CR Headphones Contains whatever audio source your operator has selected to feed the Control Room headphones e Preview The feed to the Preview Cue speaker e Talk to CR This channel feeds audio to the Control Room talkback channel whenever the Talk button is pressed on any Studio Accessory panel e Guest Headphones Contains whatever audio source has been selected to feed the Guest head p
114. V 5 4 3 2 1 COM POWER SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio Configuring GPIO e 51 4 Configuring GPIO e 52 4 GPIO External Profanity Delay Logic DUMP Lamp 11 Active Low Input uminates DUMP lamp located on Element Monitor Module EXIT Lamp Active Low Input Illuminates EXIT lamp PAUSE Lamp Active Low Input Illuminates PAUSE lamp ENGAGE Lamp Active Low Input Illuminates ENGAGE lamp 15 DELAY ANNUNCIATOR Active Low Input Illuminates the DELAY annun Command ciator on the Element main screen DUMP Switch 1 Open Collector to Logic Com Active when DUMP button is mon Return depressed EXIT Switch 2 Open Collector to Logic Com Active when EXIT button is mon Return depressed 3 PAUSE Switch Open Collector to Logic Com Active when PAUSE button is mon Return depressed ENGAGE Switch Open Collector to Logic Com Active when ENGAGE button mon Return is depressed Not Used Open Collector to Logic Com mon Return 7 Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Logic Common Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon POWER amp COMMON Source Common Logic 5 Volt supply Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 Fused if source is not providing voltage active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 Source Supply
115. a 113 Log Log History and Log Setup Menus 114 The Screenshot Menu 114 The Modules Menu onnon aana 114 CAN Bus InformationMenu 115 Brightness Control Menu 4 115 Phone Channels Menu n naaa 116 User Modules Menu onnon annann 116 GPIO Configuration Menu 116 Script Information Menu 0 04 116 V Mixer Menu sir sa ee 002 eee 116 NEP MON sga a ERR ED ea he ee S 116 Engine Menu a eaea 0 e eo a 117 Sources amp Profiles Configuration Menu 117 Chapter Nine StudioEngine Controls 119 StudioEngine Configuration Screens 119 The M in Men s saa navise csie rieni 119 The Fader Channels Menu 119 The Return amp Monitor Inputs Menu 119 The Program amp Monitor Outputs Menu 120 The VMIX amp VMODE Menu 121 The Intercom Menu 444 121 The Options Menu sarm otea ee eu 123 The Stream Statistics Menu 123 The Network Menu 1 0 000000 0s 123 The Diagnostics Menu 24 124 System Ment ig padura uana ee we eS 124 Chapter Ten PowerStation Controls 127 PowerStation Configuration Screens 127 Home Page otea a OES we aw bE 127 Element Surface 1 sarene ee ee 129 Mix ENGIN Gi iain eos ce a ee EE a 129 Audio I O Subsystems 0 0 naaa ee 132 Ethernet Switch settings 00 004 135 Appendix A Specifications
116. a Arnhemi Tie tannp TEP Undone Suea Cy So paoro botere iapti Shaws Ne nit ap wwo i ana m T wom t c anak frase su praca t apts were at aen t impas upas apat wna Fig 9 6 Stream Statistics Screens The Network Menu e Host Name Enter a unique name for this particu lar StudioEngine This name is displayed on various information and diagnostic screens Spaces are not allowed e Network Address This field contains the IP ad dress you ve assigned for this StudioEngine e Netmask The submask for your P Audio Network e Gateway If your Axia network has a network gate way to allow outside access enter its IP address here e Connected Console Displays the IP address of the Element console that is connected to your Studio En gine Host name Studio Engine 11 Use only letters seunbers hyphens dots mast start with a letter or a mumber Save Mixer settings to config Fig 9 5 Options Screen The Stream Statistics Menu This screen provides information about all active au dio streams in and out of the StudioEngine This is useful primarily for diagnostics and contains no settings that can be modified Axia tech support may ask you to report information reported on this page In general errors and defects should be minimal DSP underruns should also be very low except for IP Audio sources under certain Network address 192168 100 11 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 00 0 Netwo
117. a oo l CR Moneor Internal ey heetrry n Ir irral Og aho a Tatin FT LLL CR Montor Pwr Sh Sado 1 gt 10308 PHONO Mc 101 gt 12207 Sudo 10 19P5MAN O gt Serdo Mic Engine 1 amp 2 fair Core Rod moit Op ard ment Lago J Jier ard Mode BREE 12200 Sude 1 CO APS MATEO Fig 10 6 Audio I O Subsystem GPIO 2011 Axia Audio In the example shown in Figure 10 6 we can see that output pin 1 of the Control Room Monitor GPO is active This indicates that a microphone in live in that room naturally this is the control for our ON AIR light We can also see GPO pin 2 is also active that the CR monitors are dimmed The cause of dimmed monitors is the Hybrid in Preview as we can see on GPO pin 3 on port 2 If all of this seems confusing please read Chapter 4 Configuring GPIO Interfacing any electronic sys tem to the real world takes some effort but Livewire makes it a lot easier by associating this control with the same Livewire channel that handles your audio stream When configuring a GPIO port you may use the pop up selector to choose your Livewire source from the selection window or you may simply enter the Livewire channel number into the box if you happen to know it As usual click Apply when you are done Meters The PowerStation IO Subsystem has meters to assist with troubleshooting and level calibration These meters are peak reading meters and will show you how much headroom you have at your audio inp
118. activate channel TALK TO SOURCE function Element only SmartSurface not used ON Lamp cf Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return ON unless TALK or MUTE is active OFF Lamp 2 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return OFF TALK to CR Lamp 3 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when TALK is mon Return active MUTE Lamp 4 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when MUTE is mon Return active TALK to SOURCE Lamp Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when the channel mon Return TALK TO SOURCE function is active Element only SmartSurface not used Source Common 7 Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Logic Common Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing common Logic 5 Volt supply Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 if Fused source is not providing volt age active only when source has been assigned to channel Source Supply 10 Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT NIC 5 4 3 2 1 8 l7 Ie Ts l4 l3 l2 li E IE E E E E 0 N N N N N N 5V 5 4 3 2 1 COM POWER SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio Configuring GPIO e 43 4 Configuring GPIO e 44 4 GPIO Studio Monitor 2 Guest Microphone Logic ON Command Active Low Input Turns channe
119. akes it offline during the update process While audio playing through the module s faders will continue un interrupted keep in mind that while updating usually about 10 15 seconds you will not be able to adjust gain or turn faders on or off on the module being updated CAN Bus Information Menu This screen shows statistics about CANBus commu nications between Element s CPU and control surface Note that you will need Java to view the graphical infor mation presented in this window During normal opera tion you will see two lines one red and one blue These lines provide a graphical representation of the CANBus transmit and receive data You will see a momentary spike only when a button is pressed on the console or on a CANBus accessory panel If these lines show er ratic activity or if they do not follow the same general trends you may have a CANBus cabling or termination problem Brightness Control Menu This menu offers several useful options for fine tun ing your Element s various LED and LCD displays to your studio s ambient lighting All values are expressed in percent element s Element Control Center Module brightness control UD con wrge x UD text Ganley Orgrness D es Rard ation wrgrnest 10 5 CRVOPF button brightness 200 Use modde LED text dopisy fash off state brighe 09 l User modse tution LCD ongriress m eer modse bution i CD cora et S 5 Prod cton modde gnis baga panes s
120. al Livewire channel includ ing associated GPIO with a single channel number 2011 Axia Audio 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections e 27 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections 28 What does this all mean in practice If the destina tion is a codec or hybrid you ll set the Destination Type to To Source and use the same Channel number as the stream representing the Codec or Hybrids output the caller or far end codec audio This sends a backfeed to that device Other destinations such as CR Monitor Pro gram feeds to processor etc will always be designated as From Source Output Load This option is only available on the analog destina tions screen This setting has two options The usual se lection is Hi Z and is used when the outputs are fed to High impedance destination devices This has been the normal case for many years When the node is feeding legacy equipment with 600 Ohm inputs the 600 ohm op tion should be selected This boosts the node s output level by 1 dB to maintain true 4 dB levels into 600 Ohm equipment to ensure unity gain The audio clipping point remains at 24 dB Note that output load is not configurable for AES destinations Gain Not all equipment is designed to operate at our nomi nal system level of 4 dBv This setting allows to you trim the output level 12 dB to ensure that you are feeding your external equipment with the correct signal level It is
121. all changes Note If you are using your Element console with a PowerStation its software is integrated with the StudioEngine of the PowerStation See Chapter 10 for the PowerStation software up date procedure fe Ge Yor y bawo p jbt rc C X amp wee ses mee d oem conis er L h romerinme Contre erter BOO O OOOO Axa PowerStation Control Center _ Network configuration ee D owe IR It nmh pk ANA ea te eee ee we 3809 Gee Wel access password E cortrrster s onnecene ieten ee je yn ponve pa pe c x D 4 eoms Feet Ctrl ean O ea al grrert Element Control Center Tos Network configuri smon maane birer Palen beat wee Da tma Bon ts bos for paa T Web access password Catewen Loewe Sofware update O gt pep aie ae iiaroes hae ta to Wae eerie Wiee Gids aita 12RA ND sa naa Sah current maage Ont wan tand baaga pent rem mer Leea apina nage face Fig 8 4 Element with StudioEngine Setup screen Software Update Element with Studio Engine only This is where you upload new Element operat ing software Base File System Upgrade Most Element software updates do not include a Base File up date but if one is required click this link to up load and apply the new code Software Versions shows you the software packages currently stored on your Element s flash memory card The blue radio button is displayed next to
122. alog and AES Audio The connector pin functions shown in Figure 2 4 are the same for both the AES and Analog inputs and out puts 2011 Axia Audio INPUT CONNECTORS Co nia henna _ e nee comectes Figure 2 4 Analog and AES Audio Connector Pin Outs Microphone There are two XLR F connectors on the rear panel that are designed for microphone inputs These con nectors use the standard wiring convention for a 3 pin XLR audio connector These connectors may have 48 volt Phantom Power enabled via the PowerStation s web page configuration so take appropriate precautions if you connect anything other than a microphone to these inputs when Phantom Power is enabled GPIO Connections The PowerStation MAIN and AUX each include four GPIO ports wired in the same configuration as GPIO ports on other Axia products Please refer to Chapter 4 Configuring GPIO for the functions of these ports and wiring diagrams for the DB 15 connectors In most cases a GPIO port will be associated with a single source such as a cd player studio microphone profanity delay etc PathfinderPC may also be used to monitor and control GPIO for advanced applications OUTRUT COMMON RETURN OV OND SOURCE CoM ROWER KARE Figure 2 5 GPIO Connector Pin Outs The interconnections to GPIO ports will vary de pending on the type external equipment being used and whether or not voltage is supplied by an external device Chapter 4 Configu
123. am output to another studio to avoid program inter ruptions Diagnostics This section of the PowerStation MixEngine is de signed to create local diagnostics reports and to deliver real time logging to an external Syslog Server This area is used under guidance from Axia Tech Support Audio I O Subsystems The PowerStation family has two audio I O subsys tems one is associated with the PowerStation MAIN and the other identical I O subsystem is a part of the PowerStation AUX Both units are normally accessed from the web pages of the PowerStation MAIN Note that the IO Subsystems currently have their own password system The default user name is user and the user password is blank Sources and Destinations The basics of Sources and Destinations have been thoroughly discussed in Chapter 2 Element with Pow erStation That information will not be repeated here GPIO Each MAIN and AUX IO Subsystem includes four GPIO ports The ports can be utilized in two ways A port can be associated with a Livewire Channel for con trol to from an external device or a GPIO port can be monitored and controlled by PathfinderPC Abas PowerStation Control Center Stem IO Subsystem Main Ser ore Bars Dairena GOOD Mawi Speer Oot Shp NTP Seti Element Surlae Solrces 3 Protec Modules GPIO Configuration CAN ter information Pott og Port 3 Port SOO RN SESS SEES ni Lis Mode gt S OA MAIT Ganun rabies Inar
124. and I O Sub system AUX will be 192 168 0 123 e Netmask This parameter is determined by your network administrator In a simple network it will be 255 255 255 0 e Gateway This is required for advanced IP ad dress schemes if you intend to access our de vices from outside the Livewire LAN or if you wish to use an external NTP server e DNS O and DNS 1 Not currently required e Web Access Password When you connect to your PowerStation the user name is always user This is where you can change the user password Remember that changing this pass word will have implications if PathfinderPC software is in use Reboot A reboot is required when any chang es are made to the network parameters on the PowerStation Setup Menu NTP Setup This section contains the setting for synchronization to an NTP network Time Protocol server PowerStation Control Center oh NTP Settings Statins Sip NTP Oryoff Owam Blem nt Surface NTP server address rimay 05 254 212 40 Goes amp Profile Modi NTP server address secondury 0 0 00 CAN buri mation Tine zone GMT ore so x Erg ea Corry Cy Chore Owe her eci ds Soret miono Fig 10 3 PowerStation NTP Setup Screen e NTP On Off Does just what it says You can tell if NTP is running properly by looking for the presence of the NTP indicator on the Element screen shown below 2011 Axia Audio e NTP Server Address Primary and Secondary Enter th
125. as been incorporated into P TO cotec this section 6 TO EDIT PC REC DST You have two Process options 3 osts You may process only CR headphones for any selection PGM 1 PGM 2 etc or you may process PGM 1 in all moni toring paths This second selection is commonly used since it allows you to process all PGM 1 monitoring whether it is CR monitors CR headphones CR guest headphones or Studio guests This simulates a processed off air feed that most radio personalities will prefer There are currently three Preset processing options Bypass SmoothHeadphones and HotHeadphones These descriptions are self explanatory Destination Configuration Each PowerStation I O section has eight local audio outputs to which you may deliver various Livewire audio streams This concept of delivering streams to a physi cal output is the reason we prefer to use the term Des tinations to describe these outputs As you night have guessed there are other places where we use destina tions and they are not associated with a physical output The setup of the PowerStation destinations is very similar to an Axia 8x8 node The configuration page for Destinations is shown in Figure 2 20 Name User defined Most people fine it useful to describe the equipment to which the destination is connected for example Studio 4 CR Monitor Orrel Type 11111 lt CR Monor St ji 11112 lt CR Headohnos Fs 11115 lt Guest HPS Chl 11113
126. ase refer to the Group Start Screen description turning off headphones when talkback is present later in this chapter and this setting is active MOTOR FADER POSITION Motorized Element Record Mode faders can be set to assume a predefined position e PROGRAM 1 2 3 4 Record Allows automatic when a Show Profile is loaded Choose Off to specify BUS settings for the channel Assign Remove or a setting of 00 Use to specify a level to use from 73 No Change when Record Mode is active dB to 10 dB or Retain Existing Setting which will cause the motor fader to make no changes to the e ON OFF Disables the Channel On Off button func position the fader was at prior to loading the Show tion or No Change when Record Mode is active Profile Finishing Up Finally there are two more controls at the very bot tom of the screen 2011 Axia Audio 6 Show Profiles e 95 6 Show Profiles e 96 e SAVE CHANGES button also found at the top of the screen applies any changes made to the current Channel Description If you don t click this button your changes won t be saved e BACK TO SHOW PROFILE link takes you back to the Show Profile Settings menu The Auxiliary Send And Return Description Screen Just as the Show Profile Channel Description screens mirror Element s Channel Options menus the Auxil iary Send Description Screen captures the global Aux Send settings that can be set using the Global Options Se
127. ast orientation Utility Meter normally shows the volume of sources assigned to the PGM 4 Phone Record multifunction bus but can optionally be slaved to meter whatever source is auditioned in the Control Room Monitors 7 10 11 12 Annunciator Panel informs operators when Mic channels are open when audio is being auditioned in the Preview cue channel when Talkback is ac tive in either direction and when external profan ity delay units if any are active Countdown Ring appears when Element s Countdown Timer is active and decreases during the last 60 seconds as a visual prompt Count Up and Countdown Timers provide an automatic event timer with manual elapsed time function and a countdown timer to assist in back timing live program material Monitor Selection Indicators show talent what source is being presented in the Control Room and Studio Monitor channels the CR Headphone channel and the Preview channel and shows the position of each volume control when adjusted External Monitor Indicators show what sourc es are assigned to each of the two programmable External Monitor channels Show Profile Indicator tells talent what Show Profile is currently loaded and whether the con sole has been changed from Profile settings 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations 63 5 Element Operations 64 Control Details General Fader Controls Although any Element faders can handle any
128. ble is almost never required in an Axia system However we highly recom mend shielded CAT 5e in this instance in order to prevent the digital control signals present in these circuits from generating RF interference after they exit the containment of the Element chassis In a pinch though regular unshielded CAT 5e will work Figure E 3 Setting the ID number Connect one end of the cable to the accessory panel you re installing and the other end to the Power Distri bution Board using the jack you removed the termina tion block from If you have more than one accessory panel to install connect it now to the second RJ port on the back of the first accessory panel More panels can be daisy chained as needed On the final accessory panel place the termination block you removed from the Power Distribution Board into the panel s spare RJ jack Once connected your new accessory panel will be automatically recognized and ready to use In the rare event it is not please capture the console s new con figuration following the instructions in Chapter 1 of this manual Programming Using a connected computer log into your Element s configuration web pages and select the User Modules page You ll see your new panel listed there e For panels with mic functions enter the channel number of the mic source you want it to control e For panels with headphone functions enter the chan nel number of the mi
129. by the Standard Monitor Mod ule are present but are ac cessed differently Controls for all of Element s options and features are accessed via on screen menus with the aid of the three SoftKnobs constantly used controls like headphone and moni tor selection and volume plus command keys for the on screen timers and a nu meric keypad for convenient dialing of telephone systems and codecs are included The 2 Fader Monitor Module does not include the navigation arrow keys or scroll knob as described on the previous page The En ter and Help keys are also not included with the 2 Fad er monitor module A close inspection re veals that the faders on this module are the same as the faders on the 4 Phone Fader module or the 2 Fader Call Controller module The SET and HOLD buttons are included making the 2 fader Monitor Module useful for integration with hybrids that support these features Channel Options Pressing the Channel Options keys above your faders Figure 5 6 Monitor 2 Fader Module SoftKnobs will generate a slightly different display if you have the 2 Fader Monitor module since this module has three Soft Knobs as compared with the six SoftKnobs found on the Standard Monitor Module In many cases you will find that one SoftKnob has been used as a selector It takes a few more clicks and twists to access some features but the end result is the same In Figure 5 7 on the f
130. c Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 Fused if source is not providing voltage active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 Source Supply NOT CONNECTED OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT NIC 5 4 3 2 1 s 17 l6 Ts l4 l3 To Ti EE EE EE E E E SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio GPIO Codec Logic ON Command Active Low Input Turns channel ON OFF Command Active Low Input Turns channel OFF 13 TALK to CR Command Active Low Input Mutes channel outputs and routes source audio to PVW speakers MUTE Command Active Low Input Mutes channel outputs TALK to SOURCE Command Active Low Input Allows an external button to activate channel TALK TO SOURCE function ON Lamp 1 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return ON unless TALK or MUTE are active OFF Lamp 2 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return OFF TALK to CR Lamp 3 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when TALK is mon Return active MUTE Lamp 4 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when MUTE is mon Return active TALK to SOURCE Lamp Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when the channel mon Return TALK TO SOURCE function is active Source Common 7 Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Logic Common Internal 5 Volt
131. c source that the headphone panel is adjacent to The panel will control the head phone backfeed to that mic position Installing a GPIO Accessory Module Installation Accessory panels using GPIO connections are a straightforward installation using standard multiple con ductor cable and DB 15M connectors You can fabricate this cable or purchase one like the Cables To Go 02639 a 10 foot version available from Provantage Best Buy or online from CablesToGo com 55500 Figure E 4 Axia rackount control panels connect via GPIO ports Cables between the accessory panels and the Axia GPIO Node pin for pin with male to male connectors Programming a Mic Control Panel connected to an Element GPIO Connection This section applies when connecting a Mic Control accessory panel to the GPIO port of your Element Power Supply It assumes you have already made the cable con 2011 Axia Audio nection described above in Installation Using a PC connected to the Axia network enter the configuration page for your Element and select the GPIO Configuration section In the GPIO Configuration page you will see eight listings that correspond to the eight ports that are on the back of the Element Power Supply Create a name on the listing that corresponds to the port to which you wired your Mic Control Panel and enter the channel number of the mic source you want it to control Ek wnt Control Gon ker SFO Configuration
132. ce of a conversation with Axia support personnel should you need to contact us for support please use the contact information listed on Page iii of this manual Q How do I set the IP address of Element Press and hold the Fader Options key or and 4 and 7 keys located on the upper right of the Master Module for 5 seconds the connected VGA screen will display the IP Address Book Q The Element web interface asks me for a password but I haven t set one Element can be password protected to discourage tampering By default the user name is user and there is no password Q I just added a new module to my Element and the module display reads IHACTINE What do I do When new modules are added to Element you must notify the housekeeping system that they re there by using Capture Mode To do this press and hold the and 2 keys located next to Ele ment s control knob on the Master Module Af ter five seconds the console will enter Capture Mode and the new modules will be activated you ll know because all module alpha displays read Capture Mode To exit Capture Mode press the Enter or key also located next to the Con trol knob Your new modules are now ready to use Q I get a Page Not Found error when I try to connect to Element using my Web browser What s wrong It s possible that your computer s network configu ration needs adjustment Livewire networks do not assign I
133. ce with a third party Intercom or two way radios More on this configuration is available in the IP Intercom manual Version information The bottom of the screen shows a version value for the intercom software The intercom function is inde pendent from the StudioEngine code and so has its own version This display shows the version of Intercom code your StudioEngine is running 2011 Axia Audio The Options Menu The Options page shows some initial options re quired for legacy software compatibility e Source Sharing Provides the option to dis able source lock on the sources generated by the StudioEngine This is only needed for legacy prod ucts all current installs should maintain the default setting of Sources lockable e Standard Audio Streams Provides the option to change the buffer value for Standard streams that enter the StudioEngine Default values are suggested e Audio mixing Provides status information only e V Mixer Defines whether your Element s Vmix is controlled by the StudioEngine desired or through legacy Element control It is suggestd to maintain de fault settings this option is provided for legacy users only Host name Studio Engne 11 Souree shang Receive buffer sis 15 100 nu 35 Warning changes take effect after restart circumstances Contact tech support if you are experi encing problems and need help in this area Henor Seine Cracow Demir Were Chey NewnlPestvte Oras
134. connection panel to an Ethernet switch These ports are for con 2011 Axia Audio 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections e 3 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections 4 Press and hold both the star and 2 keys on the Monitor Module numeric pad for 5 seconds The alpha numeric displays will change to read Capture Hode this enumerates all of the installed faders in the control surface Now make sure that LED displays above the faders display the channel numbers in the order you desire If not you can adjust them individually using the PGM1 and PGM2 buttons above each fader to change the chan nel number to the one you desire When you re done adjusting channel number dis plays press the enter or if you have a Monitor 2 fader module key to exit Capture Mode and your El ement is ready to use Hello Moto If you have motorized faders you can mirror other motorized faders while you are in Capture Mode A motorized fader that is slaved to a master fader will move automati cally to mirror the movements of the master Mirrored faders both control gain for the same source but the master can override the setting of the slave useful for split Element setups where talent has a local set of faders that may be used to control certain sources but you still want the Board Operator to have master control To mirror a fader press the Options key above the fade
135. considered good practise to normalize all lev els coming into your system first and then adjust output gains only when necessary Meters The meters configuration page may be helpful in setting up destinations and their levels Remember you need to install Java before these meters can be displayed Note that the nominal signal level should be approxi mately 20 dBFS This corresponds to the industry stan dard level of 4 dBv since our full scale or OdBFS is 24 dBv Advanced Settings You ve no doubt noticed that there are many more options for your PowerStation than we ve covered here That s because Chapter 2 was meant to get you up and running as quickly as possible For more advanced infor mation please refer to Chapter 4 GPIO Configuration Chapter 7 Virtual Mixer VMIX For an in depth explanation of the other advanced settings for your Element StudioEngine and PowerSta tion please refer to Chapters 8 9 and 10 respectively of this manual What s Next Take a break You re done with initial set up When youre ready continue to Chapter 3 to walk through one of the most important Element concepts Source Pro files 2 2011 Axia Audio Chapter Three Working With Sources In this chapter we ll discuss how to set up inputs for your Element console we call them Sources You ll be using the HTTP servers built into the Element and StudioEngine or PowerStation to do this In the E
136. ctors the ribbon cable con nector for the overbridge alpha display panel and the module ID encoder Note that not all modules require an overbridge display and thus a ribbon connector will not be present Your module kit will contain some or all of the fol 2011 Axia Audio Appendix C FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance e 145 Appendix C FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance 146 lowing items The specified module An overbridge alphanumeric display panel An overbridge window for the display panel A ribbon connector A 1 foot RJ45 patch cable If you believe any of thse items are missing please contact Axia Support immediately Tools you ll need for module installation are A 1 Philips head screwdriver A 2 5 mm hex wrench A 6a jeweler s screwdriver Before beginning you ll need to set the ID for your new module Each Element module must have a unique ID A quick way of choosing an ID is to count how many modules are installed on your Element typically the factory installs modules with IDs set in numerical order from left to right Master Modules should always have their ID set to 0 more on this later So if you have 4 factory installed modules in your Element you can safe ly set the ID of your new module to 5 To set the mod ule ID use a jeweler s screwdriver to gently rotate the indicator shown in Figure C 7 to the desired number To begin installation remove th
137. d pre On Off switch Aux Send 1 4 Your console s stereo Auxiliary Send buses CR Monitor Direct This is the output of the moni tor selector before the operator s volume controls and mutes useful for feeding a Producer s position or any other monitoring station with independent head phone volume controls CR Monitor Contains whatever audio source your operator has selected to feed the Control Room mon itors CR Headphones Contains whatever audio source your operator has selected to feed the Control Room headphones Preview The feed to the Preview Cue speaker Talk to CR This channel feeds audio to the Control Room talkback channel whenever the Talk button is pressed on any Studio Accessory panel Guest Headphones Contains whatever audio source has been selected to feed the Guest head phones Studio Monitor Contains whatever audio source your operator has selected to feed the Studio moni tors Talent Headphones Contains whatever audio source has been selected to feed the Talent head phones Talkback When any console Talk key is pressed CR Mic audio is routed pre fader to this channel The columns following each of these entries dis play the status of each channel and allow you to make changes The Channel column like other similar fields used throughout the Axia system is where you enter a unique channel number for each console output The Mode column lets you enable and disable each
138. de to LEFT when creating the Source and Show Profiles 4 Using the audio node s Source configuration web page enter a text name and channel number for each input It might be convenient to include the telephone 2011 Axia Audio number as part of the text name Configure for Fast stream audio mode Nn On the node s Destination configuration web page select the same channel number for each output as was used for the corresponding input Select To source for the Type Configure for Fast Stream audio mode 6 Open the Element Sources amp Profiles Configuration web page Choose Source Profiles then Create New Source Profile In your new source profile choose the Primary Source that you entered in the audio node s setup page Give it an Element source name and se lect Phone for source type Enter the phone hybrid IP address including the hybrid number in the form XX XX XX XX N where the x s represent the IP number and the n represents the hybrid number The Telos Two has two hybrids so you need to repeat this procedure to create another source profile for the second hybrid Important Note The Telos TWO has an op tional internal mix minus cross connect feature Since Element provides this function automati cally you should disable this feature in the Telos TWO set hybrid mode to separate to prevent unexpected results Within Element each incoming
139. ded with PathfinderPC Pro VMIX Control brings the operation of VMIX out of the background and provides a graphical user interface with software faders Figure 7 2 shows an example of a VMIX control GUI TE heh eb s a s la Z3 a Tt EEREN E Figure 7 2 PathfinderPC VMIX Control VMIX Control enhances VMIX by providing real time foreground control of VMIXer parameters It also allows us to monitor levels of streams associated with VMIX faders VMIX Control is often used in applica tions such as a news workstation where you require only a few inputs About PathfinderPC and VMIX There are several ways that PathfinderPC can be used for background control VMIX First VMIX functions can be used both as quali fiers and actions in stack events This means that a designer can select GPIO triggers time based events user button pushes serial port commands and other options and combinations of options to decide when to make changes to any fader in a VMIXER The user can make a gain change based on these events turn a channel off or on and or adjust the fade times giving complete control over the VMIXer based on any of the stacking events qualifiers Second PathfinderPC provides an ACU protocol translator which uses the VMIX system to mimic hardware devices such as a Sine Systems ACU to a Prophet Automation System In this way a Prophet system can control the mixing capabili ties of VMIX just as if they were ACU
140. der Monitor module includes the AUX SEND and AUX RETURN controls within the Meter Options screen as shown above The functions of Aux Sends and returns are as de scribed in the section that follows AUX Sends amp Returns Key Standard Monitor Module only This key affects global settings for the master send and return levels of the four stereo Aux Send and two stereo Aux Return buses The outputs can be turned On or Off and can be sent to the preview speakers and headphones if preview is enabled in headphones Element s Aux buses can be used as utility buses for mixing for constructing custom IFB mixes or as effects buses for production Pressing the Sends amp Returns key once takes you to the Aux Sends Master screen Figure 5 19 pressing it twice displays the Aux Re turns Master screen Figure 5 20 and pressing a third time exits the menu Aux Sends Master screen options The Send A B C D SoftKnobs when rotated set the Master Send Gain for each Aux Send bus Pushing any of these knobs toggles that individual Aux Send Master On or Off The Select Preview knob allows you to hear any of the four Aux Send mixes in the Preview chan nel Push to preview release to end the preview Figure 5 20 More Meters Example Configuration 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations e 83 5 Element Operations 84 Figure 5 21 Standard Aux Sends menu screen Aux Returns Master screen options
141. dio application surfaces that requires only one channel of an audio stream or a mono sum VMODE is an easy way to make this happen VMODE is an addition to the StudioEngine toolbox that addresses this requirement its job is to help strip sum or compile a custom audio stream from other avail able streams in the network VMODE Controls VMode as shown in Figure 7 3 has the capacity for up to eight separate stream manipulation operations The controls are as follows e Input Selector contains a drop down menu that allows you to select from a range of sources for each VMODE input You may choose from local StudioEngine sources including PGM 1 2 3 4 the Record bus Phone bus Aux Send A B C D VMIX SUB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and VMIX MAIN You can also choose External which then allows you to select any other network source by entering its channel number e Src Name and Channel are active when the Input Selector described above is set to External You may type any convenient title in the Src Name box to identify the source the Channel column is where you would enter the channel number of the source you want to perform a VMODE operation upon Stream Type follows the conventions found else where in this manual Select From Source if you re using a normal source generated by studio equipment connected to the Axia network Select To Source if you plan to use the specified stream as a backfeed mix minus to a phone
142. e Now use the numeric pad to enter the IP address Press the leftmost SoftKey again to take the new IP value Repeat this process to set the subnet mask value 2011 Axia Audio Element IP Address Every piece of Livewire gear must have its own unique IP Address Set the IP Address for each Element in this field Subnet Mask Enter your network s subnet mask value here usually 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address To enable IP configura tion and remote administration of your Livewire network you ll need a network gateway Usually this will be the IP address of your router 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections e 21 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections e 22 Important Your Gateway Subnet Mask should be set within the same subnet as the PowerSta tion even if you have no gateway installed y tion do not change the factory default value y NTP Network Time Protocol timekeeping to synchronize time of day clocks across your fa cility If you have an NTP server enter its IP Ad dress here y the IP Address of your backup server here y protect your Element s web server connection by entering a numeric password here Note If you set a password for HTTP access you will not see your password displayed in this field upon re entering the IP Address book This is a security feature intended to prevent over the shoulder pas
143. e IP address es of your NTP server s here It is common for a PC on your internal Livewire LAN to be setup as an NTP server e Time Zone GMT Specify your GMT offset here Note that PowerStation does not yet have automatic spring and fall DST adjustments This feature will be added soon Element Surface The advanced options of the Element surface are covered in Chapter 8 Advanced Element Controls Please refer to that chapter for any setup details regard ing the Element console Operation of the Element is covered in Chapter 5 Element Operations Mix Engine The PowerStation MAIN includes an integrated StudioEngine aka MixEngine The implementation is almost identical to that of a standalone StudioEngine and these details are covered in Chapter 9 StudioEngine Controls The Fader Channels Menu Settings shown here are not adjustable Useful for remote assistance or diagnostics this page can tell you what sources are loaded to each fader of the Engine s associated control surface along with the headphone monitor source and backfeed mix minus if any is be ing fed to each loaded source The Return amp Monitor Inputs Menu Another informational screen choosing this menu option shows you what audio sources are currently as signed to your console s e Auxiliary returns e Control Room monitor and headphone channels e Studio Monitor channel e Source Preview Cue channel e External Preview channel
144. e Right channel that you don t want to air Using VMODE you can split the L and R chan nels and create a new source using just the channel you want like so 1 Choose External in the Input Selector box 2 Type the receiver s name in the Src Name box 3 Enter the unique channel number of the receiver in the Channel box 4 Leave In Stream Type set as From Source 5 Choose Upmix from L in the Audio Mode box 6 Enter a unique channel number in the Output Channel box 7 Choose a stream type from the Out Stream Type box you can choose Standard because this is not live audio 8 Click the Apply V Mode Settings button You ve just created a mono source with only the con tent you want that can be routed wherever you like Create a Split Record feed with Gain Control Element v2 x introduces a split record function that can be enabled in any devices Source Profile this allows you to send a sources audio to one channel of the stereo Record bus You d like to use this split recording for an interview with a host several guests placing the host on the Left channel and all the other sources guest mics phone callers etc on the Right channel Plus each source needs to have an independent gain stage separate from the on air PGM 1 mix Complex yes but with VMODE you can do it 1 Using Element console controls place the Host s mic into the Aux Send A bus pre fader ON PRE 2 Place each addit
145. e and Nodes as outlined in Chap ter One or Two If not go no further you ve got to do that before you can continue with Source Profile setup Configuring Inputs e 30 3 Figure 3 1 Source Profile options the whole picture 2011 Axia Audio Primary source 12202 lt Rudo Mec 2eS Man10 jal Source profile name MiC Source name override Show sourcerame Allow application to override Show beth F Channel t F Channel 2 F Channel 3 ica Channel 4 C CR Montor inputs O Sudo Moniter input P V miser ingat Operator C CR producer CR guest O Studio guest Une Phone Codec Computer player Normal Feder Rart 8 Fader Start vath Arm Source avallab ty Source type Fader mode Figure 3 2 Source Profile General Settings PRIMARY SOURCE All of the audio sources that you previously defined during Audio Node or Pow erStation I O setup are available in this drop down box pick one SOURCE PROFILE NAME Type a 10 charac ter descriptive name for your source This is the description that will appear on the LED display above the console fader SOURCE NAME OVERRIDE If the source you re defining can supply Program Associated Data for instance a computer playout system that sends song artist information you can choose to have that text dynamically substituted in the alphanumeric display of the fader the source is assigned to Instead of read i
146. e audio streams to monitor on these keys e Link Key This key Standard Monitor Module only toggles the Monitor 1 Headphone source Link func tion When active a change to the Monitor 1 source automagically selects that source for the Headphone feed and vice versa The Link key illuminates when this function is active Monitor 2 Knob This knob at the top left of the Monitor section con trols the selection and volume of the source heard in the Monitor 2 speakers Control Room Guests and Studio or News booth monitors Rotate to vary the Monitor 2 speaker gain Push the knob to see an on screen display of sources that can be assigned to the Monitor 2 feed Rotate to highlight the desired source and push again to take e Talk To Monitor 2 Key or The board operator can push and hold this key to talk to the talent listening to the Monitor 2 feed While the key is depressed audio from the Control Room mic channel is fed pre fader to the Monitor 2 speakers and headphones if used Releasing the key ends the talkback function e Preview Knob O This knob controls the volume of the source heard in the Preview cue speakers Rotate the knob to vary the gain of the Preview speakers Note that pushing this knob even though it clicks is not currently associated with any action preview To HP Key PB This key toggles the Preview To Headphone func tion When active this function sends
147. e blanking panel oc cupying the position you wish to install your new mod ule into Use the hex wrench to remove the hex head screw s at the top of the panel If your new module has an accompanying overbridge display you will need to remove one of Element s end Figure C 7 Setting the module ID panels in order to insert it Ascertain which end panel is closest to the position your new module will be mounted in this is the one you ll remove There are eight machine screws that hold each Ele ment end panel to the frame 5 in the bucket and 3 under the overbridge shown in Figure C 8 below To access these screws you ll need to remove the module closest to this end panel and tilt the overbridge forward Figure C 8 Locations of end panel fastening screws in the overbridge compartment above and in the bucket below Once the screws are removed the end panel pulls off easily Note the locating hole in the end panel that re ceives the overbridge hinge pin If there are any overbridge displays between the end of the overbridge and the position in which you ll be mounting your alpha panel you must remove them To do so remove the ribbon connector from the circuit board by gently pushing the two ears on each side of the connector socket This will eject the connector Note Ribbon connectors must be connected to the alphanumeric panels tail down that is with the ribbon emerging f
148. e manual you ll need to get up and running with a minimum of fuss PowerStatiom AUX PowerStation MAIN 1000 Bse 1 30 Ofer 1 mm Making Connections You ve probably unpacked your boxes and are sitting next to a pile of Axia gear wondering what to do first Take a look at the diagram above it represents a typi cal Livewire connected radio studio with the PowerSta tion at its core Here s what you should do to get going 1 Packed with your Element control surface is a cable with 6 pin Molex connectors This is the power communications cable Lift the Element meter panel and connect the end of the cable without the strain relief to the corresponding port on the Element connection panel Connect the other end of the cable to the jack labeled DC CAN on the back of your PowerStation MAIN 2 Connect the DVI output on the rear panel to a DVI D compatible monitor before powering up the PowerStation Turn on the monitor 3 If using an AUX connect the MAIN and AUX PSU2 connectors with the special cable provided 4 Connect the power cords to the PSU receptacles on the PowerStation s rear panels and power up 5 Capture your Element control surface faders by holding the and 2 keys for 5 seconds Press when you see the SAF TURE prompt above each channel 6 Your hardware is now ready to go However some basic software configuration is also needed Follow the instructions found in Chapter 2 to config
149. e name of the VX Studio you wish to connect to 4 The names and channel numbers of the VX hybrids and Livewire outputs you wish to use in studio 5 Optional should you wish to load different VX Shows using your Element console the VX Show names you wish to load Note for users of previous Element soft ware versions With v2 5 0 software the way Element connects to Telos phone systems has changed The major difference to Element VX configuration is that the IP address of your VX system must be entered in the Phone section of your Element or PowerStation Show Profile instead of in the Phone Channel section as was previously required In order to correctly control your VX your Element and or PowerStation must be upgraded with new soft ware Software packages that implement this change be gin with the following versions e PowerStation v1 1 3a e Element v2 5 0 3 To obtain the latest software please visit AxiaAudio com downloads and follow the update in structions contained in the accompanying Release Notes prior to proceeding with this configuration document if you have not already done so Connecting to VX Open the Element s Module Manager Phone Chan nels web page If you have the Call Controller module installed you will see the following at the top of the screen Phone channel configuration ID Module Server Address Login Password 1 34 2011 Axia Audio Appendix D Working With Hybrids e 151
150. e suonesyineds vy xipuaddy f z i r I g 9 t i 8 1 dO SHS Gl YOS a NOULANDSIA Ad ddy 140 JONI ava ON NOI AA OMA 100 6v o00 06F L 2 For ae ke ae 3aSviiad IWNIDISO XX AS XX S0 Z 90 JINON 100 Aza ON OMG IZIS 0 62 90 ava JS AT NMA 1N3WJ13 SWALSAS SOTAL 0s orse M INOd4 9 1 SZ 6r 8 3 Z801 SZZY ve i i 606 SZ SE oZ l l lez 2 8z 91 less 217 Zl 1 1 Sze SZYI 8 L IZ61 S22 v j UOISUBUUIG ULPIM sUOHISOd SWOI 1 i ww s you u suouS wq a 00 00 t SIQD 99S UOISUSLUI l m ecos 9iq01 s uo 1a UPIM feros 3 i lt S xt JAIS LHOI 3qIS aJ S a BUDUISAO HUN OJUOD JO i i SUOZ SOUDINS D UIDJUIOWw l vJl oz zos 3 Appendix A Specifications e 140 Dark dark as coal tar it pours out bitter and strong Thats Starbucks for you 2011 Axia Audio A endix B CE Declaration of Conformity Supplementary Information for European Users CE Declaration of Conformity Application of Council Directives 93 68 EEC CE Marking 73 23 EEC safety low voltage directive 89 336 EEC electromagnetic compatibility Standards to which conformity is declared EN50081 1 EN50082 1 Manufacturer s Name Axia TLS Corporation Manufacturer s Address 1241 Superior Avenue Cleveland Ohio US
151. e the fader connector cable 1 Use the 2 5 mm hex wrench to remove the re 5 taining screw s at the top of the module requir at each end With the fader sitting label up and ing service With the screwes removed lift the the connector pins to the front you ll see a pry module at the top tilting it upward and pull the point on the right end of the fader cover Figure locating tab at the bottom of the module from the C 17 Use a jeweler s screwdriver to gently pry mounting channel off the cover 2 Turn the module over and locate the ribbon cable 8 Use a dry cotton swab or a cotton swab wet with that connects the module to its overbridge display distilled water to clean the fader parts if present Gently press the ears on each side of the board connector to release the cable Notas The lice oF chanical claanerson Hecate 3 Locate and disconnect the RJ45 patch cable that ductive plastic will substantially shorten fader f life Never touch the fader slider contact fingers connects the module to Element s connection while cleaning the fader parts panel 4 Remove the four conductor fader cable from the Always use a clean dry swab to dry off the con pins on the bottom of the fader Figure C 16 ductive plastic tracks after cleaning If the fader 5 Now that the fader is disconnected turn the mod rails are noticeably dirty wipe them off using a ule right side up Remove the knob from the fad dry cotton swab before lightly lub
152. e the lubricant Wipe off any excess lubricant from the rubber stops at each end of the glide rail Normally only the top rail the one the fader slider bushings glide on requires lubricant Figure C 18 Cleaning the fader glide rails Reinstalling The Fader 1 Snap the cover onto the fader body 2 From below reinsert the fader into position in the surface taking care that the end marked is in stalled adjacent to the channel s On Off keys 3 Reinstall the hex screws from the top of the sur face Do not overtighten 4 Press the fader knob firmly onto the stem 5 Reconnect the fader leads to their mating pins on the bottom of the fader The sequence is Green wire to pin 2 Black wire to pin C Red wire to pin 1 Bare wire to pin G 6 Reconnect the RJ 45 patch cable and alpha panel ribbon cable to the module 2011 Axia Audio 7 Lay the module into the frame engaging the lo cating tab at the bottom of the module and tilt ing the top downward into the frame Be careful not to pinch the ribbon cable between the module and frame 8 Reinstall hex head screw s at top of module Appendix D Working With Phone Hybrids One of the advantages of an Element Livewire stu dio is the smooth integration of Telos telephone interface equipment with the mixing console Element telephone control modules let you put the phone controls in front of the operator and near the associated faders
153. eadphones source assignment Record Mode Screen Element s Record Mode helps tal ent quickly prepare to record a phone bit interview or other program segment for later air Any source assigned to the Program 4 bus automatically feeds the Record and Phone buses as well Sourc es assigned to Program 4 Record will follow the Record options in their Source Profiles the CR Monitor assign ment automatically changes to PGM 4 and the bus assignment keys for channels assigned to Program 4 will flash when Record Mode 1s active Record made actwatior Enabled GPIO charrrel for recorder control 12090 Back to Show Profis Figure 6 10 Show Profile Record Mode Recording Tip The Program 4 REC bus is ac tive whether or not you choose to use Record Mode Most users convenient to use Record Mode to automatically switch their monitoring but it is not necessary to enable Record Mode in order to obtain audio output from the Pro gram 4 Record bus Record Mode Configuration e Record Mode Activation If Disabled is chosen the board op will not be able to use Record Mode while this Show Profile is loaded Choose Enabled to allow Record Mode to be used e GPIO Channel for Recorder Control Enter the channel number of the GPIO port assigned to your chosen recording device This device will auto matically begin recording with the board op presses Element s Record Mode Engage key See Chapter 4 Configuring GPIO for a complete r
154. eb browser Any current desktop or notebook PC with an Ethernet port and a standard Internet browser with Java support is acceptable For Livewire network cable connections CAT 5e Ethernet cable is required however many use CAT 6 since it is readily available at a slightly higher cost For greater detail on cable selections we recommend you read The Axia Guide to Choosing Category Cable avail able from www AxiaAudio com tech In a larger network with a core switch always make certain that power has been applied to your core Eth ernet switch and that the switch is properly configured for multicast as recommended by Axia before powering your other Axia components PowerStation Front Panel The indicator panel of the PowerStation MAIN shown here in Figure 2 2 is very clean Sorry there are no controls for you to push or turn All configuration and setup is performed in software through the web browser interface The PowerStation AUX is very similar Differ ences are noted in the following section Front Panel Indicators Even though there are no knobs or dials the front panel has some very useful indicators that tell you about the health and status of your PowerStation In all cases solid GREEN indicates normal operating conditions PSU This is a general health indicator for the PowerSta tion s power supply Solid GREEN is the normal state A RED LED indicates a power supply or fuse fault If you are using t
155. ecting the individual channels you wish to remove from Preview A momentary press of any lit Preview key will remove all channels from Preview The interlock option for Preview can be dis abled in any Show Profile s Monitor section so that users can gang preview sources without the need to press and hold the preview button The audio from the Preview bus feeds any speakers dedicated to Preview and can also be routed to the operator s headphones if desired Preview speakers will be muted whenever the board operator s microphone is ON or is assigned to the Preview or Record buses Figure 5 1 Line Module Fader Channel e Fader The fader controls the volume of the input source There are two modes for the fader fader start and fader normal 1 When the channel is used in fader start mode pushing the fader all the way to the bottom of its travel turns the module off and sends ap propriate logic commands to source equipment Moving the fader up turns the channel on and sends logic commands In fader start mode the On and Off keys act more as indicators of channel status the On key will not turn the channel on if the fader is at the bottom of its travel 2 In fader normal mode on off status and start stop commands follow the channel ON OFF buttons independent of fader position For information on how to switch between fader start and fader normal modes see the Monitor Module Controls sectio
156. eference of Element GPIO functions 2011 Axia Audio 6 Show Profiles e 101 6 Show Profiles e 102 Group Start Screen 1 2 3 o 4 o 5 7 9 8 o 3 10 e Save Back to Show Profile Figure 6 11 The Group Start assignment map There may be times when you d like to have a single keypress activate multiple faders for convenience sake interview shows with multiple guests election coverage comprising multiple incoming remote lines in studio performances Element s Group Start function lets you designate one or more faders as a Master Fader and one or more as a Slave Fader When a Master fader is turned On or Off the Slaves turn On and Off as well Master of your domain In the case that you have designated more than one fader as a Mas ter turning any of the Master faders On or Off will also operate any other Master faders as well as any Slave faders Figure 6 4 illustrates how a Group Start map might look The grid allows you to designate each fader on your console as either Master Slave or Independent normal operation Note that making a change in this screen also chang es the value of the Group Start setting in the fader s Channel Options screen described previously in this chapter and vice versa Phone Screen The Phone screen is used when you re setting up a Telos TWOx12 Series 2101 or Nx12 talkshow system for use with Element The options in the screen are de ta
157. element v c o Installation amp User s Guide Includes StudioEngine and PowerStation A TELOS COMPANY Manual Rev v1 7 January 2012 USA Class A Computing Device Information To User Warning This equipment generates uses and can radiate ra dio frequency energy If it is not installed and used as directed by this manual it may cause interference to radio communication This equipment complies with the limits for a Class A computing device as specified by FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart J which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when this type of equipment is op erated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference If it does the user will be required to eliminate the interference at the user s expense NOTE Objectionable interference to TV or radio re ception can occur if other devices are connected to this device without the use of shielded interconnect cables FCC rules require the use of only shielded cables Canada Warning This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Depart ment of Communications Le present appareil nu merique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depas sant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de les Class A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelec
158. en source has been assigned to channel Source Supply Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source or to Pin 9 OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT N C 5 4 3 2 1 s 17 l6 Ts Ta l3 To Ti EE EE EE E E E 0000 0o 15 14 113 112 11 10 19 N N N N N N 5 V 5 4 3 2 1 COM POWER SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio Configuring GPIO e 53 4 Configuring GPIO e 54 4 GPIO Recording Device Logic oe ills ame START Pulse 4 Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 mS PULSE sent when mon Return Record Mode is engaged STOP Pulse 5 Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 mS PULSE sent when mon Return Record Mode is disengaged lve Notes S Open Collector to Logic Com Active whenever Record Mode mon Return is engaged Open Collector to Logic Com Active whenever Record Mode mon Return is NOT engaged Open Collector to Logic Com n a mon Return Source Common Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon Logic 5 Volt supply Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 Fused if source is not providing voltage active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 Source Supply NOT CONNECTED OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE
159. ent is asking for trouble For normal operation you will assign Hybrid 1 to the left fader channel of the Call Controller and Hybrid 2 to the right fader channel Additional hybrids if you have them may be assigned to any channel on a 4 Fader Phone Module Note Within Element each incoming phone type audio source has an associated backfeed for automatic mix minus generation There are several user configuration options that affect which audio sources are fed to the hybrid under various conditions please refer to the Source Profile Options and Feed To Source Mode op tions documented elsewhere in the manual Activate configuration When you are done entering configuration save your Show and Source profiles and load one of your newly edited Show Profiles to your Element console You can use the Element Control Center Phone Channels page to confirm your VX connection as shown in Figure D 5 J Bement Control Center C f 192 168 0 140 mod_phor giement Element Control Center Phone channel configuration ID Module Server Address legen Password 1 J4 Active phone connections 1D Host Type State i v Connected 392 48 0 9 Figure D 5 Confirming VX Connection Telos Nx12 Nx6 TWOx12 and Series 2101 Multi Studio Talkshow System This section will help you configure your Axia Ele ment console for use with Telos IP based telephone sys tems You should use the procedures documented h
160. ep to setting a networked au dio system is to identify the network audio sources The PowerStation s home page is shown in Figure 2 17 Setup and Connections e 23 Element with PowerStation 2 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections 24 In a Livewire network individual devices audio nodes studio controllers etc are identified by unique IP addresses But what about the audio streams these de vices generate Think about how many audio sources and destinations there are in even a small studio there are a lot to keep track of In the analog days we d affix a numbered label to each cable that entered the terminal room to identify each audio circuit Obviously we can t attach pieces of paper to digital packet streams but we can still give each one a unique label We refer to these labels as Network Channel Num bers Each Livewire system can support up to 32 766 channels of audio which enables us to give each audio source its own unique numeric Livewire channel num ber Note 32 000 channel numbers exceeds the average human s RAM storage capacity We rec ommend using a spreadsheet program just to make sure you don t generate painful read memory register errors As soon as you power up your PowerStation it may begin to generate audio using factory default channel numbers These numbers are acceptable for a stand alone single studio however if you have more than one studi
161. er module has three SoftKnobs These knobs are context sensitive When any of Element s set up modes are activated using the options keys on the fad ers or Master Module you ll see a corresponding row of knobs represented onscreen as shown in Figure 2 12 Figure 2 12 On screen SoftKnobs Note that there are sometimes functions shown both above and below the on screen SoftKnobs When a func tion is presented above the knob turning that knob ac complishes that function When a function is presented below the knob pushing in gently on the corresponding SoftKnob activates that function The example shown in Figure 2 14 is from the IP Address Book screen rotate to select push to take If your Element is equipped with the standard Moni tor Module you can also navigate using the control knob directional keys and Enter key located at the lower right hand corner of the module as shown in Figure 2 10 Additionally whenever numeric input is required like entering IP addresses you can use the numeric keypad located just above the Navigation Keys Figure 2 13 to enter numbers directly Figure 2 13 Master Module numeric keypad IP Address Configuration Using your IP Assignment Worksheet you ll now choose an IP address for your PowerStation Note that since the PowerStation MAIN is a multi function unit it will actually utilize three IP addresses The first ad dress is assigned to the Element cons
162. ere only if e You have upgraded to Element v2 5 x software or Powerstation v1 1 3a or higher and e You are using Telos TWOx12 Nx12 Nx6 or Series 2101 talkshow systems To obtain the latest software please visit AxiaAudio com downloads and follow the update in structions contained in the accompanying Release Notes prior to proceeding with this configuration document if you have not already done so Note for users of previous versions Start ing with Element 2 5 series and Powersta tion 1 1 3 a new and improved configura tion method for connecting Element consoles to Telos phone systems which communicate via the legacy Telos AP protocol This new method coincides with the introduction of the Telos VX VoIP talkshow system as the code additions required to support the new VX con trol protocol allowed us to improve software and provide more flexibility for clients with earlier Telos equipment as well specifically for IP connected TWOx12 Series 2101 Nx12 and Nx6 systems This new method lets you select control of a specific Telos phone unit in every Element Show profile should you desire For example you 2011 Axia Audio can configure a show profile named WXYZ and specify that it connect with an Nx12 that controls the call in lines wired directly to that unit Another show profile WABC has settings to control an Nx6 handling POTS request lines wired to it Using this new capability yo
163. ers assigned to Audio Node streams When enabled you can use this source anywhere in your network In most cases the VMIX Subs are the only chan nels you will need to enable Select the type of Livewire mode needed for the application Live or Standard Ste reo Provide an appropriate unique channel number to generate and send a Multicast signal to the network Only enable Submixes you intend to actively use active submixes without any activity simply clutter up your net work with empty streams and waste your StudioEngine s processing resources At the bottom of each of the eight submix sections is an Apply button Any changes you make will be saved when this button is pressed Be sure to save the changes for each submixer as they are configured Other controls for each of the Submixer s five input channels include e Src Name Enter a user friendly name for the stream you want to assign to this input e Channel Enter the unique channel number of your audio source e In Stream Type In most cases this drop down will be set to From Source If a source s Backfeed unique feed or mix minus audio is desired as in in put into the mixer select To Source If this instruc tion is not clear please review material in Chapter 3 on backfeeds and mix minus earlier in this manual to Sec Hane Channel In Stream Shetus Enable Gen dB Cut Name Channel Cut Stream Status a 32766 Type Aue 200 1m a 32767 Type Awto VMIXMen
164. es to your Livewire network and they can be manipulated in the same manner as any other Livewire audio source A VMIX source may be applied to an El ement fader assigned to a node destination or simply monitored by PathfinderPC The fundamental concepts of Livewire sources des tinations inputs and outputs can be confusing to new us ers especially as they apply to VMIX Here is a review e Livewire sources are audio streams that are being de livered into your Livewire network e Livewire destinations can be physical outputs that are connected to external device inputs or virtual in puts to which Livewire audio streams are delivered e VMIX Inputs are actually Livewire destinations since they are virtual inputs to which Livewire streams are being delivered e VMIX outputs are Livewire Sources since they repre sent new Livewire streams that are being introduced into our Livewire network If you are having trouble with this concept it may be helpful to think of the VMIXer as a standalone piece of hardware If you visualize wiring an external line mixer to your network the Livewire destinations would be con nected to the mixer inputs and your mixer outputs would be connected to node inputs Your VMIX is wired in a very similar manner Constructing Virtual Mixes with VMIX The VMIX main mix output provides a mix of all active inputs up to the maximum of 40 Each submixer input includes an on off setting a gain se
165. ess settings you must save the chang es and reboot the console Use the REBOOT soft key to begin an immediate reboot se quence Remember you can even reboot Element while on the air since the audio mixing is not done in the console but in the Studio Engine your audio will continue to play without interruption What about monitors and meters you may ask The detailed configuration of timers clock monitors and metering is not included in this basic setup Please refer to Chapter 5 Element Operation where these topics are discussed in depth The next section will walk you through setting up your StudioEngine StudioEngine Quick Setup Connections Note We recommend leaving 1RU of breath ing space for ventilation above and below the StudioEngine when you rack mount the unit Using the supplied AC power cord connect the StudioEngine to the mains Route a length of CAT 6 ca ble from StudioEngine to a Gigabit port on your studio s Ethernet switch but don t connect it quite yet IP Configuration 1 Power on your StudioEngine the front panel display will indicate the boot up sequence When the screen displays IP address and network connection infor mation push the control knob to call the Main Menu 2 Turn the control knob to highlight Option 4 IF Settings Figure 1 14 and push to select Figure 1 14 StudioEngine IP configuration screen 3 Push the control knob and you ll see that the first
166. evaluated by Smith Electronics 2 3 Test Results The unit was found to be in conformance for both radiated and line conducted emissions 3 0 Immunity 3 1 Standards Applied 3 1 1 ESD Susceptibility Measurement Document IEC 1000 4 2 IEC 801 2 Immunity to static electricity 3 1 2 Radiated Susceptibility HF Electric Field Document IEC 1000 4 3 IEC 801 3 3 1 3 Conducted Susceptibility Power Line Measurement Documents Burst Transients IEC 1000 4 4 IEC 801 4 Surge IEC 1000 4 5 IEC 801 5 Voltage Fluctuations IEC 1000 4 1 IEC 801 1 3 2 Testing 3 2 1 ESD Immunity The unit was tested and evaluated by Smith Electronics 3 2 2 Radiated Immunity RF Electric Field The unit was tested and evaluated by Smith Electronics 3 2 3 Conducted Immunity Power Line Testing to IEC 801 4 was conducted by Smith Electronics Smith Electronics 8200 Snowville Rd Cleveland OH 44141 USA CE CE Conformance This device complies with the requirements of EEC Council Directives 93 68 EEC CE Marking 73 23 EEC safety low voltage directive 89 336 EEC electromagnetic compatibility Conformity is declared to the following standards EN50081 1 EN50082 1 2011 Axia Audio Appendix C FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance This appendix contains answers to some frequently asked Element setup questions and some troubleshoot ing procedures intended to determine if factory service is needed These procedures are not intended to take the pla
167. f a pre set Show Profile however on the fly control is provided for talent with permissions to make adjustments when needed What is this stuff Radio engineers don t need a lesson in dynamics processing but for the ben efit of any jocks reading this here s a quick ex planation of what these controls can do A Gate is a dynamics device whose function is to remove unwanted audio material below a certain threshold A gain circuit is employed to raise or lower the volume of the audio signal when the signal falls below a certain set thresh old the audio level drops down to a predeter mined level The reason they are called gates is because when they close it sounds as if the audio has suddenly stopped or has been gated You might use this on a mic channel to eliminate background noise during times when 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations 73 5 Element Operations e 74 you re not speaking Threshold settings determine at what level the processor will begin working For example on a compressor when signal level exceeds the threshold setting it will be compressed below the threshold the signal will remain uncom pressed On a gate threshold determines the minimum input level required to cause the gate to open up and pass signal when input level drops below the threshold the gate will be closed pre venting signal from passing Carefully setting the threshold allows you to very specifically con
168. f the Freeze again dis plays the running elapsed time counter Look at me During the last 60 seconds of the countdown the inner ring of Element s onscreen analog clock will turn red and dimin ish as time passes providing the operator with a visual cue to how much time is left until zero The Count Up Timer is an event timer with three modes which can be set to start stop reset either au tomatically or manually Using Source Profiles you can determine whether individual sources will start or stop this timer automatically the onscreen con trols described below allow the operator to override or modify those settings Rotate the Timer Mode SoftKnob to choose how the event timer will operate Choose Manual to start stop and reset the timer by hand using the controls displayed when the Timer Options key is pressed Choose Auto Reset and the timer will au tomatically reset to zero and begin counting whenever a fader whose source starts the timer is turned On 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations 85 5 Element Operations 86 Choose Auto Add to have the timer count up when a designated source s fader is turned On and stop counting when that source is turned Off In this mode the timer will not reset to zero when it is started Pressing the Timer Options key again exits this menu Note Pressing and holding the Timer Options Key opens the Clock amp Timer Options Menu discussed in C
169. facility instantly such as a net work feed off the air monitor or another studio s Program output by assigning it to one of the two External selector keys like preset buttons on a car radio Programming the External Monitor Selec tor keys If you press and hold either of these keys for five seconds a list of available audio streams will pop up onscreen You can then scroll through this list and select the source you want to hear in the monitors when that key is pressed Each External key is independently programmable 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations 77 5 Element Operations 78 You can also pre program the source assigned to these keys when you construct or capture Show Profiles using the options available on the Monitor page of the Show Profile setup menu Headphone Knob Source Keys This knob at the bottom right of the Monitor section controls the selection and volume of the source heard in the board operator s headphones Rotate to vary the gain of the Headphone feed Use the Direct Selection Keys Standard Monitor Module only in the column directly above the Headphones knob to send the output of Pro gram 1 Program 4 Aux Send A Aux Send D or the two External monitor sources to the headphones These keys light to denote the se lected source Press and hold either of the External selector keys Standard Monitor Module only to display and select from a list of availabl
170. fader e PGM 1 2 amp 3 Keys a D 2 Each channel is assigned to any of the three main output buses by selecting any or all of these program keys Generally PGM 1 is the main air bus and other buses are used for production or other pro gramming requirements All program outputs are s post fader and post on off function Figure 5 1 Line Module Fader Channel by holding the Options key and pressing the OFF key Each time the OFF key is pressed the fader will take the next source from that fader s list of available sources e PGM 4 Record Phone Bus Key D The fourth bus functions as a regular output bus but any sources feeding PGM 4 are also sent to a special Record bus that feeds a dedicated recording device as well as to the Phone bus that sends mix minus audio to any phone callers These buses operate independently but simultane ously allowing jocks plenty of operational flex ibility PGM 4 bus audio output is post fader post on off PGM 4 Record bus audio output is post fader pre on off and Phone bus audio is sent to callers pre fader pre on off e Talkback Key Each fader is equipped with a Talkback key located between the bottom of the fader and the channel ON OFF keys If the source assigned to a fader is has an associated backfeed pressing this key will allow the board operator to com municate with the person at the other end of the backfeed the fader s Status
171. fader tells operators when a particular source has a mix minus output and even tells them which audio mix is being backfed Element will support as many outputs as there are installed faders each with its own automated mix minus feed Got 24 faders You can have 24 mix minuses GPIO Chapter 4 explained how sources can have associat ed GPIO General Purpose Input Output control associ ated with them Element GPIO interfaces are connected to Element via the Livewire network so you can locate the actual machine connections either physically close to source equipment or in a central equipment room During installation the engineer configures sources to accept and provide logic commands by selecting vari ous options Example studio microphones may be set up to automatically mute the studio monitor speakers and illuminate an on air warning light when turned on The same sources can be configured to accept GPIO logic inputs from buttons so each studio guest can have their own On Off Talk and Mute keys Line sources can be configured to receive start and stop commands from the Element as well Start stop messages can also be passed via Ethernet to a com puter based playout system Monitor Module and SoftKnobs The Monitor Module and SoftKnobs contain Ele ment s operating controls This is where you ll find vol ume and selection controls for monitors and headphones as well as keys that provide fast access to show prof
172. fer between studios In other words a mic in Stu dio A that has EQ and dynamics applied through a Source Profile on the Studio A Element will not have those settings automatically applied if that mic is loaded on the Element in Studio B We are however planning on this capability in future versions Source Profile Setup Now that you understand what Source Profiles do let s set one up You ll use the Element and StudioEngine HTTP interfaces to do this so connect a computer with an Internet browser to your Livewire switch 2011 Axia Audio 3 Configuring Inputs 29 Note You can t construct Source Profiles unless you ve already configured the inputs Sources of your studio s Audio Nodes Be sure you ve as signed Livewire channel numbers and enabled banen oo takes ak ae a taae mae a all sources in your Nodes Engine and PC driv DAT ene ers This will make your sources visible on the ae een selection list in the source profile setup screen irae Make sure you ve done this before proceeding at further through this chapter Dewane _ E See Your computer must be assigned a valid network IP ay address in order to see Livewire web pages Livewire sane lt networks do not usually contain DHCP servers so you Rita a must manually assign your computer an available fixed crite Er IP address within the range you previously determined aE a for your network Different
173. for Telos Nx12 TWOx12 or Series 2101 Broadcast Talk show Systems 9 Timer Controls help keep track of on screen elapsed and remaining time displays 10 Monitor 1 Section contains volume and selec tion controls for monitors headphones Aux Send buses and Preview 11 Monitor 2 Talkback amp Volume Controls let op erators easily talk to hosts and guests in a second studio and control their monitor volume 12 Headphone and Preview Volume Controls let operators adjust Host headphone volume and con trol Preview cue volume and options 2011 Axia Audio Element Stereo Main Screen Overview Program Meters for each of Element s four stereo Program buses feature true VU meter bal listics with an expanded scale Solid bar graphs indicate average level the red line at 20dBFS cor responds to the 0dB mark on a traditional analog meter Other international standards are available Peak Indicator indicates absolute peaks to show talent where the loudest portions of program ma terial are landing on the VU scale This indicator may be switched off if desired Peak Indicator Warning illuminates when peaks reach or exceed OdBFS Day Date and Digital Clock keep operators in formed of what day it is in case they forget which is entirely normal Clock can be set for 12 or 24 hour operation and can be slaved to a networked NTP server if desired Analog Clock presents a traditional clock face with second hand for f
174. for incoming callers The Transfer key activates the Transfer function within the Nx12 or TWOx12 Please refer to your Telos phone system documentation for more information on this feature Telos Two ISDN Hybrid The Telos Two has an Ethernet connection for con trol so it can be tightly integrated with the telephone control modules in the Element It uses the 4 Phone Fader Module which includes a Hold and Set button in addition to the usual complement All control is via the Ethernet so no GPIO connection is necessary The Telos Two can be configured for ISDN system hold or local hold The first case is used when you want to be able to retrieve the call from another device sharing the ISDN line Installation and Configuration The Telos Two needs to have software version 2 0 51p or later installed The latest software is available on the Telos web site support page 1 Connect your Telos Two to the Ethernet and assign it an IP number that is acceptable for use within your network 2 Connect your ISDN telephone line to the Telos Two and confirm that it is working by checking the LCD status display W Connect both Telos Two audio inputs and both out puts to an Axia Analog node The hybrid inputs and outputs must be connected via analog since there is no way to separate the two hybrid back feeds using the AES interface Wiring to the left side of the two node inputs will accomplish our goal Remember to set the Signal Mo
175. ft at 48 unless changes are requested by tech support Default settings are 802 1p tagging enabled VLAN ID 0 802 1Q priority 6 DSCP Class of Service 48 e Standard Audio Streams Standard streams have higher latency that live streams and require different settings As with live streams all de faults should be accepted unless changes are re quested by Axia tech support Default settings are Receive buffer 100 msec 802 1p tagging disabled VLAN ID 0 802 1Q priority 5 DSCP Class of Service 46 Ethernet Switch settings The PowerStation MAIN contains an integrated Eth ernet switch This switch manages the multicast func tions of the PowerStation and enables it to be connected to other PowerStations and other Livewire devices via your managed Livewire LAN Options This screen has Spanning Tree and port settings e Port Configuration Allows you to select from one of three different modes for the two gigabit ports on the switch Options are Access normally used for connections to other Livewire devices Trunk used for the connections to a core Ethernet switch or other PowerStations Access STP port fast may optionally be used when you connect up to four PowerSta tions in a ring configuration By selecting this mode the normal STP logic is reversed The port is allowed to start sending packets imme diately and loop discovery is done in parallel T
176. ful The Address field displays the number Axia has assigned to each fader type followed by the set ting of its module rotary ID selector switch This is useful in determining if any modules ID selectors are set to duplicate values see Appendix C for in formation on correctly setting module ID selectors The Type field gives you the actual name of each module i e 4 Fader Master US Phone etc The Status field tells you whether or not the 2011 Axia Audio module is working i e communicating with the Ele ment CPU e The Firmware Version field displays the fader firmware version that s loaded on each module At the bottom of the page you ll see a lot of informa tion pertaining to the health of the Element s CANBus communication network This is for diagnostic purposes only e Firmware Update From time to time new mod ule firmware may become available from Axia You may confirm the current Module Firmware versions installed in your Element and install new firmware by choosing this menu item To update Module Firmware use the Browse and Upload Image buttons to install the module firmware package obtained from Axia Support Once a new software image has been uploaded the Firmware Update screen will change to notify you which modules have new firmware available Each module must be updated individually To up date a module simply click on its Update link Note that updating a module t
177. ge editor This file must measure a maximum of 129 x 97 pixels to fill the allocated display area Use the Browse and Upload User Logo buttons to install your logo file Upon reboot this logo will appear on the Operator s display To delete a displayed logo click the Delete User Logo button and reboot Clock Settings You may specify time to be dis played in a 12 hour or 24 hour format The Element can optionally display a large digital clock and a small analog clock as opposed to the default which is a large analog and small digital Here is where you specify your preference Reboot after changing Fader Offset Some users may want to change their element s Element Control Center tog Log Wstory Log Sevag Scr eeretice Mesdhe View eaeyer Wewaules User Logo User logo should be a 129 x 97 prg fle Damant reboot is required CAN bus rroo Brana ovvol Prine Chaney lur Modules FIO Conte raton Seript Manager oad mew user oao Browse Upload user lago Delete user logo eformation Clock Settings Vee reed to reboot ierant to apply roms dock getting Cock mee 12h s Clock type Big Analog m Gee Fader Options Fader ottset 90 0 88 Screenshot compression Compression type ibeg Congeetuer quality Cond Fa 7 e Element Configuration Fig 8 5 Element Customize Screen nominal fader position This is a global setting that permits you to do this For example a
178. gure 2 6 Accessing Element s connection panel Element must be connected to a grounded metal permanent wiring system or other equipment grounding conductor using the threaded grounding stud located in side the connections bay Open the bay by flipping open the overbridge above the faders as shown in Figure 2 7 For ground sources we recommend in order of prefer ence Station Ground the heavy copper strap found in the walls and floors of many radio studios AC Safety Ground the 3rd prong of a nearby outlet A bonded electrical conduit 12 AWG GREEN stranded wire is the minimum wire gauge acceptable for grounding Element 2011 Axia Audio 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections e 17 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections 18 Figure 2 7 Locating the grounding stud One end of the Element power communication cable is fitted with a strain relief Connect this end to the Molex connector on the back of the PowerStation MAIN Connect the other end to the Molex socket on the Element connection panel Figure 2 9 Element connection panel Circled connector is for power data cable RJ 45 s connect to fader and accessory modules A DVI D compatible monitor must be connected to the DVI D connector on the back of the PowerStation This monitor displays metering a clock and lots of other user interface information IMPORTANT Element s power cable is also host
179. h Frequency Shelf or the middle frequency of the Bandpass filter depending upon which mode was chosen for EQ High Mode or Retain Source Setting EQ MID FREQUENCY EQ LOW FREQUENCY Choose the middle frequency of the Low and Middle EQ bands or Retain Source Setting 2011 Axia Audio 6 Show Profiles e 93 6 Show Profiles e 94 EQ HIGH GAIN EQ MID GAIN EQ LOW GAIN dial in boost or cut for the three EQ bands or Retain Source Setting Note For details on Element EQ operations please refer to Chapter 3 Working With Sources ASSIGN TO PGM1 2 3 4 and AUX A B C D Checking ON for any of these buses assigns the fader to that bus when the Show Profile is loaded You can also choose OFF or Retain Source Settings AUX A AUX B AUX C AUX D PRE POST FADER Allows you to send this fader s source to the specified Aux Send bus either Pre Fader or Post Fader or Retain Source Settings AUX SEND A B C D GAIN Turn this channel s feed to the specified Aux Send bus Off specify up to 10 dB of boost or 25 dB of cut or Retain Source Settings NOISE GATE STATUS Turns the Noise Gate in the Omnia Dynamics Processing on and off Specify Active or Bypass or choose Retain Source Set ting Only applies to Mic sources COMPRESSOR STATUS Turns the compressor in the Omnia Dynamics Processing on and off Specify Active or Bypass or choose Retain Source Set ting Only applies to Mic sources DE ESSER STATUS Turns t
180. h nothing assigned to Monitor 1 e CR MONITOR MASTER GAIN Allows you to Use as much as 85 dB of gain reduction on the audio signal sent to the Monitor Speakers You can also turn gain control Off or Retain Existing Setting e SIGNAL MODE CR MONITOR lets you set the au 2011 Axia Audio dio feed to the Monitor 1 speakers to Stereo Left Right Sum or Retain Existing Setting CR MONITOR DIM GAIN Specify the amount of volume by which the Monitor 1 speakers will dim when Talk To or Preview is in use Use as much as 30 dB of cut turn the option Off or Retain Ex isting Setting GPIO CHANNEL FOR CR MONITOR In this box you assign Monitor a channel number effectively making it a source to which logic commands to activate Mute Dim tally lights can be associated You ll enter this channel number in the GPIO Set up web page to assign a GPIO port for these logic functions See Chapter 4 GPIO Configuration for more information This option should typically be programmed with the same logic channel number for all show profiles on a single Element since this function is primarily used for on air warning light control Most find it convenient to use the same channel number as the CR Monitor audio channel Control Room Monitor 1 Headphone Options MONITOR ASSIGNMENT Choose to load PGM1 PGM2 PGM3 PGM4 AUX A AUX B AUX C AUX D EXT1 EXT2 or No Source if you wish the Pro file to be
181. hapter 1 e Reset Key Pressing this key resets Element s Count Up Timer to zero e Freeze Key Pressing Freeze holds the on screen Timer display so you may take note of it the timer continues to count while the display is frozen and a second press of the Freeze again displays the running elapsed time counter Start Stop Key If the Count Up Timer is not running pressing this starts the count If the timer is running pressing this key stops the countdown and retains the last displayed timer interval Record Mode Section Record Mode is a special one touch mode which can be set to automatically start a designated recorder so talent can record a phone call or remote interview with a single button press Record Mode can be enabled or disabled for each Show Profile see Chapter 6 Show Profiles for details e Engage Key Press this key to put Element into Record Mode Pressing this button activates a pre determined record ing device via GPIO assigned to the record device in the Show Profile In addition to triggering a recorder Record Mode also changes your headphones and moni tors to PGM 4 Record which is indicated by flashing the PGM 4 indicator Pressing the Record Mode key a second time deac tivates Record Mode and stops the recorder via GPIO Help 2 Key and Magic Key Sequences The Help key Standard Monitor Module a spe cial key that displays system information about
182. he CR monitors when On CR Producer is used for in studio Producer s mic positions It has associated GPIO logic which can operate Talk to functions from a re means that the channel will go to the ON state when the fader is moved up When in Arm state the channel OFF lamp will be illuminated The channel ON lamp will flashing in wink mode a long on time and short off time For all fader modes pressing the OFF button at any time will place the channel in the OFF state mote producer s panel It also mutes CR monitors when On CR Guest is used for any other guest mic in the control room Its associated logic port mutes the CR monitors when On It can have an individual headphone feed Studio Guest is used for any mic located in a separate studio Its logic mutes the Studio moni tors when On It can have an individual head phone feed Line is used for any line input audio source ana log or digital A GPIO logic port can be used to provide machine start stop pulses if desired Phone defines this source as a hybrid or broad cast phone system input A summed mono mix minus is automatically provided Codec marks this source as a codec A dual mono mix minus is provided one PA feed right one talent feed with talkback left Computer Player defines this source as origi nating from a PC Associated GPIO logic can be used to send start stop signals to a playout sy
183. he H P Process screen shown in Figure 5 16 In this screen the operator is presented with a graphi cal representation of the EQ curve applied to the headphone channel Talent can then apply three band parametric equalization to his or her head phone channel and select headphone dynamics processing The screen indicates the amount of cut boost applied and the center frequency of each band Lo Gain Bypass Active Rotating this Soft Knob adjusts the amount of gain or cut applied to the low EQ band Pressing this knob toggles EQ between Active and Bypass Note that the EQ mode for this band automatically changes to Peak mode when boost is applied and Shelf mode when cut is applied Rotating the Lo Freq knob adjusts the center frequency of the low EQ band 20 320 Hz Rotating the Mid Gain and Mid Freq Soft Knobs adjust gain and center frequencies of the midrange EQ band 125 Hz 2 kHz The Hi Gain knob adjusts the boost cut of the high frequency band 1 25 kHz 20 kHz Hi Freq Shelf Peak Rotating this Soft Knob adjusts the center frequency of the high EQ band 1 kHz 16 kHz Pushing this knob toggles the high band EQ method between Peak and Shelf modes Press the Monitor Options key to return to the previous menu Figure 5 16 H P Process settings Note High Mid and Low band adjustments provide up to 25 dB of cut and 15 dB of boost Element EQ features SmartQ automatic band width system that varies
184. he Off button turns the Hybrid OFF Note Dialing or generation of DTMF from the Element keypad is not supported for the Telos ONE Telos ONE Six Direct Interface and 142 Systems To use these legacy hybrids audio must be connected via Analog nodes There is a special two position control panel that can drop into Element to control ONE x Six Direct Interface Module or 1A2 phone systems This panel communicates directly to the phone systems us ing a dedicated cable rather than via Ethernet Line Take and Drop functions cannot be controlled using GPIO on these systems so the control surfaces supplied with the phone systems must be used to actuate these commands Installation amp Configuration 1 Install the control module and connect it to the phone equipment 2 Connect audio input output and Program On Hold to an Analog node Use the left channel inputs and outputs for these mono signals 3 Using the Analog node s Source configuration web page enter a text name and channel number for each input It might be convenient to include the telephone number as part of the text name Configure for Fast Stream audio mode 4 Using the audio node s Destination configuration web page select the same channel number for each output as was used for the corresponding input Se 2011 Axia Audio lect To source for the Type and configure for Fast Stream audio mode Nn Open the Element Sources amp P
185. he PowerStation AUX is OK and that its fuse is also OK e Remote Access Password The HTTP pass word may be changed here as well however we recommend you use the main system page for that function e Configuration Management This section lets you make backups of and restore your Engine settings Use the Browse Backup and Re store buttons to accomplish these actions Use the Reset Cfg button to reset all of your settings to an as shipped state This command will completely erase any choices you have made and reset your PowerStation s Engine to the way it came from the factory so use with caution e Restart The PowerStation may be rebooted re motely from this screen if necessary e Hardware and Firmware The type of CPU in use is displayed in the Hardware box New firmware updates are processed in this screen Remember that since the PowerStation has inte grated the Element with the MixEngine there is a single combined firmware update Use the File field and the Browse and Upload buttons to upload new software to the Engine Pressing the Commit button takes the software in Bank 1 and loads it into Bank 0 which opens Bank 1 for new software You can run PowerStation software from either Bank 0 or Bank 1 Simply click on the radio but ton next to the software bank you wish to run from and click Apply Selected Bank The system will reboot after changing banks so plan this operation for off hours or switch progr
186. he Program And Monitor Outputs menu option to configure the output buses of the Element 2 Yov ll be prompted to enter a user name and pass 2011 Axia Audio word The default user name is user Leave the password field blank 3 You ll see the screen shown in Figure 1 15 This screen allows you to set channel numbers for all of the audio outputs generated by Element program and record busses monitor feeds and talkback destinations Work down the list assign each one a unique channel number and record them in your channel number log 4 Find the column entitled Mode Each Studio Engine is shipped with the most common streams enabled with Live Stereo mode Make sure all of your de sired streams are enabled 5 Choose Apply A word about stream types There are sev eral different types of streams available in the Mode drop down box Live Stereo and Stan dard Stereo Live Stereo was previously referred to as Livestreams Use Live Stereo streams when ever you need the lowest latency for on air feeds mic to headphone paths etc Standard Stereo is intended to provide the best compatibility with older PC systems but the trade off is that these streams have a higher amount of latency Set Your Console Type Note Manual setting of console type is only necessary on Element consoles running soft ware versions prior to v2 0 In Elements running v2 0 or higher this setting will auto detect Axia StudioEngines
187. he backup power provided by a PowerStation AUX solid GREEN indicates normal health If the AUX power LED is ORANGE the fault is with the PowerSta tion MAIN If a PowerStation MAIN is being used with out an AUX unit a configuration checkbox located in the MixEngine Options web page will disable the check for IVEWIRE MASTER SYC K Figure 2 2 PowerStation Front Panel Indicators the redundant power supply and return a GREEN status for a single power supply LINK PowerStation AUX only When illuminated continuously this LED indicates that the PowerStation s Ethernet section is functioning and that the PowerStation s network devices are linked LIVEWIRE This indicates that Livewire network traffic present and multicast streams are properly advertised MASTER Solid GREEN indicates the PowerStation a synchro nized as a Master clock to the Livewire network All oth er devices should then be reporting Sync or Slave There should be only one Master clock device in a Livewire network at any given time SYNC Solid GREEN indicates the PowerStation a synchro nized as a slave to the Livewire network and the clock is locked Flashing GREEN indicates sync packets are being received but not locked yet For the sake of illus tration both Master and Sync are illuminated in Figure 2 2 This condition should never exist in the real world since a Livewire device is either a master or a sync slave never both OK Powe
188. he console Use the REBOOT soft key to begin an immediate reboot sequence Remember you can even reboot Element while on the air since the audio mixing is not done in the console but in the Studio Engine your audio will continue to play without interruption Setting IP using the 2 Fader Monitor Module When Element has completed its start cycle meter screen appears find the numeric keypad at the top right of the Monitor Module Press and hold the star 7 amp 4 keys simultaneously for five seconds to enter the IP Address Book Figure 1 12 To set the IP address rotate the left most SoftKnob to highlight the line titled Element IP Address and push the knob to select that line Now use the numeric pad to enter the IP address Press the left most SoftKnob again to take the new IP value Repeat this process to set the subnet mask value Continue down the screen and in the same way en ter the other fields values as appropriate Rotate the Select Set SoftKnob to scroll through the list of available options To select an option to modify push this knob While modifying an options rotate the knob to change an option s value and push the knob to move to the next field Available options include Element IP Address Every piece of Livewire gear must have its own unique IP Address Set the IP Address for each Element in this field Subnet Mask Enter your network s subnet mask va
189. he de essing function in the Omnia Dynamics Processing on and off Specify Active or Bypass or choose Retain Source Set ting Only applies to Mic sources NOISE GATE THRESHOLD Determines the point at which the Noise Gate will operate if set to Ac tive Adjustment range is between OdB and 50dB or Retain Source Settings NOISE GATE DEPTH Sets the amount of noise reduction that will be applied to the mic audio if the noise gate is set to Active and the Noise Gate Threshold is reached Adjustment range is between OdB and 30 dB or Retain Source Settings COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD Determines the point at which the Compressor will operate if set to Active Adjustment range is between OdB and 30dB or Retain Source Settings COMPRESSOR RATIO Sets the amount of com pression that will be applied to the mic audio Ad justment range is between 1 1 and 16 1 or Retain Source Settings DE ESSER THRESHOLD Determines the point at which the Compressor will operate if set to Active Adjustment range is between OdB and 20dB or Re tain Source Settings DE ESSER RATIO Sets how aggressively the de esser will remove sibilance from the mic audio Ad justment range is between 1 1 and 8 1 or Retain Source Settings COMPRESSOR MODE Change the voice compres sor between Freeze and No Freeze modes or Re tain Source Settings POST PROCESSING TRIM GAIN Specify a value in the range of 20 dB that will be applied after
190. he presence of an NTP indicator on your dig ital click display 2011 Axia Audio If you wish to connect to a public or external NTP server you will need an Internet gateway Be sure to specify a valid gateway in your IP configuration Engine Menu If you are using your Element with a standalone StudioEngine this is an alternate location to enter the IP Address of the StudioEngine your Element is paired with typically this is entered using the IP Address Book screen Click Save if you ve made changes Sources amp Profiles Configuration Menu Choosing this menu item takes you to the Profiles submenus Show Profiles and Source Profiles Menus These menus allow you to construct and administer Show and Source Profiles specific to this Element con sole Refer to Chapter 3 Working With Sources and Chapter 6 Show Profiles for details on using these controls Legacy Configuration Menu This screen available on older Element software only enables you to restore any backups you may have of Element Configuration files made with software prior to Version 2 x Use the Browse and Restore buttons to perform the desired actions What s Next You ve learned about all of Element s advanced functions Now if you re ready and eager to learn more proceed to Chapters 9 and 10 for a look at StudioEngine and PowerStation advanced settings 2011 Axia Audio 8 Advanced Element Controls e 117 8 Advanced Eleme
191. hen you have finished testing a module you have the option of testing other modules or of exiting the test routine Tost Mode DUN R ae pam Dove oom ROW Setece Mogae te butter ard tether LES test ee toge uing Oem Beton on he moa te Let a een U me eR gt trt tet mode Figure C 14 Module lamp test Fader Cleaning Procedures Element s single element conductive plastic faders were chosen for their long life and reliable operation but jocks will be jocks it s inevitable that sooner or later you ll need to pull a fader for cleaning There are no replaceable parts in the faders used in Element If fader movement has become rough either the lubricant on the glide rails has evaporated or foreign material has gotten into the fader Dow Corning 510 is the preferred glide rail lubricant as it will not migrate to the contact fingers like other lubricating oils Element modules can be serviced hot If you disconnect a module the StudioEngine will retain the faders most recent settings until the hardware is recon nected 2011 Axia Audio Tools and supplies you will need to remove and ser cover it s held in place by round stamped bosses vice a fader A he hex wrench for fader removal A 2 5 mm hex wrench for module removal A jeweler s screwdriver s or smaller Cotton swabs Dow Corning 510 lubricating oil Fader Disassembly and Cleaning Figure C 16 Remov
192. here is a risk of short term flooding so this option should be used with extreme caution e STP Configuration You can enable or disable Spanning Tree Protocol and specify a bridge pri ority value 0 to 32768 PS SW 7b PowerStation Swich Options Morilla Firefox De Ek yer Hgor Bovimats Ios ele lt C A l oN a m GE D P A _ PSSW 2 T gt PowerStation Sekh Op gt Ogha Pert T Acess Trak Access STP port fet Ogha fon Access O Access STP port fist Lasor Rube STP fea Brip Pray TINH L s Fig 10 10 PowerStation MAIN Switch Options Enable STP Spanning Tree Protocol used only when you are connecting multiple Pow erStations maximum of 4 in a loop configu ration Bridge Priority can be used to assign root priority to devices that are connected in a loop A lower number indicates a higher priority Your network administrator should be con sulted if you think you need to make changes to the default setting System Parameters As described previously in this manual it is recom mended that all IP address information be entered in the PowerStation main Setup menu IP addresses are auto matically assigned to the IO Subsystems and Ethernet switch If you make a change in this section it may be over written the next time the PoewrStation is restarted e Host Name You should enter a short logical name here to describe the PowerStation switch We suggest you include some
193. his source this option determines what content is fed back from the board Auto Pgm 1 Phone feeds the Program 1 bus minus the source when this source s fader is ON and feeds the Phone bus minus the source when the fader is OFF The Phone bus is actually a special variant of PGM4 The Phone bus is pre fader and pre on off to allow speaker phone style operation thru the Operator s mic Phone feeds the Phone bus minus the source Phone is a mono sum pre fade and pre on off variation of PGM4 PGM1 feeds the Program 1 bus minus the source PGM2 feeds the Program 2 bus minus the source PGMB3 feeds the Program 3 bus minus the source PGM4 feeds the Program 4 bus minus the source AUX SEND A feeds the Aux Send A bus minus the source AUX SEND B feeds the Aux Send B bus minus the source AUX SEND C feeds the Aux Send C bus minus the source AUX SEND D feeds the Aux Send D bus minus the source About the PHONE RECORD and PROGRAM 4 buses Element s PGM 4 mix bus is a spe cial multi purpose bus that does several things at once to make life easier for the operator Sources assigned to PGM 4 are also sent to the RECORD bus a special post fader pre on off output that can be used to feed recording de vices At the same time sources assigned to PGM 4 are mixed and sent to the PHONE bus PHONE is an internal bus which does not feed a separate output instead it picks up PGM 4 audi
194. hones e Studio Monitor Contains whatever audio source your operator has selected to feed the Studio moni tors e Talent Headphones Contains whatever audio source has been selected to feed the Talent head phones e Talkback When any console Talk key is pressed CR Mic audio is routed pre fader to this channel The columns following each of these entries dis play the status of each channel and allow you to make changes 2011 Axia Audio PowerStation Controls e 129 10 PowerStation Controls e 130 10 The Channel column like other similar fields used throughout the Axia system is where you enter a unique channel number for each console output The Mode column lets you enable and disable each output and set the priority of each stream Fast Stereo are for live audio where lowest la tency is required like Program outputs and mic to headphone paths Standard Stereo is for low priority non real time audio Standard streams have higher latency but offer the best compatibility for systems such as PCs using the Axia IP Audio driver Disabled turns off outputs you don t intend to use e Integrated Omnia Processing This section also includes the configuration of the Omnia processing that is included in your PowerStation The ability to process Program 1 in all monitoring paths gives you a processed feed that is similar to the live off air feed that jocks are used to monitoring With the adve
195. ications Unicast vs Multicast IP Addresses Data is routed over IP networks in one of two ways point to point unicast or multicast Livewire devices use common TCP IP unicast IP addresses for control and web browser ac cess These are numbers you assign within the range used by your network Since most Livewire networks are not intended to be ac cessed via the Internet we recommend you use the non routable IP addresses in the range of 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 255 These IP ad dresses have been set aside specifically for use with local networks Multicast allows efficient one to many connec tions so Livewire uses that for its audio streams source advertising and synchronization signals You do not need to assign these multicast ad dresses because the system does this automati cally For more information on network construction please refer to our companion Introduction to Livewire System Design Reference and Primer available at www AxiaAudio com downloads To install Element in your studio furniture you ll need to prepare a cutout in the counter top A dimen sional drawing with all pertinent measurements is found just prior to this manual s Appendix A Make certain that there s adequate clearance inside the furniture for the required power cable entry into the console knockout plugs are located at both bottom rear corners of Element for cable routing access To configure Element you ll need a compute
196. icon will disappear and the line can then be dropped either by selecting another line or by pressing the Drop key Pressing the Drop key drops any non locked lines on the associated line column Pressing the Next key takes the line that the Nx12 or TWOx12 system has determined to be next in the on air queue for Hybrid 1 Normally that is the line that has been on hold the longest If there is no line on hold pressing Next answers the line that s been ringing in the longest Audio is normally routed to the fader channel adja cent to the Line key row Pressing the Hold key on the fader channel puts the call on Hold from where it can be retrieved from anywhere in the system The Set key on the fader channel is not used with the Nx12 or TWOx12 and pressing it has no effect Block All puts the phone system into Busy mode This is useful for clearing lines prior to contest call ins When you enter Busy mode inactive lines are bus ied so that callers will receive a busy signal when they attempt to call in Lines that are active i e on air and on Hold are not affected by the Block All key howev er if these lines are dropped while Nx12 or TWOx12 is in Busy mode these lines will be busied out as well Note that Busy mode has no effect at all on lines which are designated as Hot or Warm Lines To cancel Busy mode press the Block All key again all busied lines will again be available
197. id should be filled in as follows Leave the Phone Hybrid IP field empty e Leave the Phone line and Phone hybrid for NX12 fields at their default value of 0 e Use 2nd show split mode for NX12 should be left unchecked The Phone Module ID field lets you select from the multiple phone modules if you have more than one installed in your console Normally you will have just one so select 1 from the drop down box e For Hybrid Nr select the hybrid that corresponds to the Primary Source audio you selected above Typi cally this will be either a 1 or a 2 Note If using the second show of an Nx series the value of 1 is for Hybrid 3 the first hybrid of the Hybrid 3 amp 4 show and the value of 2 is for Hybrid 4 second hybrid of the show e Conferencing Allowed lets you permit button mash conferencing Unless you specially wish to prohibit this type of conferencing select Yes from the drop down box e Fixed Line lets you assign a line permanently to a specific fader channel emulating a dedicated hybrid Normally this is used with a 4 Fader Module The other fields in the Source Profile page are non phone specific and may be configured as you wish Re peat this procedure to create a source profile for each hybrid in your studio You ll now need to load the hybrid sources onto the fader channels This can be done either manually or au tomatically using Show Profiles Naturally we recom me
198. iguration 27 Production Module Controls 0 0 0 0 68 Advanced Settings ooo a 28 Standard Monitor Module Controls 69 2 Fader Monitor Module Controls 2 70 Chapter Three Working With Sources 29 Source Specific Channel Controls 0 4 87 Understanding Source Profiles 29 Studio Microphone Channel Operation 88 Source Profile Setup 0 4 29 Phone Channel Operation 88 Source Profile Options 0 eee 30 Codec Channel Operation 89 Adding Backfeeds and GPIO toa Source 37 2011 Axia Audio Introduction v vi Introduction e Chapter Six Show Profiles 91 Creating A Show Profile 0 91 Show Profile Options 92 The Channel Description Screen 93 The Aux Send Return Description Screen 96 Monitor Section Screen a onon aaaaan 96 Record Mode Screen 2 2 0 0 0 eee 101 Group Start Ser n e eea a s Rae Oe Pe ee 102 Phone Screens s s awa nare he ew hee Ra 102 Chapter Seven Virtual Mixer VMIX 103 Whatis VMIX es ecri Ba ee bare ea es 103 Constructing Virtual Mixes with VMIX 103 Manipulating Streams With VMODE 106 Chapter Eight Advanced Element Controls 111 Element Configuration Screens 111 The Element Control Center 111 The Setup M nu s sute sri EEEa a eee 112 The Customize Menu o oo nnna anna
199. iled fully in Appendix D Working With Phone Hy brids please refer to that chapter for details on setup If you do not have a Phone Module installed this screen will be empty Save and Exit e Save Changes button applies any changes made to the Auxiliary Send Description and returns you to the Show Profile Settings menu e Back to Show Profile link takes you back to Show Profile Settings without saving changes What s Next Chapter 7 explores the use of the powerful Virtual Mixer VMIX capabilities which allow you to create custom mixes of networked sources and use them like you would a single audio source We will also discuss VMODE which is a section that allows you to manipu late mono sources in many useful ways Grab a cold one and let s dive in 9 2011 Axia Audio Chapter Seven Virtual Mixer VMIX What is VMIX Virtual Mixer or VMIX is a cool feature present in every Element system whether used with a StudioEngine or PowerStation In addition to the foreground mixing capabilities present on the Element console itself there is a 40 input virtual mixer accessed via HTTP inter face or PathfinderPC software This mixer consists of 40 stereo input channels a direct output for each channel 8 submixer outputs and one master out The 40 channels are divided equally among the 8 subgroups providing 5 stereo channels in each subgroup mixer The various VMIX outputs described above will be come sourc
200. iles EQ amp dynamics Aux feeds and more There are two different type of Monitor Modules one that contains only monitor and option controls and one that has fewer monitor controls but adds two channel faders Software The Element operating system uses a high perfor mance embedded Linux kernel to help ensure bullet proof 24 7 operation Software updates can be obtained from Axia via the Internet and applied by the station en gineer Axia Support recommends performing backups or making printouts of Show Profiles and other configu ration data before applying new software updates Control Callouts On the following pages are a bird s eye view of Element with major controls and their functions 2011 Axia Audio Element with Standard Monitor Module 1 Faders can accommodate any input source Each channel s Options button at the top of the fader strip lets operators change sources and call up ex panded channel features Assignment Buttons for the four stereo main output buses Program 1 Program 2 Pro gram 3 and Program 4 Record are located atop each fader strip Channel Displays contain a 10 character text readout and a window for fader position numbers and Status Symbol icons Text is fixed for static sources like microphones and CD players but can be set to show song artist information etc when computer based audio sources are connected Monitor Module Options amp Profanity Delay Cont
201. imal value If you run a public network Host IP addresses are assigned to your organization by your internet service provider and parceled out to individual host computers by your network admin istrator He may give you this number to be entered manually or could opt for DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol to let your computer get the address automatically from a pool Because Livewire devices are permanently attached and because it is more desirable to know the IP address attached to a particular node and perhaps assign them in some kind of logical pattern we do not support DHCP for our hardware nodes Therefore you will need to enter an IP address into each node Using the audio nodes Livewire systems can support 32 766 channels of audio this necessitates giving each audio source or destination its own unique identifier called Channel ID numbers As you can imagine keeping track of so many unique IP addresses and Channel ID numbers is a big job There fore on the next few pages we ve provided you with worksheets that you can use to keep track of the numbers you ve assigned A logical convention that is often followed will link the Livewire channel number to the last octet of the device IP address For example if a node has an IP address of 192 168 1 12 the channel numbers assigned to the 8 sources of that node might be 1201 through 1208 For a more detailed explanation of IP addresses subnet masks and related issues
202. ional source to be recorded on the right channel into the Aux Send B bus pre fader 3 Make certain that the Aux Send A and Aux Send B buses are ON and at a suitable gain level 4 Now within VMODE choose an input pair and set their Input Selector boxes to Aux Send A and Aux Send B 5 Set the Audio Mode of the first of the two VMODE inputs rows to Combine L L 6 Create a unique channel number and stream type for your new VMODE stream This unique channel will contain the Left channel of Aux Send A on its Left output channel and the Left channel of Aux Send B on its Right output channel 7 Load your new VMODE stream to an Element fader and assign it to PGM 4 Record Voila What s Next You ve learned about nearly all of Element s func tions learned how to set up Show and Source Profiles configure Virtual Mixers and more Now if you re ready to explore the final frontier join us in Chapters 8 9 and 10 for a look at Element StudioEngine and PowerStation advanced settings 2 2011 Axia Audio 7 Virtual Mixer e 109 7 Virtual Mixer e 110 The cup steams sweet scent wafting lightly in the air Mann it is Earl Grey 2011 Axia Audio Chapter Eight Advanced Element Controls In Chapters 1 and 2 we covered the basics of set ting up your Element when used with the StudioEngine or PowerStation Those chapters were intended to get you up and running quickly Now that you ve read this far
203. ions 0 x Assigning GPIO to a Source 0 56 Software Setup 4 o naaca katari paesa x A word about the GPIO Ports 57 Input Connections sese c srera arianas 57 Chapter One Element with StudioEngine 1 Output Connections 0 2 0 0 2400 58 Introductions oe ge 6 Gis og ee ee ee w OS 1 StudioEngine Quick Setup 7 Chapter Five Element Operations 59 Connections sa eones aS eo EF SE a 7 OVEIVIEW sos Fa eae 2 PS eS eA A 59 IP Configuration 6 eaen 7 Displays eg u rae eg wed od bx bee A 59 StudioEngine Channel Settings 8 SHOW Profiles se ee gb ge ee eaa 59 Set Your Console Type 0 ee ee 9 Sources Channels and Faders 59 Advanced Settings 2 2 2000 5 9 Mix Min so ca Se hee Se PRR Oe AS 60 GPIO aae e Ske oe a ae ee He Be 60 Chapter Two Element with PowerStation 11 Monitor Module and SoftKnobs 60 Introduction ige e kia a SSS S 11 Somare sea BRS Be Be ee RE BES 60 PowerStation Setup o s cse ars Toa saoi wea a 23 Control CalloutSs s s s es ce eee a a a 60 Connections and IP Configuration 23 Control Details aa yb eis eed a eet haex 64 Livewire Source Channels naaa 23 General Fader Controls onnaa aaa 64 Source Configuration I O Subsystem 24 4 Phone Module Channel Controls 66 Source Configuration MixEngine 26 Call Controller 2 Fader Phone Module 67 Destination Conf
204. its circuit board each device attached to an Element s CANBus must have this switch set to a unique position To find out what ID assignments are free enter El ement s diagnostic mode by pressing and holding the Help and Right Arrow keys on the Monitor Module for five seconds You ll see a description of each installed module and accessory panel device preceding the description are a set of numbers in brackets Test Mode 1 1 FN 4 fader 0 4 11 01 2 3 FN Europhone 0 4 11 02 3 2 FN US Phone 0 4 11 03 5 5 FN User 0 4 11 35 UP DOWN Select Module ENTER Begin testing HELP Exit test mode Figure E 2 Element diagnostic mode 2011 Axia Audio Appendix E Accessory User Panels 163 Appendix E Accessory User Panels 164 The bracketed numbers refer to device type and ID number respectively The first digit identifies the type of device the second digit the ID controlled by the rotary switch Select an ID for your new accessory panel by determining which IDs are not in use Now using a small screwdriver turn the switch on the bottom of the accessory panel to the ID number you ve selected as shown in Figure E 3 Now connect the panel to the Element CANBus us ing CAT Se Shielded cable Be sure to keep make the cable only as long as is required 50 feet of cable for a panel located 10 feet from the console is excessive and can cause problems later Shielded category ca
205. ive packaging is stripped away that new gear smell it s exhilarating If you re reading this there s a 99 9836 chance that you ve done just that and are now sitting in the middle of a room surrounded by packing material and a large wooden crate admiring your new Element its GPIO Node Power Supply and StudioEngine and wonder ing what to do next But before you dig in be advised that you need to assemble the rest of your Livewire network first Be cause so much of the Element configuration process de pends upon having access to audio sources and destina tions you must connect and configure your other Axia peripherals Audio Nodes GPIO Nodes Router Selec tors etc prior to configuring Element according to the instructions supplied with each Once you ve done that come on back and we ll get started Getting Prepared This chapter will show you how to get you up and running We ll install the Element console and its power supply first followed by the StudioEngine Before you dive into the hardware you ll need to de termine a range of IP addresses to assign to each studio and log each device s IP as you assign it Appendix F contains an IP Assignment Worksheet you can use for this purpose IP addresses used in an Axia network must be valid Unicast IP addresses Determine your network s subnet mask settings at the same time typically this val ue is set at 255 255 255 0 for intranet appl
206. joe Fig 8 8 Module Brightness Control e LED Icon Brightness lets you adjust the luminance of the Status Symbols fader numbers on the Ele ment overbridge the little windows just above the source identifiers e LED Text Display Brightness does the same for the alphanumeric displays that indicate what source is loaded to each fader channel e Round Button Brightness adjusts the luminance of the interior LEDs that illuminate Element s Op tions PGM 1 4 Monitor Headphone and other selection keys e ON OFF Button Brightness You can probably figure this one out on your own e User Module LED Text Display Flash Off State Brightness If you have any SmartSwitch modules or accessory panels installed you can use this setting to determine how dark display text is when that text flashes for attention A value of amp makes the text flash from completely on to completely off a higher value keeps the text slightly illuminated in its off state e User Module Button LCD Brightness This af fects only SmartSwitch modules and panels Deter mines how bright the backlighting is for each Smart Switch button s colored LCD screen e User Module Button LCD Contrast Adjusts the 2011 Axia Audio 8 Advanced Element Controls e 115 8 Advanced Element Controls e 116 contrast between the text and background areas of SmartSwitch button displays e Production Module Circular Bargraph Bright ness Determines the
207. known intercom stations or Livewire channels defined within the Intercom Livewire Sources field The next drop down is the Mode option which allows you to assign the button as a Talk Listen or Talk and Listen button Selecting a station or source and setting its Mode gives function to that key on the intercom module 20 position intercom modules provide an option to create pages which can be toggled if there are many locations you need to interact with Name Chuma 1 Main Man ZA pax JA Aux 4he3 pax 3 Shas Amd is Awd T Aw Aur pum 9u Awg cH PB CH TH cH E f CH oH Intercom Livewire Sources Lebel Livewire Channel Trg GPIO Talk Listen Delete Level Port Pin Pia Bs MOM ew Cece GPIO Configuration This field allows for the configuration of nine virtual GPIO ports which can be used to interact with the Inter com system More information on this topic is covered in the IP Intercom manual These virtual GPIO ports are accessible through port 4013 If you need to configure GPIO routing on a physical GPIO port using a port on the StudioEngine make sure to use the syntax Wii EE WL BEE JEL EAN on the GPIO node so that it is able to observe the GPIO on the 4013 port Intercom Livewire Sources Here you can enter a Livewire source that is not an actual Intercom station You can then configure the In tercom module to monitor this source with a Listen command or interfa
208. l ON OFF Command Active Low Input Turn channel OFF 13 TALK to CR Command Active Low Input Mutes channel outputs and routes source audio to PVW speakers Active Low Input Allows an external button to activate channel TALK TO SOURCE function Element only SmartSurface not used ON Lamp 1 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return ON unless TALK or MUTE is active OFF Lamp 2 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return OFF TALK to CR Lamp 3 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when TALK is mon Return active MUTE Lamp 4 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when MUTE is mon Return active TALK to SOURCE Lamp Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when the channel mon Return TALK TO SOURCE function is active Element only SmartSurface not used Source Common 7 Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Logic Common Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing common Logic 5 Volt supply Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 if Fused source is not providing volt age active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 Source Supply NOT CONNECTED OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT N C 5 4 3 2 1 s i7 To Ts la l3 To li E E E E E E N N N N N N 5V 5 4 3
209. lement console s design there are two types of profiles One is called SHOW profile and this type of profile contains all of the snapshot settings that would be associated with a scene or preset which is the ter minology used in the sound reinforcement or recording studio industry The SHOW profile keeps track of moni tor bus settings fader channel assignments processing settings feature lockouts and many other parameters SOURCE profiles are the topic of this chapter A source profile is used to identify the parameters that are unique to a specific Livewire source as it applies to a specific Element console You will use your web browser directed at the IP ad dress of your Element to setup SOURCE profiles Note Axia web interfaces have been tested with Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5 or later but also work with other browsers We also like Mozilla s FireFox browser especially with regards to its tabbed browsing capabili ties With tabbed browsing it s possible to book mark the IP addressees of entire rooms worth of Audio Nodes then recall them in tabbed groups with a single click Whatever browser you choose Java must be installed and enabled and your pop up blocker must be disabled The latest Java package is Understanding Source Profiles One of the most repetitive and tedious parts of studio building has always been tying data to audio sources Consider the wiring of line select
210. lkback 00 provide from the board control of an external profanity Delay Section These keys can be used to delay unit using one of Element s GPIO ports Please refer to Chapter 4 Configuring GPIO for instructions on GPIO setup The keys provide for remote activation of Dump Exit Pause and Engage functions respectively Some enterprising individuals have found other used for these keys If they are not being used to control an ex ternal delay unit our PathfinderPC software can monitor these keys and perform various actions upon detecting these button presses Some of these uses have included custom IFB one button show profile load VMIX con trol the possibilities are virtually infinite Monitor Section This controls in this section provide direct operator access to monitor selection and volume controls Monitor 1 Knob Source Keys This knob at the bottom left of the Monitor section controls the selection and volume of the source heard in the Monitor 1 speakers typically the Control Room monitors Rotate the knob to vary the gain of the Monitor 1 speakers Use the Direct Selection Keys in the column directly above the Monitor 1 knob to send the output of Program 1 Program 4 Aux Send A Aux Send D or the two External monitor sources to the Monitor 1 speakers These keys light to denote the selected source You can listen to any frequently used audio stream in your
211. lkback for use as a PA feed What s Next One of Element s most powerful features is the abil ity to instantly reconfigure the entire surface for differ ent show types All fader assignments monitoring pref erences and other console settings that may be related to a specific show or function are easily recalled by your operator Join us in Chapter Six to learn how to set up and use Show Profiles 9 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations 89 5 Element Operations 90 Capital budget may you never decrease for we need new test gear 2011 Axia Audio Chapter Six Show Profiles If you ve already read Chapter 3 Working With Sources you already have a good understanding of how Source Profiles are essential to Element operation In the same way that Source Profiles allow you to pre determine how an individual channel is configured when a source is loaded Show Profiles let you build con figuration files that can be loaded to determine how the entire Element behaves which sources are loaded and what channels they appear on By assembling sets of Show Profiles each user or show can have the board set up his or her favorite way sources placed where they re most useful monitors set to the appropriate feed headphones conforming to personal preference Or you can use Show Profiles to define different types of broadcasts one for the morn ing show one for talk segments one for m
212. loaded with nothing assigned to the board op s headphones CR HEADPHONES MASTER GAIN Allows you to Use as much as 85 dB of gain reduction on the au dio signal sent to the Control Room headphones You can also turn gain control Off or Retain Existing Setting SIGNAL MODE CR HEADPHONE Set the audio feed to the Control Room headphones to Stereo Left Right Sum or Retain Existing Setting CR HEADPHONE INDEPENDENT Lets you choose whether for this Show Profile the Control Room headphones should be fed the same audio as the Monitor 1 Speakers Follow Monitors or if the board op is allowed to select a source for head phones independent of the Monitor Speakers Use Headphone Source Select You may also Retain Existing Setting PREVIEW IN HEADPHONES MODE Choices are Off Normal Auto and Retain Existing Setting If set to Off sources assigned to the Preview bus will only be heard in the Control Room Preview speakers leaving the board operator s headphones to continu ously monitor the selected source In Normal mode audio from the Preview bus will feed the board op s headphones in stereo whenever Preview is active interrupting the selected source Auto mode sums Preview audio to mono and feeds it to the right head phone the selected source audio is also summed to Source CR heedphores master gan voke 05 0 d Dga mode CR headphones CR beach tems releparaiart Prevewsrbnadphores made
213. ltiple audio devices into a single network node significantly changing the economics of complex systems And along the way we expanded our talented staff of engineers scientists and broadcast professionals growing the largest R amp D organization in the industry We re also the first and only broadcast equipment maker with a 24 7 support team that s ready to offer assistance any time of the day or night As they say radio never sleeps so neither do we We realize that it s not due to our efforts alone that these things have happened it s due to yours We owe quite a lot to you and we will never ever forget it You are literally the reason we are here And we will continue to innovate explore think and invent for one simple reason we love to hear you say Wow Michael Catfish Dosch 2011 Axia Audio vil Introduction e viii Introduction e Desk phone rings you press ignore The G M can change his own damned light bulbs 2011 Axia Audio GPIO Node Power Supply unit UIC Start 5 Connect all Audio Node power cords and plug them into your studio s power receptacles El ement with Stu dioEngine 6 Capture ou console using the instructions in ee eee eee Chapter 1 of this manual 7 Follow the instructions found in Chapter 1 to The following chapters of this manual will give you configure IP address settings for Element and the an in depth understanding of
214. lue here usually 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address To enable remote admin istration of your Livewire network you ll need a network gateway If you have one installed enter its IP Address value here Engine IP Address Each Axia control surface controls a unique Studio Engine Enter the IP of the controlled Engine here ist NTP Server IP Address Element supports NTP Network Time Protocol timekeeping to synchronize time of day clocks across your fa cility If you have an NTP server enter its IP Ad Figure 1 12 IP Address Book Monitor Module 2011 Axia Audio dress here 2nd NTP Server IP Address Element v2 x software supports redundant NTP servers Enter the IP Address of your backup server here Web Page User Password You can password protect your Element s web server connection by entering a numeric password here Note If you set a password for HTTP access you will not see your password displayed in this field upon re entering the IP Address book This is a security feature intended to prevent over the shoulder password theft e Rotating the Action knob chooses between the fol lowing options Save stores the changes you ve made to the IP Address Book Undo reverses any changes you ve made if you haven t yet saved them Reboot immediately reboots the Element e Press the Exit knob to leave the IP Address Book Note After making changes to any Element IP addr
215. luminance of the lit segments that surround the adjustment knobs on the optional Element Production Module Phone Channels Menu This screen allows you to set up Element for use with Telos Series 2101 TWOx12 and Nx12 broadcast phone systems For more details please refer to Appendix D Working With Phone Hybrids User Modules Menu This menu allows you to set up and use Axia acces sory SmartSwitch and Film Cap Button modules and ac cessory panels with your Element console In the exam ple shown in Figure 8 9 a Mic Headphone control panel has been associated with a microphone named Studio 1 Mic In this case the panel would be used by a studio guest for remote control of his her mic and headphone selection User module configuration Axia PowerStation Control Center oyster he 90 Mic Control and Mesdptone Selector 12282 cudo Mc ages Ciel Em Fig 8 9 Element User Panels For more information on these panels please refer to Appendix E Accessory Panels and User Panels GPIO Configuration Menu This menu is where you configure the assignments for the eight opto isolated GPIO connections found on the Element CPU connection panel For a thorough dis cussion of this screen and how to configure GPIO please refer to Chapter 4 Configuring GPIO Note that the GPIO section of the PowerStation is not associated with the Element but rather with the MAIN and AUX I O sub systems Script Information Menu Elemen
216. ment aK Note that changing a computer s IP settings and or Subnet Mask settings often requires a reboot before those settings take effect Once your computer is using the same IP network address and subnet as your Element you should be able to access your Element s web page If you ve confirmed network settings and Approx imate ro Minimue screen resembling Figure C 3 Results like these showing packets sent and returned indicate that your Element is active and responding to requests However if the ping command produces results like those in Figure C 4 your Element is not responding and must be restarted Disconnect the El CAWINDONES Sip views I cred me Figure C 3 Successful PING Element is responding normally ement power supply from the mains wait minute then restore power If this doesn t solve the problem you may not have your computer and Element on the same LAN or VLAN Try connecting the two direct ly with an Ethernet crossover cable for greater detail on cable diagrams read the Introduction to Livewire CMNO S Sytem 37 emnd ene gt still cannot access your Element Ping the Surface to determine whether it is responding to your requests Here s how 1 Use the Run command previous ly described to open a DOS command box At the command prompt type ping xxx xxx xxx xxx where x represents El ement s IP address 2 IfyourElementis responding tocom Figure
217. ment can be completely reconfigured instantly to suit different types of shows By using pre defined Show Profiles talent can change board settings from a phone and microphone intensive morning show to a personality based music show or any other kind at the touch of a button Some users may be familiar with this concept since many digital consoles are capable of storing multiple scenes which are very similar in func tion to Element s Show Profiles Show Profiles are easily accessed by pressing the Profile key located at the top of the Global Options section of the Monitor Module Element s on screen display will change to display a list giving instant access to all stored Profiles Construction and administration of Show Profiles is covered in Chapter 6 Show Profiles Sources Channels and Faders During the course of this manual we ll refer often to sources and channels These are not the same Sources are microphones CD players outputs from the playout system telephone hybrids etc Your Livewire network may have a very large number of sources in different locations used in various studios at various times 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations e 59 5 Element Operations 60 Channel would normally be used when referring to Element s linear pots and associated on off controls al pha displays bus assignment keys etc But Channel is also used when discussing numbered Livewire
218. mers tenths are shown only on Count down timers Up Timers tenths are shown only on Count Up timers Both Timers All timers display tenths of a sec ond readouts PREVIEW INTERLOCK MODE If Enable is cho sen pressing any fader s Preview key causes any other previously lit Preview key to be extinguished removing that source from Preview The board operator can assign multiple faders to Preview by pushing and holding any lit Preview key while pushing other Preview keys to add or subtract If Disable is chosen each Preview key works like a press on press off latching switch Multiple faders can be assigned to Preview simply by pushing once a second push cancels any individual Preview as signment SWITCHED METER SOURCE SELECT Choose whether the far right on screen meter bars will dis play levels for the PROGRAM 4 bus or the source feeding the Control Room Monitors PROGRAM 3 METER INPUT Choose from Pro gram 3 Record Phone External 1 External 2 PREVIEW SPEAKER MASTER GAIN Lets you Use up to 85 dB of attenuation on the Control Room Preview speakers turn gain adjustment Off or Retain Existing Setting SOURCE ID FOR EXTERNAL PREVIEW Element s External Preview allows other devices to route audio into the console s Preview system speakers and op erator headphones Use this drop down box to select the External Preview source for this Show Profile Note that this must be enabled by a pin on the CR
219. microphone it tells the GPIO Node to send logic for On Off Remote Mute and Remote Talk commands on the appropriate pins If it sees a line input it tells the GPIO Node to send Start Stop and Reset commands plus closures for Ready lights etc Axia GPIO ports can deliver unique command sets for the following types of devices 1 Microphone Operator Guest or Producer 2 Line Input 3 Codec 4 Telephone Hybrid 5 Computer Playback Device 6 Control Room Monitor 7 Studio Monitor 8 Profanity Delay Device 9 Recording Device 10 Accessory Button Panel Device The next few pages contain tables that explain what function the pins provide in each different device mode 2011 Axia Audio 4 Configuring GPIO e 41 GPIO Operator s Microphone Logic ON Command Active Low Input Turns channel ON OFF Command Active Low Input Turn channel OFF Configuring GPIO e 42 4 TALK to Monitor 2 Command Active Low Input Activates the Element TALK TO MON2 function and routes mic audio to the Talkback bus MUTE Command Active Low Input Mutes channel outputs 15 TALK to PREVIEWED SOURCE Command Active Low Input Activates the TALK button on every source currently in preview and routes mic audio to the Talkback bus ON Lamp OFF Lamp TALK to Monitor 2 Lamp MUTE Lamp TALK to PREVIEWED SOURCE Lamp POWER amp COMMON Source Common Logic Common Logic 5 Volt Supply Input Common NO
220. ming call is answered Useful Note Pressing the pound key after dialing a number will speed connect time by as 2011 Axia Audio Transfer key Line selection keys Hybrid 1 Hybrid 1 fader Hold key Hybrid 1 Drop key Hybrid 1 Next key Status Symbol indicates backfeed mix minus to hybrid is active Block All key CALL CONTROL MOOULE Line selection keys Hybrid 2 Hybrid 2 fader Hold key Hybrid 2 Drop key Hybrid 2 Figure D 7 Call Controller 2 Phone Fader Module 2011 Axia Audio Working With Hybrids e 157 Appendix D Appendix D Working With Hybrids e 158 much as 2 5 seconds By default the Telco s central office switch listens for a specified pe riod of time after you dial a requested number waiting in case you decide to dial more digits Pressing the pound key tells the switch that the dialing sequence is complete and bypasses this waiting period connecting you quicker Pressing any Line key for a line that is already ac tive causes it to be locked in this state a Lock icon will appear in the Status Symbol window next to the locked line so that additional lines can be selected without this or other locked lines being dropped This is useful for making certain that lines on air are not inadvertently dropped such as when a talkshow guest is on a call in line or for button mash conferencing To clear a locked line press its Line button again the Lock
221. module Connect the other end of the patch cable to the RHJ45 connector located on the bottom of your new module connect the alpha display ribbon connector Note Ribbon connectors must be connected to the modules tail up with the cable emerging from the connector toward the top of the mod ule Your new module should look as shown in Figure C 11 Once all cables are connected seat the module in the frame and secure it with the provided 2 5 mm hex head screws Figure C 11 Reverse view of connected module Note ribbon cable is connected tail up Replace any other modules you may have removed and secure them as well The final step in the module installation process is to capture the new console configuration To enter Cap ture Mode press and hold the and 2 keys on the Master Module for 5 seconds The alphanumeric displays will change to read Capture Moc this enumerates all of the installed faders in the control surface Press the En ter or key to exit Capture Mode your new module is active and your Element is ready to use Figure C 12 Alpha display indicates Capture Mode 2011 Axia Audio Appendix C FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance e 147 Appendix C FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance 148 Module Diagnostics Element software contains a hidden routine that al lows you to perform fader lamp and alphanumeric dis play diagnostics on each module should you suspect that one of
222. n y Split L 6 Stereo mixing mode only Sums Left and Right channels reduces gain of the sum by 6dB and places mix on Left output channel y Split R 6 Stereo mixing mode only Sums Left and Right channels reduces gain of the sum by 6dB and places mix on Right output channel y Split L 3 Stereo mixing mode only Sums Left and Right channels reduces gain of the sum by 3dB and places mix on Left output channel Split R 3 Stereo mixing mode only Sums Left y and Right channels reduces gain of the sum by 3dB and places mix on Right output channel 2011 Axia Audio 7 Virtual Mixer e 107 7 Virtual Mixer e 108 The Combine options presented next are de signed to work with a pair of inputs at a time There are eight VMODE inputs 4 pairs If you choose Combine L L for the Audio Mode of the first output the Left channel from that input row 1 will be passed to the Left channel of the output and the Left channel of the second input row 2 will be passed to the Right channel of the output You could then Combine R R on output 2 or pass stereo on output 1 and combine LR 5 1 on out put 2 or make any other combination you like The only limitation is that each output has access to only two of the 8 inputs as grouped in pairs In Figure 7 3 Output channel 301 will have the Left channel from Aux Send A on the Left and Left channel from Aux Send B on the Right using the Combi
223. n inexpensive way to connect to this fiber optic cable Note that the SFP modules cannot be used at the same time as the 1000 Mbps copper ports since these are dual purpose ports not independent ports Please refer to Chapter 10 PowerStation Controls for more details on Ethernet port configuration USB The USB port on the PowerStation MAIN will be used for other features that may be added in the future USB features are not currently implemented Element Console Connections PowerStation MAIN includes two connections for use in conjunction with your Element control surface PowerStation AUX provides I O expansion and re dundant power capabilities only and cannot be connect ed directly to an Element control surface DVI Monitor This is a DVI D connector used to connect the video display associated with your Element console Important If your display has only analog VGA or DVI A it is not suitable for use with a Power Station DVI D is required Most monitors currently available are equipped for DVI D Be sure to check this detail prior to purchasing a monitor for your PowerStation The cable length should be a maximum 5 meters to be compliant with the DVI D specification The display resolution is 1024 x 768 Note Be sure your DVI D monitor is connected and turned ON when the PowerStation is pow ered up The PowerStation s video output may be disabled if a monitor is not detected on boot up DC CAN Su
224. n later in this chapter e On and Off Keys a L CD When the channel is in fader normal mode the On key turns the channel on and the Off key turns it off The channel On and Off functions also provide logic start and stop pulses monitor muting etc appropriate to the selected source If a control room mic is assigned to a fader the CR monitors and Preview speakers will mute when that fader is turned on and when CR micro phone sources are Previewed If a fader is host ing a microphone source pressing the On button when the fader is already on mutes the channel provid ing a cough function until the button is released New Feature If you press Talk on a fader that hosts a source with a backfeed and while hold ing it press the Preview button both will latch on making it easy to have a hands free off line chat using the CR Mic Pushing either one clears both 2011 Axia Audio New Feature In fader start mode holding the Off button while moving the fader up temporar ily overrides fader start the channel won t turn on or send GPIO commands 5 Element Operations 65 5 Element Operations 66 4 Phone Module Channel Controls You can assign any type of source to any Element fader module but some fader modules include special keys that provide extra functions for cer tain types of sources The 4 Phone Fader Module Figure 5 2 is one of these modules If a nor mal line
225. nd that you make this assignment in each Show Pro file which will use the phone system For normal operation you will assign Hybrid 1 to the left fader channel of the Call Controller and Hybrid 2 to the right fader channel Additional hybrids if you have them may be assigned to any channel on a 4 Fader Phone Module n Note Within Element each incoming phone type audio source has an associated backfeed for automatic mix minus generation There are several user configuration options that affect which audio sources are fed to the hybrid under various conditions please refer to the Source Profile Options and Feed To Source Mode op tions documented elsewhere in the manual Call Controller Operation The operation of the Call Controller is the same whether you are using a Telos Nx12 or 2x12 phone sys tem This section is not intended to replace the manual that came with your Nx12 or 2x12 but rather give you an overview of your phone system in the context of the Element On Element s Call Controller Module pressing any Line button either answers a call ringing in or selects an inactive line to make an outgoing call when an inactive line is picked up in this manner the keypad located on the Element Navigation Module is active and can be used for dialing calls You ll see visual confirmation on Element s display screen as you dial the number and if caller ID is available it is displayed after an inco
226. nd the PowerStation AUX ae Lean _ E Seren umpan ue aC can operate normally as long as TU emper z ong Hini stai Gaeb000 rset se power supply is active EA Nm a Aas Paa You cannot un check the backup due jamal ep 93 bees ee aghi ppr Colle vergr Ge ew pervert bev lowtotee 101400 Be OW power option if the backup power is actually present the software won t allow that If it is unchecked it means that there is actually no backup and then the failure of the main power will simply bring the unit down As usual if you make a change remember to click the Apply button before navigating away from this page Network e Host Name This is where you give your Pow erStation a short friendly name We suggest you include the location or name of the studio since that will make other aspects of the system more intuitive e IP Settings It is possible to make changes to IP settings here however we recommend that you make these changes in the main PowerStation Setup menu as described at the beginning of this section System The System Menu of the PowerStation s MixEngine displays some different information than a stand alone StudioEngine however the functionality is identical The MixEngine System screen is displayed in Figure 10 5 e System Status This area displays the health indicators and status of the motherboard in the 2011 Axia Audio gt aot Pruge 10 2 4
227. nds amp Returns Key located on the Master Module Note Instead of the Retain Source Settings option found in the Channel Descriptions pages the Auxiliary Send Descriptions Screen features a new option Retain Existing Settings Us ing this option with any of the Aux Send Return settings allows the Show Profile to be loaded without disturbing the Aux Send Return master settings in use by the board operator From the Show Profile Settings web page choose the Auxiliary Send Return Data link You ll find the fol lowing options e Aux Send A B C D Master Gain Selecting Off turns off master gain adjustment for each Aux Send s outbound feed Select Use and enter a gain value between 25 dB and 10 dB to trim overall gain if desired or select Retain Existing Setting e Aux SendA B C D On Off Status Choose Off to turn the selected Aux Send 1 off completely On to turn it on or Retain Existing Setting e Aux Return A B Master Gain Selecting Off turns off master gain adjustment for the selected Aux Re turn bus Select Use and enter a gain value between 25 dB and 10 db to trim overall return gain if desired or select Retain Existing Setting e Aux Return A B On Off Status Choose Off to turn the selected Aux Return off completely On to turn it on or Retain Existing Setting e Aux Return A B Signal Mode Choose from Stereo Left left channel fed to both sides Right right channel fed to both sides Sum
228. ne L L Audio Mode Combine L L Left channel of first VMIX input is sent to Left output channel and Left channel y of second VMIX input is sent to Right output channel Combine L R Left channel of first VMIX input is sent to Left output channel and Right chan y nel of second VMIX input is sent to Right output channel Combine R L Right channel of first VMIX input is sent to Left output channel and Left channel of y second VMIX input is sent to Right output chan nel Combine R R Right channel of first VMIX in put is sent to Left output channel and Right chan y nel of second VMIX input is sent to Right output channel Combine LR 5 1 Used in Surround mode to construct an eight channel 5 1 Stereo com bined output Takes Left and Right from first VMIX input and combines it with the 5 1 audio from the second VMIX input Combine 5 1 LR Same as above but takes 5 1 audio from the first VMIX input and combines it with Left and Right from second VMIX input to create 5 1 Stereo combined output e Out Name shows the name of the VMODE output stream as it will appear on the Axia network This cannot be changed Channel is the unique channel given to the stream so that it can be identified and used in the network Be certain to replace the default channel numbers to avoid confusion Out Stream Type Choose from Live Stereo Standard Stereo and Disabled Only enable VM
229. ng FROFHET_1 for example it could scroll FERGIE Choose Show Sourcename to have the channel alpha display the name you typed into the Source Profile Name field above Choose Allow Application to Override if you d like the PAD text displayed instead Choose Show Both to have the Source Name and PAD text alternately display on a 3 second interval SOURCE AVAILABILITY These check boxes de termine which faders or other inputs you ll allow this source to be assigned to For example if your source is a Control Room mic and you only want it to appear on the left most fader you would check only the box marked Channel 1 You might want to make a CD player available on any fader so you d check the boxes for all faders Some sources es pecially air monitors you might wish to prevent from ever being assigned to a fader so you would uncheck the boxes for all faders The number of fad er checkboxes show will vary depending upon the number of faders installed in your Element The three final check boxes CR monitor inputs Studio monitor input and V Mixer input deter mine whether the board op will be able to assign this source to the CR and Studio monitor and headphone buses or the Virtual Mixer please see Chapter 7 Virtual Mixer for details on this feature To prevent a source from appearing on these inputs selection lists uncheck the desired box Generally speaking normal sources such as computers and CD
230. ng device Stereo sends both sides of the source to both sides of the recording device as normal If Phone or Codec Left otherwise Right sends the source to the recorder s left channel ONLY if the Source Type is defined as Phone or Codec Any other Source Type will be fed to the recorder s right channel Summed Mono to Left sums the left and right sides of the audio source and sends the summed signal to the recorder s left channel Summed Mono to Right Same as above but sends summed audio to the recorder s right channel That s the last option Click on the Save Changes button at the bottom of the page Congratulations now you know how to create Source Profiles You can now bring up your new sources on the Element faders Adding Backfeeds and GPIO to a Source Since making a mix minus and mapping contact closures is often done at the same time a new Source Profile is constructed let s brief ly recap those procedures Detailed setup and c operation instructions for your GPIO Nodes and Audio Nodes are found in their respective User Manuals Let s say you ve connected a hybrid to your Ana log Node named it Studio 1 Phone and assigned it a channel number of 12205 You ve constructed a Source Profile for it and you now want to give it a mix minus backfeed and set up a GPIO contact closure for the take and drop functions Here s how 1 Make sure that in your
231. nks to the various Element functions the Audio I O Manager MixEngine and Eth ernet sections Technically speaking a PowerStation MAIN is re ally three separate devices with three IP addresses The home page shown in Figure 10 1 will link you to all three devices plus the PowerStation AUX if one exists however all of these devices have discrete IP addresses Once you establish the base IP address for the Element the other 2 addresses are automatically assigned If you have a PowerStation AUX connected that IP address is automatically assigned as well Use the links shown in Figure 10 1 to connect to all of the PowerStation s com ponents While it may be possible to change the IP ad dresses of the individual devices to some other scheme we strongly recommend that you use the addresses that have been automatically assigned since upon reboot the automatic address scheme for the Ethernet switch and the MAIN and AUX I O subsystems will prevail Let s take a look at the home page menu items for the PowerStation Status This section is automatically displayed when you connect to the PowerStation No password is required to view this page Here you can see e PowerStation software version info e System Information including the version of Linux kernel 2011 Axia Audio PowerStation Controls 127 10 PowerStation Controls e 128 10 the uptime of the PowerStation expressed in days hours and minutes CPU u
232. nsparently to another switch should the core switch fail or be disconnected Note Gateway settings on PowerStation equipment are required The Gateway may be used by PowerStation during IP address setup A valid Gateway also enables access the Pow erStation s configuration utility remotely from outside your network and the use of an external NTP server Enter the IP address of your master router the one with external network connec tions whenever you re given the option to enter a gateway IP address Note Element v2 x software supports redun dant NTP servers Use the second field in the IP Address Book to enter the address of a backup server Setting IP using the Standard Monitor Module When the PowerStation has completed its start cycle meter screen appears find the section marked Global Options on the Monitor Module Press and hold the key marked Fader Options located in the top right corner of the module or press and 4 and 7 for five seconds to enter the IP Address Book Figure 2 14 To set the IP address rotate the left most SoftKnob to highlight the line titled Element IP Address and push the knob to select that line Now use the numeric pad to enter the IP address Press the leftmost SoftKey again to take the new IP value Repeat this process to set the subnet mask value Figure 2 14 IP Address Book Continue down the screen and in the same way en ter the other fields values a
233. nt Controls e 118 Featuvreless paper this page would have been empty save for this haiku 2011 Axia Audio Chapter Nine StudioEngine Controls In this chapter we ll look in depth at all of the con trols and options found in the StudioEngine web pages Note If you are using you Element with a stand alone StudioEngine this chapter is for you If you are using your Element with PowerStation please jump to Chapter 10 Livewire Studio Engine Display fader channel ingut output nfo whan ad pov Tam Display return and montor next rfo ty i wel norway ea Display program and monitor output info Velie Gad Veo St war atatistcs Deplay Getaled nooming stream statetks Opere Set unit level application options Set host name IP address subnet mask and gateway IP address Display system and network status Configuration bediup restore Fareware setup Engine restart View and capture system diagnostics info Fig 9 1 StudioEngine Main menu StudioEngine Configuration Screens The Main Menu This is the jumping off point for all of the StudioEngine settings pages the page you ll see after entering your StudioEngine s IP address into your Web browser Upon making any menu choice you ll be asked for a password The default factory login is use leave the password field empty Some of the menu items presented here such as Fader Channels and Stream Statistics are purely
234. nt of HD radio the live air feed is now delayed so it is not practical to monitor this signal except for confidence purposes By processing Program in this manner wherever Program 1 is monitored op erator s headphones control room monitors studio monitors guest headphones backfeeds etc it can be processed universally by applying this setting Of course we don t touch the regular Program 1 out puts that are feeding your transmitter You will have other processing equipment for that purpose To apply choose one from the drop down box and choose Apply V Mixer and V Mode Chapter 7 Virtual Mixer VMIX fully discussed the configuration of the VMIX and VMODE sections of the MixEngine Please refer to that chapter for informa tion on that topic Stream Statistics This screen provides information about all active audio streams in and out of the StudioEngine This is useful primarily for diagnostics and contains no settings that can be modified Axia tech support may ask you to describe information reported on this page In general errors and defects should be minimal DSP underruns should also be very low except for IP Audio sources un der certain circumstances Contact tech support if you are experiencing problems and need help in this area Options As shown in Figure 10 4 this menu includes two fields that are display only and two that can be con figured parks Toot b Mepu 192 168 0 120feg pegop
235. o you must change those default values to new channel numbers to avoid conflict with other studios All Livewire Channel numbers within a Livewire network must be unique Lets take a look at the HTTP interface to the Pow erStation and discuss the Livewire Channel settings Figure 2 17 shows the home page of the PowerStation From here we can navigate to other pages where we will configure Sources Destinations GPIO and other system parameters In this chapter we will concentrate on the Sources and Destinations See Chapter 10 PowerSta tion Controls for other advanced settings Let s proceed to configure our sources Source Configuration I O Subsystem 1 Open the web browser on your computer and point it to the IP address you previously set for your Power Station MAIN 2 You ll be prompted to enter a user name and pass word The default user name is user Leave the password field blank 3 Choose the I O Subsystem MAIN or AUX menu option to configure the I O sections of the Power Station The user interface for MAIN or AUX units is identical 4 Select Sources to proceed to the source setup page You will now see the Sources section as shown in Figure 2 18 By default some source channel num bers and types may already be assigned you can change these to fit into your own channel numbering plan Note The PowerStation has two different types of audio sources Some audio sources originate with the rear
236. o increase the overall perceived fullness of your voice Too much com pression however can make your voice sound hard and squashed Use it sparingly To use compression you must first set your threshold value usually expressed in dB When the audio signal is louder than this threshold its gain is reduced The amount of gain reduction applied depends on the Compression Ratio setting For example with a 2 1 ratio for every 2 decibels the input signal increases the output 2011 Axia Audio is allowed to increase only 1 decibel The Freeze Gate is used to prevent suck up of room noise during speech pauses When ac tive gain is not increased by the compressor when audio is absent Freeze would be the default since it almost always improves results De Essing is just what you think it is a way to electronically remove extra sibilance from your mic channel If your mic is particularly sensitive to s and th sounds and accentuates them on air De Essing helps reduce these sounds to more manageable levels As with compression too much de essing will produce annoying and unnatural results you ll wind up sounding like you re talking through a cotton sock Stick to small amounts to get the effect you want RECORD MODE This option allows you to define how this source is sent to the PGM 4 Record bus Record is a special pre on off post fader bus with a special output for a dedicated recordi
237. o pre fader and pre On Off and backfeeds it callers minus themselves of course when the channel is OFF and AUTO is selected as the Feed To Source Mode Saga ode Reo O et hoe Sun Sayed mode beh Uded O Loiad Sayal plane Normy C bwert eft A breet right CO hraet afit anne right Fadar trin gan 25 23540 0 0 Poder trim bsk Unbded C Locked Panceama postion 24 24 fedorstort ber Dabit O Enabled Figure 3 5 Mode and Trim Source Profile Settings SIGNAL MODE Determines whether source will be treated as mono or stereo and how Stereo feeds incoming L R signal to left and right channels of assigned bus es Left feeds incoming left channel to both chan nels of assigned bus es Right feeds incoming right channel to both channels of assigned bus es Sum creates L R mono mix of incoming stereo source and feeds it to both channels of assigned bus es SIGNAL MODE LOCK Allows or disallows user s ability to change the source s signal mode as set above using controls on Element s surface Unlocked allows the user to change modes if needed Locked prevents changes to the signal mode SIGNAL PHASE Allows for correction of out of phase program material Normal assumes correct phase polarity of source input material Invert left reverses phase on the left channel input Invert right reverses phase on the right channel input 2011 Axia Audio Inver
238. of available sources and their current ownership status Operators may select a source using the SoftKnobs or Nav Keys They can also preview a source before selecting it Figure 5 8 Source menu screen 2 Fader Module controls shown below A Note About Source Sharing Element s source sharing protocol keeps sources from re ceiving backfeeds from more than one console at a time Source control logic however can be either exclusive or shared If an operator tries to assign a source that s al ready in use on another console and has a back feed or logic control enabled the ID box in the Channel Options screen displays Listen Only rights to the source as seen in the right hand box above no backfeed will be sent from his console and no machine logic is tied to the fad er s ON OFF keys In this case the Channel Number box above the fader will display an X which is an indicator of listen only status If the source is not in use anywhere else the operator is informed that they have Full Con trol of the source as shown in the left hand box above and backfeed and logic operate nor mally Source Take rotating this SoftKnob scrolls through the available sources Push to take Previous Standard Monitor Module only Whenever you take a new source your last source selection is held in memory Should you change your mind about the new source and wish to return to your previous s
239. oi sors jas gt on al sore et Lame Figure 4 1 GPIO definitions page Port 1 Port 1 Inpus BREE SERS HELEH Oupus BREE SOROS DAANA 31 CR Most Mc Mictode N Guest Mc Michode 32 Te Guest Mc Sa cto_Ore 33 Phere Groce R 101 Pga 1 Secho_One 102 Pga 2 Sauclo_One 103 Pga 4Rod Stude_Ore 105 Aux Send 1 Stuxto_One 106 Aux Send 2 Stdo_One 113 Stu Morstr Studio_Ore 114 Talent HP Sucdo_One 185 Talba eSti One 106 Paa 305o One 117 Pga 4 Sa cho_One 123 Aux Send 3 Stdo_One 139 Aux Send 4 Studo_One 201 VMIX Man Studo_One A Eadie pataia Poe Figure 4 2 GPIO Select Source popup list 3 When you click on any list icon a small popup win dow will open enumerating all of the audio sourc es available on the Livewire network Figure 4 2 Choose the source you wish to associate with a GPIO port by clicking on it the window will close and the source s name and channel number will appear in the Channel box Type a descriptive name in the Name field and click on the Save button at the bottom of the page Look at the page top status indicator for Port 1 You ll see that one of the pin status indicators is lit in green this means that the port is now send ing a GPIO logic state of true through this pin Assign the source for which you just created a GPIO link to a Element channel operate the On and Off keys for the channel and watch the pin status indicators change as you do so The source we
240. ol lowing page you can see some of the different screens that are presented when you hit the Channel Options but ton Different types sources have different options The three SoftKnob controls for the 2 Fader Monitor Module are shown below the screen image for the Standard Monitor Module When one of the sources has been selected rotating the Function Select knob al lows you to select the chan nel option you want to view or change The selected option area will be shaded RED Pressing this knob se lects that option The following sections will describe both Monitor Modules In many cases the user interface is identical ex cept for the SoftKnob controls and their functions The screen shot for the 3 knob user interface will be shown below the 6 knob controller where applicable 2011 Axia Audio Figure 5 7 Channel Options screens Information displayed differs based on the type of source currently assigned to the active fader Shown clockwise from top left Line Source Channel Options screen Mic Source Channel Options screen Phone Source Channel Options screen Codec Source Channel Options screen 2 Fader controls are shown below 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations 71 5 Element Operations e 72 e Source Pressing the Source key or selecting this option with the SoftKnob displays the Source Selection menu The Source Selection screen displays the currently se lected source alongside a list
241. old log files if you choose The oldest log files are deleted auto matically as storage space dictates The Log Setup menu item allows you to specify an external Syslog server and to configure the debug level Use this section if directed to do so by Tech Support The Screenshot Menu Choosing this menu item immediately captures a shot of the Element s Operator screen This in combi nation with the activity log can be used to determine just what the operator is seeing useful for at home troubleshooting during those 6 AM Sunday phone calls kiam TETTEN Cr CR Be hn joes ph ye Le SC Xa E eanemiimente Th toee cores crew IE remeter rau inog nee Fig 8 6 Element Screenshot Example Pressing your browser s Back button will return you to the Element menu These screenshots may be request ed by tech support if unusual behavior is reported To save a screenshot simply right click over the image and select save as to name and save a copy of the screen shot on your local PC The screenshot settings are con figured on the Customize Menu The Modules Menu The Modules heading displays a detailed list of the installed modules in your Element console marame eras 8 Piemme ems 4 5 beat OF te APPT OS DO ty A tet a ate t pa ew z Madane reverse ne Pewee aea A JLAG S PASA Fig 8 7 Module Information screen Some of these fields are for diagnostics below is a list of those you might find use
242. ole Once this as signment has taken effect the next two addresses will be assigned to the PowerStation Ethernet switch and the I O section For example if you assign 192 168 0 100 to the Element the PowerStation will automatically as sign 192 168 0 101 to its internal Ethernet switch and 192 168 0 102 to its I O module If a PowerStation AUX is connected 192 168 0 103 would automatically be as signed to the AUX unit Be sure to accommodate these IP addresses in you IP scheme A PowerStation AUX may be used as a standalone 2011 Axia Audio 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections e 19 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections 20 unit In this case you will use its factory assigned IP ad dress to access the unit for configuration with your web browser You may change the standalone PowerStation AUX IP address to match your IP scheme Factory default IP address is 192 168 2 50 Multiple PowerStations If you are configur ing multiple units we strongly recommend that you proceed by connecting only one system at a time That way you will not have IP conflicts and any PowerStation AUX units will automatically be paired with the correct PowerStation MAIN If your system employs an Ethernet core switch it must have an IP address that is lower than any PowerSta tion units This function of the IGMP standard ensures that the multicast querier is handled by the core switch if one exists and passed off tra
243. on to the nearest Element console These include the Headphone Selector Panel Mic Control Headphone Selector Panel and the 4 button LCD Smart Switch control panels Other panels require only a GPIO connection These include the Mic Control Panel Producer s Mic Control Panel 5 Button Film Cap Switch Panel and the 5 10 and 15 Button Rackmount Switch Panels Installing a CANBus Accessory Panel Note Before beginning installation make cer tain that you have the latest software installed for your StudioEngine and Element console Current version software is always available at www AxiaAudio com downloads Pre installation Hardware Check Before installing your new panel we need to perform a quick hardware check Open the overbridge panel on your Element and ex amine the Power Distribution Board the one in the mid dle with all the RJ 45 connectors Does one of the RJ jacks contain an RJ 45 termination device If so you are ready to install your accessory panel Remove the termi nator from the distribution board and set it aside for later If you do not see this terminator please contact Axia support for more information Installation User panels that connect via CANBus are much like Element fader modules in that they require a unique ID setting in order for the system to recognize them cor rectly Each Element module and each CANBus acces sory panel has a multi position rotary switch located on
244. one systems are outlined Axia Audio a Telos Company 1241 Superior Avenue Cleveland Ohio 44114 USA Phone 1 216 241 7225 Web www AxiaAudio com E Mail Inquiry AxiaAudio com 2011 Axia Audio Table of Contents Chapter Four Configuring GPIO 41 GPIO Port Definitions 41 Customer Service socar cssc ee iii GPIO Operator s Microphone Logic 42 Warranty r ita a eiaa e a y Be e E ae ae iv GPIO Control Room Guest Microphone Logic 43 SCWVIiC a fsa a a ey heehee m iv GPIO Studio Monitor 2 Guest Microphone Logic44 Credit Where Credit s Due o n iv GPIO Producer s Microphone Logic 45 About This Manual 2 0 ee iv GPIO Line Input Logic 2 6 0 ee 46 New in this Element v 2 0 Manual iv GPIO Codec LOSI0 ich ee ee eR Oe 47 A Note From The CEO of Telos 1 0 0 0 Vii GPIO Telephone Hybrid Logic 48 GPIO Control Room Monitor Logic 49 Quickstart GPIO Studio Monitor Logic 50 Element with StudioEngine ix GPIO Computer Playback Device Logic 31 Making Connections 4 ix GPIO External Profanity Delay Logic 52 Software Set esaa Pa Oa we we a ae oH ix GPIO Film Legendable User Button Module Acces sory Panel Rack Panel 4 4 53 Quickstart GPIO Recording Device Logic 54 Element with PowerStation x GPIO External Timer Control Logic 55 Making Connect
245. onfusing controls In the production room deeper levels of sophistication are accessible with the touch of a button Because different people work differently we ve made it possible to access many functions in multiple ways By providing several paths to access a function the board operator has less to remember and is less like ly to get trapped This also serves to bring new operators up to speed easily In this chapter we ll first give you a high level over view of Element capabilities to help convey exactly what Element is capable of Then we ll give you detailed ex planations of the various controls and functions Displays Unlike other control surfaces Element does not in clude built in meters or other displays Instead Element GPIO Power Supply Node provides a VGA output to feed your choice of display monitors If you are using the PowerStation the video is provided for your video monitor on a DVI D connector Both deliver the same graphical display at 1024 x 768 resolution Element s display normally shows meter levels for all four PGM buses a time of day clock countdown and time remaining timers and well as important status messages When the operator adjusts console options us ing the Direct Access Keys on the Master Module the screen helps navigate the options and in the case of au dio dynamics and EQ adjustment shows graphic repre sentations of the effects of changes Show Profiles Ele
246. onitor Options Timer mode Autoreset Auto add Show Tenths on No tmers O Down timer Up tmar Both timers Proview interlock mody Died Enabled Switched meter source select Progam 4 Monitor Preview Progam 3 Mator nout Record Proview gak muster gan yokane 85 Of 0 Bp Use Do Source ID for EXTERNAL preview Retain existing setting mm scarce Takback gain 30 10 dB Off We azo Ratan esting setting Food to Source Sum Gan 6 3 dB 30 G10 charred for extered profarity Gntry 12098 GIO channel foe Up Tener contrat 0 GPIO channel for Down Timer contrat o Figure 6 3 Show Profile Monitor Settings TIMER MODE Lets you decide globally how the onscreen Count Up event timer will behave when this profile is loaded Choose Manual to start stop and reset the timer by hand using the controls displayed when the Timer Options key is pressed Choose Auto Reset and the timer will automat ically reset to zero and begin counting whenever a fader is turned On y Choose Auto Add to have the timer count up when a fader is turned On and stop counting when that source is turned Off In this mode the timer will not reset to zero when it is restarted SHOW TENTHS ON Allows you to set the Count down and Count Up timers to show or hide tenths of a second displays Choices are No Timers tenths of a second are hidden on both timers Down Ti
247. ono sources and the Balance setting for stereo sources Mode If the selected source is in stereo and the Source Profile for the selected source per mits it see Chapter 3 for information on Source Profiles rotating this control lets the board op switch source audio between Stereo discrete left right Left left source channel fed to L R input Right right source channel fed to L R input and Sum left and right source channels summed to mono and fed to L R input Push to Take the new setting Phase If the selected source is stereo rotat ing this control lets the board op compensate for out of phase audio sources Normal is used for in phase sources Inv Left inverts the phase of the left input channel only Inv Right inverts the phase of the right input channel only and In vert Both reverses phase of both stereo channels If the selected source is in mono the choices are Normal and Invert only Press to Take the new setting Pressing Pan amp Mode again returns to the Chan nel Options screen Aux Sends Key Element has four stereo Aux buses that can be used 2011 Axia Audio as utility buses for mixing for constructing custom IFB 5 Element Operations 75 5 Element Operations 76 mixes or as effects buses for production Pressing this key displays the Aux Sends screen y y Figure 5 12 Aux Sends menu screen Select Exit 2 Fader Monitor module only This control changes which
248. ons key for 5 seconds e Capture Mode Press and hold the star amp 2 2011 Axia Audio keys on the keypad for 5 seconds That s C Press to perform the capture sequence and exit Capture Mode e Module Information Press and hold the star amp pound keys on the keypad for 5 seconds to check status of installed software and fad er firmware Press and hold the star amp pound keys again to exit e Test Mode Not yet available with this module If you end up here accidentally press 0 to exit Test Mode Source Specific Channel Controls Some fader functions change their behavior to suit the type of source assigned to the fader A Guest Mic in put has unique functions different from those of a Codec input and so forth In this section we ll explain the channel functions unique to each type of source input Control Room Operator Mic Channel Operation The Control Room Operator microphone is the board operator s mic It s always located in the Control Room so activating a channel designated as the CR Operator mic affects CR monitor speaker Monitor 1 and Pre view speaker muting When the board operator pushes a Talkback key all output bus assignments for the Control Room Operator microphone are temporarily muted while his mic s au dio is routed to the requested Talkback destination Re leasing the button returns the channel outputs to normal Pushing your own Talkback key does nothing
249. ophone Channel Operation The third type of mic channel is a Studio Microphone This mic is typically located in a location separate from the control room perhaps a voice over booth a talk studio separated by glass or a news booth Logic for Studio Microphone channels is identical to that of the Control Room Guest Microphone chan nel Studio Microphone channels can be turned on and off remotely and provide on off status to a remote logic device Remote Talk and Remote Mute functions are provided for use with a remote On Off Talk Mute panel Remote Talk lets talent and guests communicate with the board op When Talk is remotely activated out puts to program buses for that channel are muted and the source audio is fed to the Talkback bus While active the Talkback key is lit and the Status Symbol displays TALE When the user stops talking the channel returns to its previous state and its Talkback key flashes for three seconds alerting the board op to the guest who spoke to him and enabling reply via the Talkback key When Remote Mute is activated the Status Symbol will display MITE all channel outputs are muted until the key is released and the channel is again active The Monitor 2 speakers mute when a Studio Micro phone channel is turned on or if it is assigned to the Program 4 Record bus The Studio Microphone channel can be associated with an individual Headphone feed All Studio Micro phone associated feed
250. or sources that are already operating at 4dB Microphones gt Home Sources Oestinations GIO Meters System Gos Swreabk Stream Mode bout Gain Phanom Power No Live Stereo 55 0 Disabled w Live Stereo 55 0 Deabied Standard Stereo 00 Standird Stereo Live Stereo Standard Stereo Strid Stirio ASYNCHRONOUS Sundra Stereo ASYNCHRONOUS Lepr J Figure 2 18 PowerStation AUX I O Source Configuration need approximately 50 dB of gain however this varies widely depending on the microphone Other sources may need a bit of gain tweaking to get their levels nor malized Be sure to click Apply before you wander off to another page this will save your settings You may find it more convenient to use the Meters page to set your Source Input Gain This page provides you with a visual reference Phantom Power If you are using condenser microphones and you are not using outboard microphone processors you will probably need to enable Phantom Power While it is not necessary to use Phantom Power with dynamic microphones it should not be harmful to dynamic mi crophones if Phantom Power is enabled Do not enable Phantom Power on channels using external microphone processors as this may cause damage to those units Consult the technical manuals for your microphones and any outboard processors to ensure you have correctly configured the PowerStation s Phantom Power option AES Mode AES sources include
251. or tighter control of target bands At aggres sive cut levels the EQ becomes a tunable notch filter SmartQ keeps the EQ sound ing natural at virtually all settings Pre defined EQ can be entered during Source Profile construction and will be automati cally applied whenever that source is assigned to a Element fader i e a 2 dB 12 kHz high shelf filter pre set in a microphone s Source Profile will be applied when any surface in any studio loads that mic for use At will EQ is set by talent using Element s Chan nel Options controls and can be employed to trim EQ on the fly EQ status bypass Ative EQ high mode O xe Pow EQ high frequency 1250 200002 16000 0 eed frequency 125 100k 1000 EQ bow frequency 20 220rtr EQ hed gan eS 1548 00 CQ rd gains 25 ESA 00 EQ bow gain 25 1545 02 Note ome Mahus Dous O we Conpressor status bypass Ative Dees status Ovpess oO Ative Note gate threshold 50 0B 04 Moe gate doth 30 0 00 Compressor threshold 20 Odik 00 Compressor ratio 1 1 16 3 use volves 1 0to 16 0 1 9 De eeter rachel 20 O40 00 Devesser ratio 1 1 8 1 use values 0 to 8 0 16 Comspemtnce mode hres Freese Pot procasang trite gan 20 0A 02 Record mode Stereo IE Phen or Codec Leit otherwun Right O Surmedtene to vett Surremed Moro to Right Figure 3 6 Processing Source Profile Settings
252. or Direct Main Headphone Monitor 2 Studio Headphone Talent Studio Headphone Guest Preview Talk to External Talk to CR Audio Monitor related Inputs External Preview Input External Monitor Input 1 External Monitor Input 2 Source Inputs Microphone Input n Analog Line Input n Digital Line Input n Source related Outputs Feed to Source An Feed to Source Bn Individual Hphone Feed n Type Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Mono Type Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Type Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Stereo Mono Mono Type Stereo Stereo Stereo Type Mono Stereo Stereo Type Mono Mono Stereo Table of Inputs and Outputs Comments Main stereo bus Usually referred to as Program Second stereo bus Sometimes referred to as Audition Third stereo bus Sometimes referred to as Utility Fourth stereo bus Sometimes referred to as Auxiliary Fourth stereo bus variation post fader pre on off Fourth stereo bus variation pre fader pre on off Comments Aux send bus can be used for processing or independent mixes Aux send bus can be used for processing or independent mixes Aux send bus can be used for processing or independent mixes Aux send bus can be used for processing or independent mixes Allows processing to be folded back into a mix Allows processing to be folded back into a mix Comments Control room monitor speakers sou
253. or modules you need a cable for the remote audio source a set of wires for a start closure another set for stop even with TDM routers an operation as seemingly simple as logic fol lows audio often turns out to be not so simple Mix minus and IFB generation has also been a prob lem in the past Too often it s a complicated process that requires air talent to correctly determine source and bus assignments at a moment s notice How many times has unwanted audio made air thanks to this error prone pro cedure Your Element eliminates these headaches by auto matically merging audio logic and program data into a single routable information stream Since audio in a Livewire network is transported as packetized data it s easy for us to piggyback other data along with audio This is accomplished through the use of Source Profiles Element Source Profiles allow you to specify which network audio sources are to be used on each console in your facility They also assign modifiers to an audio in put Characteristics like EQ curves Pan trim voice dy namics even mix minus source selections can all be set in the Source Profile and are then automatically loaded whenever that source is assigned to an Element fader The result of all this is that Element is always pre sented with complete consistent information about how you want a given audio source handled Note Source Profile settings do not trans
254. ority sources Mute IFB l Dim hvel 24 4B 0 no dimming mute Tap to latch timeout 0 nu 0 Push To Talle no latch defiealt 200 406 Intercom Channel Assignment Shift page Defauk v Apply your cament changes before selecting page mode m _ mode _ none Talk amp Listen t lt none gt v Tak amp Listen v s mode a La F mode cnone gt w Takk Listen w lt none gt w Talk amp Listen v 2 mode P La a mode 4 lt none gt m Talk k Listen w cone w Talk amp Listen v p mode e Las g mode snom v Tak amp Listen vi lt none gt v Tak amp linen v mo 0 P mode a snore Tak amp Listen wi lt nene gt iv Tak amp Listen v 1 2 rede 2 P mode p cnore M Tak amp Listen v lt none gt v Tak amp Listen v 3 F mo P m4 mode 3 cnoe v Disabled w lt none gt Tak amp Listen v ms mode m6 mode i now V Tak amp Listen lt none gt iw Takt Listen w 7 e mode A me mode lt nome gt Tak amp Listen l cnone gt iv Tak b Listen w 9 J mode 20 mode gt lt none gt v Talk amp Listen v enone Jv Takk Listen v Save as Default Csaire ascopy _ Delete Pages are listed alphabetically Use fint character to control the onder 1 Default 2 Alt Aco of module installed refer to the IP Intercom manual for full details for your module Each module has a numbered key position with a drop down that has the
255. ort 29 MOO Zone dand thet tence to Bak Avot Selected Bant Mama Spree mi hort afer changng tie emant barh Fig 10 5 PowerStation MixEngine System screen PowerStation You will see some familiar items here but you will not see Fan Speed there are no fans System Status and Network Status inform you as to the health of the StudioEngine and its connection to the Axia network Both of these indicators must be OK for normal operation CPU Usage indicates how hard the Engine is working This value should never exceed 95 Link Speed tells you the type of link with which the Engine is connected to the local net work switch This should always be Gbs Network Usage In and Out show how much bandwidth is being consumed on the Engine to switch link System Temperature monitors internal tem peratures of the PowerStation If the tempera ture exceeds operating limits a warning will appear on the PowerStation s front panel dis play CPU Temperature monitors the temperature of the PowerStation s CPU If the temperature exceeds operating limits a warning will appear on the PowerStation s front panel display PowerStation Controls e 131 10 PowerStation Controls e 132 10 Serial Number Reports the CPU serial num ber Power1 Fuse1 OK OK indicates that the power supply of the PowerStation MAIN is OK and that its fuse is also OK Power2 Fuse2 OK OK indicates that the power supply of t
256. ould cause the system to become un stable Notice System is operating normally but Syslog contains messages about unusual events that you should know about Informational Logs all informational messag es This includes all routine events Debug Captures all system activity for diagnos tic use After making changes click the Apply button to save them e Internal Log Configuration This menu choice al lows you to set the detail level of the log files that are saved internally in the StudioEngine There are four settings ranging from Disabled to Detailed Two other sections permit you to download a diag nostics trace or to capture a diagnostic information These options should be used in consultation with Axia Tech Support if necessary Note that these values are volatile and are not saved to internal memory if power is removed from the device any information contained in these logs will be cleared System Menu This screen contains several software utilities and in formation fields pertaining to your StudioEngine e The System Status section of the page pro vides information about the physical state of the StudioEngine System Status and Network Status inform you as to the health of the StudioEngine and its connection to the Axia network Both of these in dicators must be OK for normal operation CPU Usage indicates how hard the Engine is working This value should never exceed 80 Link Speed
257. ource selection press the Previous knob the prior source will be im mediately reloaded to the fader Preview allows you to hear the highlighted source through the Preview speakers without having to take it Press and hold to listen re lease to end the preview Pressing Source again returns to the Channel Options screen EQ amp Dynamics amp This command allows three band parametric equal ization to be applied to the selected audio source and if it is a permitted source mic phone or codec to apply dynamics processing by Omnia On the Standard Moni tor Module pressing the EQ amp Dynamics key causes the EQ screen to appear pressing it a second time dis plays the Dynamics screen and pressing a third time exits When the EQ screen is displayed a graphical rep resentation of the equalization curve is displayed as 2011 Axia Audio the controls are adjusted The screen also indicates the amount of cut boost applied and the center frequency of each band Figure 5 9 EQ menu screen Function Exit 2 Fader Monitor module only This control changes the frequency band at which the other two controls operate low mid or high Pressing this knob will exit the EQ screen Lo Gain Bypass Active Rotating this Soft Knob adjusts the amount of gain or cut applied to the low EQ band note that the Shelf Peak in dicator next to the onscreen control automatically shifts to Peak mode when boost
258. output and set the priority of each stream 2011 Axia Audio Live Stereo is for live audio where lowest latency is required like Program outputs and mic to head phone paths Standard Stereo is for low priority non realtime audio Standard streams have higher latency but of fer the best compatibility for systems with PCs using the Axia IP Audio driver Disabled turns off outputs you don t intend to use Integrated Omnia Processing StudioEngine contains special audio processing presets by Omnia that you can apply to the either Control Room Headphone channel Program in all monitoring paths This is provided so that you can simulate the air sound provided by an on air processor so that your jocks can have real time Program monitoring that sounds like air without having to set up a separate processor chain Presets are provided for several for mats as well as reduced bit rate audio streams To ap ply choose one from the drop down box and choose Apply That Radio Sound Over the years talent has become used to listening to themselves off air during raps hearing their voices with dynamics processing applied and relying on the levelling effects of processing to ride the compressor when the mic is open In the age of HD Radio and 8 second delay mon itoring off the air signal is sadly no longer pos sible But monitoring the Program bus leaves most talent feeling that something s missing f
259. power line surge protection de vices accident neglect or damage EXCEPT FOR THE ABOVE STATED WARRANTY AXIA AUDIO MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE In no event will Axia Audio its employees agents or authorized dealers be liable for incidental or consequential damages or for loss damage or expense directly or indirectly arising from the use of any Product or the inability to use any Product either separately or in combination with other equipment or materials or from any other cause In order to invoke this Warranty notice of a warranty claim must be received by Axia Audio within the above stated warranty period and warranty coverage must be authorized by Axia Audio If Axia Audio authorizes the performance of warranty service the defective Product must be delivered shipping prepaid to Axia Audio 1241 Superior Avenue Cleveland Ohio 44114 Axia Audio at its option will either repair or replace the Product and such action shall be the full extent of Axia Audio s obligation under this Warranty After the Product is repaired or replaced Axia Audio will return it to the party that sent the Product and Axia Audio will pay for the cost of shipping Axia Audio s authorized dealers are not authorized to assume for Axia Audio any additional obligations or liabili ties in connection with the dealers sale of the Products Axia Audio
260. pped with the standard Moni tor Module you can also navigate using the control knob directional keys and Enter key located at the lower right hand corner of the module as shown in Figure 1 6 Figure 1 10 Master Module numeric keypad Additionally whenever numeric input is required like entering IP addresses you can use the numeric keypad located just above the Navigation Keys Figure 2011 Axia Audio 1 10 to enter numbers directly IP Address Configuration Using your IP Assignment Worksheet you ll now choose an IP address for both your Element and StudioEngine You must make sure that IP addresses for both Engine and Surface are in the same IP network and are both valid Unicast addresses For example 192 168 0 10 Element 192 168 0 11 Engine Both addresses belong to 192 168 0 x IP network and so will work for our application Note Gateway settings on Livewire equip ment are optional They may be left blank un less you intend to access the StudioEngine s configuration utility remotely from outside your network Should you desire to do so enter the IP address of your master router the one with external network connections whenever you re given the option to enter a gateway IP address Note Element v2 x software supports redun dant NTP servers Use the second field in the IP Address Book to enter the address of a backup server Once you ve determined the IP addresses you ll as sign
261. r Station Once you have assigned an IP address you can connect a PC to a port on the PowerStation s Ethernet switch Make sure the IP address of the PC is in the same PowerStation Control Center Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help eo gt C ae http 192 168 0 120 System Setup NTP Setup Element Surface Sources amp Profiles Modules CAN bus information Brightness control Phone Channels User Modules Script information Internal log Internal log history Internal log setup Customize Screenshot Mix Engine Fader channels Ret and mon in Prog and mon out Y Mixer and Y Mode Stream statistics Options Network System Diagnostics 1 0 subsystem main Sources Destinations GPIO Meters System QoS 1 0 subsystem aux Sources Destinations GPIO Meters System QoS Ethernet Switch Options System PowerStation Control Center Welcome Version information Package Yersion 2 2 0 8 8 Oct 2009 Base 1 0 0 System _ Kernel Linux 2 6 17 14 i686 Uptime 0 days 06 58 CPU usage 0 7 Network no information Net usage Rx 26 556 Mbps Tx 126 673 Mbps File System Information Filesystem Size Used Available Use Memory 883 98 MB 183 78 MB 700 20 MB 20 8 l 417 80 MB 133 37 MB 284 42 MB 31 9 imntj persistent_rw_fs 45 57 MB 17 13MB 28 44 MB 37 6 boot grub 7 59MB 1 23MB 6 37 MB 16 2 2004 2009 Axia Audio a a Figure 2 17 PowerStation
262. r Any Windows desktop or notebook PC with an Ethernet port and a standard Internet browser is acceptable For cable connections CAT 5e Ethernet cable is re quired Some use CAT 6 since the cost is only slightly higher than CAT 5e For greater detail on cable selec tions we again recommend you read The Axia Guide to Choosing Category Cable available from www AxiaAu dio com tech Always make certain that power has been applied to your studio s Ethernet switch and that the switch is properly configured for multicast as recommended by Axia before powering any other Axia components It is essential that you use a qualified switch and that it has been configured in accordance with Axia s guide 2011 Axia Audio 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections e 1 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections e 2 lines Most folks that encounter problems setting up a new system have not paid attention to this requirement More information on switches can be found at http Information on specific configurations is available in the user manuals section at www axiaaudio com Element with StudioEngine Setup If you haven t done so yet it s time to get your Element out of its packing crate This is a two person job so grab a partner Important Like any electronic device Element can be affected by static electricity Use of a personal grounding device is strongly recom mended during transport
263. r 6 rout Meme 2 Sub Out Figure 6 4 Show Profile Additional Meters This section allows to you specify the meter sources for the six extra meters that can optionally be dis played in the centre section of the Element display The selections for each of the six meters are extensive and include all Program Aux External Monitor busses Phone Record all Fader Channel sources and backfeeds all VMIX inputs direct sub and main outputs all VMODE inputs and outputs Sources for External 1 amp 2 Section Source D ta EXTERNAL hou 1 294m hg Saree D amp OTU row 2 wl r Figure 6 5 Show Profile External Sources e SOURCE ID FOR EXTERNAL INPUT 1 Use the drop down box to specify a source for Monitor 1 External Input 1 e SOURCE ID FOR EXTERNAL INPUT 2 Use the drop down box to specify a source for Monitor 1 External Input 2 Control Room Monitor Monitor 1 Options Source Pam O Pave PGMS Pama O AA ANB O Aux C O ALD OSTI OT no source OR morna meter gan volure C85 0GS O Of Ver Do Retan maming tatting Signal made OR morito Stereo Left O Pape oO Sum Retin exttng setting O monto den gai 30 0 of O Wwe o 0 G Petar eating setting Figure 6 6 Show Profile CR Monitor Options e MONITOR ASSIGNMENT Choose to load PGM1 PGM2 PGM3 PGM4 AUX A AUX B AUX C AUX D EXT1 EXT 2 or No Source if you wish the Pro file to be loaded wit
264. r Modules may be used with these hy brids although there is no benefit from the latter as the Hold and Set buttons have no function First let s set up GPIO connections Please refer to the GPIO section of this manual or the Axia GPIO Node Manual for pinout diagrams 1 Connect the GPIO START Pulse output to the hy brid s Line Take pin and the GPIO STOP Pulse output to the hybrid s Line Drop pin This will cause the On and Off buttons on the fader to which the hybrid is assigned to operate the hybrid remotely Here s a cable diagram Element to Telos ONE cable Element Hybrid DB 15M DB 9M fcommon gt T 2011 Axia Audio Appendix D Working With Hybrids e 159 Appendix D Working With Hybrids e 160 Element to Telos Delta cable Element Hybrid DB 15M DB 15M fcommon gt T gt 2 Connect the hybrid inputs and outputs to an Audio node 3 Using the Node s Source configuration web page en ter a text name and channel number for each input It might be convenient to include the telephone number as part of the text name Configure for Fast Stream audio mode 4 Using the Node s Destination configuration web page select the same channel number for each out put as was used for the corresponding input Select To source for the Type This is how Element s au tomatic backfeed mix minus knows where the back feed should be sent Configure for Fast Stream
265. r you wish to make the slave An apos trophe will be displayed next to its numeric indicator Pressing the fader s PGM1 and PGM2 keys will change the numeric indicator indicating the Master to which this fader is now slaved a display reading means that the fader is slaved to fader 2 Pressing the Options key again returns the fad er to non mirrored mode Short Navigation Tutorial There are several different ways to change on screen options The first way is with Element s SoftKnobs lo cated directly above the Monitor Module and shown in Figure 1 7 Note that the functionality is the same but the menus are slightly different for the Element 2 Fader Monitor module This module has only 3 SoftKnobs _ Figure 1 7 Element SoftKnobs These knobs are context sensitive When any of Ele ment s setup modes are activated using the options keys on the faders or Master Module you ll see a correspond ing row of knobs represented onscreen as shown in Figure 1 8 Figure 1 8 On screen SoftKnobs Note that there are sometimes functions shown both above and below the on screen SoftKnobs When a func tion is presented above the knob turning that knob ac complishes that function When a function is presented below the knob pushing in gently on the corresponding SoftKnob activates that function The example shown in Figure 1 8 is from the IP Address Book screen If your Element is equi
266. rStation MAIN only Solid GREEN indicates the PowerStation MAIN is in a normal state of health Since several internal condi tions are monitored a RED OK indicator can mean one or more of several abnormal conditions A correctable fault condition will be an over temperature alarm Check to ensure the unit has adequate air flow and that the heat sinks are only slightly warm never hot Contact Axia tech support for additional assistance 2011 Axia Audio 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections e 13 2 Element with PowerStation Setup and Connections 14 Microphone Inputs S0dBu analog Line Inputs and Outputs 4dBu analog TT bi A ale erate ee mpe 100 Mbs PoE Ethemet 100 Mbs Ethernet 1000 Mbs Ethernet GPIO Ports 5 GPI and 5 GPO per port AES EBU Digital Inputs and Outputs Element DVI D Monitor and DC CANBus Backup PSU Connector Figure 2 3 PowerStation MAIN Rear Panel Connections PowerStation Rear Panel As you can see in Figure 2 3 there are no switches or controls on the PowerStation rear panel All setup is performed with software The rear panel consists of only connectors and indicators Power There are two power connectors on the PowerSta tion PSU1 MAIN is the standard IEC receptacle for your mains power This is auto sensing for voltages in the range from 100 to 240 VAC The second power supply connection is labelled PSU2 BACKUP It is to be used only in
267. rations e 61 5 Element Operations 62 Element with 2 Fader Phone Module and 2 Fader Monitor Module Faders can accommodate any input source Each channel s Options button at the top of the fader strip lets operators change sources and call up ex panded channel features Assignment Buttons for the four stereo main output buses Program 1 Program 2 Pro gram 3 and Program 4 Record are located atop each fader strip Channel Displays contain a 10 character text readout and a window for fader position numbers and Status Symbol icons Text is fixed for static sources like microphones and CD players but can be set to show song artist information etc when computer based audio sources are connected Numeric Keypad lets operators dial phone sys tems or codecs directly Also provides numeric input during surface setup Three SoftKnobs are context sensitive when any Direct Access key is pressed the on screen dis play shows the function affected by rotating and or pushing each knob Record Mode and Load Profile Keys let opera tors recall customized Show Profiles and activate Record Mode to quickly capture off air bits to an external recording device 7 Talkback amp Preview Keys let operators preview cue selected sources off air or quickly talk to any source s with associated backfeed s 8 2 Fader Phone Module provides direct control of all hybrid and line control functions
268. rce and level controlled by Element Monitor 1 control Control room monitor output source same as Monitor 1 fixed level output Control room board op headphone source and level controlled by Element headphone control Studio monitor speakers source and level controlled by Element Monitor 2 con trol Studio talent headphones source same as main fixed level output with talkback Studio guest headphones source same as main fixed level output no talkback Allows the connection and level control of external powered speakers Allows board operator mic to talk to other devices a logic command is associated Allows the Talk to CR audio mix to drive an external destination Comments Allows an external path into the preview speakers a logic command is associated Allows an external source to be monitored by c r or studio selectors Allows an external source to be monitored by c r or studio selectors Comments Typical installations have 4 or 8 microphone sources per studio Typical installations have 16 analog line sources per studio Typical installations have 16 digital line sources per studio Comments Mono mix minus output feeds the left side of a stereo connection Talk to function enabled Mono mix minus output feeds the right side of a stereo connection Talk to function disabled Individual headphone feed for talent and guest mics with Talk to x function enabled 2011 Axia Audio 6E T
269. rce assignment Volume Controls C Program Monitor 1 J Aux Sends Headphones External Monitor 2 Preview Figure 6 9 Show Profile Control Locks Master Module Control Lock Map Element is a pretty powerful console perhaps the most powerful and flexible your jocks have ever used And that means that there are probably plenty of func tions you d rather they not have access to things that could mess them up and result in the dreaded midnight phone call The Master Module Control Lock Map allows you to disable access to many Element functions to prevent set tings from being tampered with This can be done on a per show basis so remember that if you wish to disable access to a certain function globally you must do so in every Show Profile The screen shot in Figure 6 3 shows the wide range of options you can lock down This includes EQ and voice dynamics mix minus settings even things like Monitor and Headphone assignments for particularly clueless members of the air staff Placing a check mark in any of these boxes means that the operator will not be able to modify the settings for that item which you ve pre loaded in the Show Pro file Save and Exit e Save Changes button applies any changes made to the Auxiliary Send Description and returns you to the Show Profile Settings menu e Back to Show Profile link takes you back to Show Profile Settings without saving changes Monitor 1 source assignment H
270. re channels 12301 Sources Source Name Charre STUDIO MIC 1 12302 through 12308 to these sources Aidah ue AUTOMATION PC 12303 PHONE EDITOR wan Sharable This setting is for backward ZELS 12305 INTERNET PC 12006 compatibility only It should al Pcp 12307 ways be set to No for your Pow cb2 12908 erStation Show source allocation status Stream Mode This setting determines the type of stream that you will be delivering to the Livewire net work As a general guideline microphones codecs and phone sources are usually Live Stereo for lowest latency CD s satellite feeds and com puter sources are usually set to Standard Stereo A word about stream types There are cur rently three choices available in the Mode drop down box Live Stereo and Standard Stereo and Disabled Live Stereo was previously referred to as Livestreams Use Live Stereo streams when ever you need the lowest latency for on air feeds mic to headphone paths etc Standard Stereo is intended to provide the best compatibility with older PC systems but the trade off is that these streams have a higher amount of latency We suggest that any sources not in use should be set to Disabled This will preserve bandwidth plus make your setup less complicated Input Gain This setting allows you to match the level of your source so that the levels of the Livewire streams are stan dardized within the system A gain of 0 can be used f
271. return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon Logic 5 Volt supply Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 Fused if source is not providing voltage active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 Source Supply NOT CONNECTED OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT NIC 5 4 3 2 1 s l7 l6 Ts T4 f3 To Th EE EE IE E E E N N N N N N 5V 5 4 3 2 1 COM POWER SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio Configuring GPIO e 47 4 Configuring GPIO e 48 4 GPIO Telephone Hybrid Logic mame o y y E COo RESET Command READY Command OUTPUTS ON Lamp lve Notes Active Low Input Turns channel ON e Active Low Input Turns channel OFF Active Low Input Turns preview ON Active Low Input Turns channel off while not sending a STOP pulse Active Low Input Illuminates OFF lamp to indi cate source s readiness Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return ON OFF Lamp Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return OFF PREVIEW Lamp Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when PREVIEW mon Return is ON START Pulse 4 Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 ms PULSE is sent when mon Return channel is first turned ON or when PVW is first selected if PVW answers option is selected STOP Pulse 5
272. rface This connector is a 6 pin Molex connector that is used to provide DC power 48 vdc plus CANBus data to your Element control surface Use the cable provided with your control surface If you require a longer cable 2011 Axia Audio or a cable for a split console configuration please con tact your Axia sales representative Your control surface must be connected to a Pow erStation MAIN using only the supplied 6 conductor cable Refer to Figure 2 8 in the following section When you connected the cable to the Element as de scribed above you no doubt noticed some RJ 45 con nectors in the vicinity This is your CANBus distribution hub Do NOT connect any Ethernet cables to the CAN Bus distribution hub that is inside the Element This hub is for CANBus connections only and may cause damage to other equipment The RJ 45 connector is used to dis tribute 48 VDC to the CANBus modules and accessory panels What is CANBus Controller Area Network CAN is a multicast shared serial bus standard originally developed in the 1980s by Robert Bosch GmbH for connecting electronic control units ECUs Although initially created for au tomotive purposes nowadays it is used in many embedded control applications The CAN data link layer protocol is standardized in ISO 11898 1 2003 Element with PowerStation Setup If you haven t done so yet it s time to get your Element out of its packing crate This can be a two
273. ricating the top er to be serviced by pulling gently upward rail with Dow Corning 510 6 Using the 6 hex wrench remove the two hex screws at the top and bottom of the fader slot If coffee a soft drink or other sugared liquid The fader will drop out from the bottom of the has been spilled into the fader remove it from module the module as soon as possible and remove the 7 Lay the fader assembly on your work surface la top cover of the fader Hold the fader under hot bel side up Remove the snap on fader assembly running water while moving the fader slider back ROFADER EV 9101 UNC oli B10KA o8 77535 KOON OENPA CO LTD Fa ee Figure C 15 Tilt module up to remove from frame Figure C 17 Pry point on fader cover 2011 Axia Audio Appendix C FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance e 149 Appendix C FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance 150 and forth to dissolve the sugars and other chemi cals Thoroughly dry the rails and conductive Note The ribbon connector must be connected plastic using dry cotton swabs and then lubricate to the module tail up with the cable emerg fo ing from the connector toward the top of the the top fader rail with Dow Corning 510 module Lubricating the Glide Rail Move the fader slider to the middle of its travel and place one drop of Dow Corning 510 lubricant on the top rail on either side of the fader slider bushings Move the slider through its full travel to distribut
274. ring GPIO provides the details Ethernet Connections The PowerStation MAIN has three types of Ethernet connections and it is important to use them as intended since the internal Ethernet switch is configured in a spe cific manner The types of connectors available are 100 Mbps PoE Power over Ethernet ports are designed to be used with future Livewire prod ucts that will not use an external power supply but rather obtain their power over Ethernet from one of these special Ethernet ports e 100 Mbps Ethernet standard ports are used to connect PC s or other Livewire devices to your Livewire network These devices might include additional Livewire nodes or PC s running the Axia IP Audio driver e 1000 Mbps ports GIGABIT PORTS are used for connections to other PowerStations or for connections to an Ethernet core switch as de scribed below In addition to its audio and PSU connections the PowerStation AUX unit has a single 100 Mbps Ethernet connection that is intended to be connected to a 100Mbps port on its associated PowerStation MAIN There are a few different configurations for the two 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports on your PowerStation MAIN PowerStation Ring In this mode the 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports will be looped to other PowerStation Main units in a ring con figuration Up to four PowerStation MAIN chassis may be connected in this manner This mode provides for Ethernet fault tolerance using standard Spanning Tree
275. rk address 19216810010 Warning all changes except host name take effect after restart Attempts to set network address and netmask to 0 0 0 0 will not be accepted Fig 9 7 Network screen After making changes click the Apply button to save them 2011 Axia Audio 9 StudioEngine Controls e 123 9 StudioEngine Controls 124 The Diagnostics Menu Most users never have to look at this screen these options are normally used only under the guidance of Axia Tech Support Host nase Studio Engine 11 Local tiene Mon Jan 9142405 2012 Syslog server IP address 192 168 100 120 Syslog severity level Ater Debug debuplevel messages xi Download tace J smo ee sae agnor rate ofl open and view startep bog file Fig 9 8 Diagnostics Screen e Syslog Server IP Address Your StudioEngine can generate detailed logs of system activity If you choose to keep syslogs enter the IP address of the server on which you wish the logs to be stored Syslog Severity Level Filter This menu choice allows you to set the level at which the Syslog begins storing system events Emergency Generates Syslog only if the sys tem is completely unable to operate y Alert Syslog contains only messages notifying you that immediate attention is needed for the system to remain operative Critical Syslog contains only messages about critical system errors Warning Syslog contains only messages about errors that c
276. rofiles Configuration web page Choose Source Profiles then Create New Source Profile In your new source profile choose the Primary Source that you entered in the audio node s setup page Give it an Element source name and select Phone for source type Set the default input mode to Left Operation Load the hybrid source s onto the fader channels Use the control surfaces directly connected to the phone system to select lines and place callers on the hybrids Faders will not be controlled by the hybrids via GPIO and will need to be manually turned ON and OFF as needed Note Dialing or generation of DTMF from the Element keypad is not supported for these lega cy Telos phone systems 2011 Axia Audio Appendix D Working With Hybrids e 161 Appendix D Working With Hybrids e 162 Mimicking nature streams combine to form anew many become one 2011 Axia Audio Appendix E Accessory Panels and User Panels Axia manufactures a comprehensive line of acces sory control panels that can be placed near talent host or producer positions to give non board op users con venient control over options such as headphone source selection and volume mic channel on off mute talkback and routing controls These panels connect to the Axia network in two ways depending upon their feature set via GPIO and via CANBus Figure E 1 Axia accessory control panels Panels requiring a CANBus connection require a cable connecti
277. rogram 1 bus when the channel is On with mix minus if needed Phone backfeeds audio from the Phone bus with mix minus if needed Program 1 Program 4 backfeeds audio from the selected Program bus with mix minus if needed Aux Send 1 Aux Send 4 backfeeds audio from the selected Auxiliary bus with mix minus if needed About the PHONE and PROGRAM 4 buses Element s Program 4 mix bus is a special multi purpose bus that does several things at once to make life easier for the operator Any source assigned to Program 4 also be fed to the PHONE bus and sent to callers when the channel is OFF and AUTO is selected as the Feed To Source Mode PHONE is an internal bus which does not feed a separate output instead it picks up the Program 4 audio pre fader and pre On Off and backfeeds them to an PHONE sources Sources assigned to Program 4 are also sent to the RECORD bus a special fixed level output that can be used to feed recording devices This RECORD bus is post fader and pre on off Rotating the Dim knob allows the operator to adjust in dB the amount by which the studio monitors are dimmed when this fader channel s Talkback key is pressed Pressing Feed to Source or Options a second time exits this menu The DIM OFF knob when rotated will control the amount of program dimming that occurs dur ing Talkback Pushing this control will select OFF which completely mutes the backfeed program dur ing ta
278. rols Channel Options section contains Di rect Access Keys for quick access to a channel s Source assignment EQ Dynamics Pan Mix Minus and Aux Sends settings These keys be come active whenever a channels Options key is pressed Below the Channel Options keys a set of keys are provided for convenient on console con trol of external profanity delay units 2 T 10 11 Six SoftKnobs are context sensitive when any Direct Access key is pressed the on screen dis play shows the function affected by rotating and or pushing each knob Monitor Module Global Options amp Timer Con trol Keys let operators recall Show Profiles select monitor and metering preferences and affect other Element behaviors Timer controls help keep track of on screen elapsed and remaining time displays Talkback amp Preview Keys let operators preview cue selected sources off air or quickly talk to any source s with associated backfeed s Monitor 2 Talkback amp Volume Controls let op erators easily talk to hosts and guests in a second studio and control their monitor volume Monitor Assignment Section contains volume and selection controls for monitors headphones Aux Send buses and Preview Control Knob Nav Keys help navigate through on screen options Numeric Keypad lets operators dial phone sys tems or codecs directly Also provides numeric input during surface setup 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Ope
279. rom the bottom of the connector You may now slide the disconnected alpha panels out of the overbridge mounting channel along with the blanking panel occupying your new display s position 2011 Axia Audio Figure C 9 Location of alpha display ribbon connectors as seen from rear of overbridge Carefully slide your new alphanumeric panel into the mounting channel Note that the metal portion of the dis play has rounded edges which fit into the round frontmo st channel the circuit board portion of the display must have its top and bottom edges located in the first groove behind the round channel Figure C 10 Detail of overbridge mounting channel After all of the overbridge panels have been located in the mounting channel reconnect their ribbon cables Connect the ribbon cable that came with your new dis play and thread it from the overbridge into the bucket through the passage provided Re mount the end panel taking care to locate the overbridge hinge pin in the hole provided Now connect the RJ45 patch cable supplied in your module kit to any free jack on Element s connection pan el located in the center of the overbridge compartment Note You ve probably noticed that 4 space modules have two RJ45 connectors on their un dersides These are daisy chain connectors if all of the jacks on your Element s connection panel are in use you can connect a new module to the unused jack on any other
280. rom their headphones To help combat this Element offers customiz able headphone EQ and built in headphone dy namics processing by Omnia When this feature is used Talent can monitor Program audio with no delay and still hear the comfortable air sound they re used to without the hassle and expense of outboard processors dedicated to the headphone channel The VMIX amp VMODE Menu This menu allows you to view settings and make ad justments to the Element Virtual Mixer system Please see Chapter 7 Virtual Mixer for details on how to use VMIX and VMODE The Intercom Menu This screen will be active if there is an Intercom module connected to your Element surface otherwise an Intercom module not connected notice is presented If a module is connected you will be presented with the Intercom Channel Assignment options appropriate for the module installed In Figure 9 5 a 20 position module is shown Intercom Configuration Intercom Label 10 character name which will be presented to other intercom stations and displayed on module channel displays Intercom Alternate Label 10 character alternate name used in the same fashion Livewire channel number A unique channel number for the audio from this station which will be routed to other stations upon a talk exchange Make sure this number is unique to your Axia network Preview Mix channel number Assign a unique channel number which will be used
281. s appropriate e Rotate the Select Set SoftKnob to scroll through the list of available options To select an option to modify push this knob While modifying an options rotate the knob to change an option s value and push the knob to move to the next field Options include Element IP Address Every piece of Livewire gear must have its own unique IP Address Set the IP Address for each Element in this field Subnet Mask Enter your network s subnet mask value here usually 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address To enable IP configura tion and remote administration of your Livewire network or an external NTP server you ll need a network gateway Usually this will be the IP ad dress of your router 2011 Axia Audio Important Your Gateway Subnet Mask should be set within the same subnet as the PowerSta tion even if you have no gateway installed Engine IP Address Not required for PowerSta tion do not change the factory default value 1st NTP Server IP Address Element supports NTP Network Time Protocol timekeeping to synchronize time of day clocks across your fa cility If you have an NTP server enter its IP Ad dress here 2nd NTP Server IP Address Element v2 x software supports redundant NTP servers Enter the IP Address of your backup server here Web Page User Password You can password protect your Element s web server connection by entering a numeric password here Note If you
282. s described below In addition to Meter Options you will also find the global set tings for AUX SENDS and AUX RETURNS Figure 5 18 2 Fader Meter Options menu screen Meter Ballistics permits the selection of various international metering standards Those selections are meter options are Full Scale VU Element default North Ameri can style VU meters BBC Type PPM DIN Type PPM EBU Digital Nordic Type Figure 5 19 illustrates the 5 different types of meters and a comparison of these meters displaying a steady tone with an RMS level 20 dB below digital full scale More Meters will open up an additional meter dis play that replaces the centre clock section on the Ele ment display These six meters can be configured to display any other sources you have specified in the Monitor section of your Show Profile see Chapter 6 for details To close the More Meters display press the Meter Options button twice More Meters is toggled on off on the 2 Fader Mon 2011 Axia Audio OUI aD BU uu CORDES ESL 640 ELORO VUCO OANA SANA OTAA UODAVDNLON ADOURIOUOO U02 10AQOANC100 IUO TOWEN E 10E 20 A0 RUN MODEN MNO MOONIN IB UL YU NA AC VERNA MOLALLA y UT TTT STUDS TTC TC TL Figure 5 19 Meter Comparisons Left to Right Full Scale VU BBC PPM DIN PPM EBU Digital Nordic itor module by pressing and holding the Monitor Op tion button and then pressing the Monitor 2 knob Note The 2 Fa
283. s of Element PowerStation and StudioEngine are determined largely by software Periodic updates may become available to determine if this is the case visit our web site periodically or contact us for advice con cerning whether a newer release is more suitable to your needs Our electronic newsletter has announcements of major software updates for existing products as well as keeping you up to date on the latest Axia Telos and Omnia product releases Subscribe at www AxiaAudio com signup htm Trademarks Telos Systems Axia Audio Livewire the Livewire Logo the Axia logo Element PowerStation SmartQ Status Symbols Zephyr Zephyr Xstream Zephyr Xport Omnia the Omnia logo and the Telos logo are trademarks of TLS Corporation All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders Axia Audio 1241 Superior Ave Cleveland OH 44114 USA 1 216 241 7225 Inquiry AxiaAudio com Copyright 2011 by TLS Corporation Published by Axia Audio We reserve the right to make improvements or changes in the prod ucts described in this manual which may affect the product specifications or to revise the manual without notice All rights reserved 2011 Axia Audio Introduction e iii Notice All versions claims of compatibility trademarks etc of hardware and software products not made by Axia mentioned in this manual or accompanying material are informational only Axia makes no endorsement of any particular product
284. s will monitor the audio selected on the Monitor 2 selector but the board op can commu nicate privately using the Talkback function Line Channel Operation Line level devices like CD players tape players etc use the Line Channel profile The Line Channel is ste reo but the user can change the input mode to mono left only or right only by using the Pan amp Mode key in the Master Module s Channel Options section Line channels have a variety of remote logic func tions available at the GPIO interface ON and OFF keys can be remotely controlled as well as the Preview key Each function has a corresponding lamp driver A Reset function is provided to remotely turn the channel OFF while suppressing the Stop command useful for allowing certain types of tape machines to re cue You ll also find a Ready command which will re motely illuminate the OFF lamp on the Element channel and activate the GPIO OFF lamp driver allowing source equipment to signal the operator with either a steady state OFF button indicating source ready or a flashing OFF button indicating source next Refer to the GPIO Node User s Manual for information on interfacing to the GPIO s inputs and outputs Phone Channel Operation The Phone Channel profile is used naturally for tele phone hybrid audio sources Each Phone Channel has its own discrete Feed to Source mix minus output Each Element can accommodate as many unique automatically
285. saved Show Profiles custom surface configurations that can be loaded as needed to reconfigure Element for different shows and talent 10 Obviously there s a conflict Instead of blindly changing the channel source and interrupting audio that s on the air Element queues the new source When the board op is finished with the satellite feed he turns the channel Off and the CD player automatically loads Along with selecting a new Show Profile to load users can reload the currently active profile resetting the board to a nominal state if they wish to return to their normal configuration after making on the fly changes Select Take Rotate this knob to scroll through the on screen list of available Show Profiles Push the knob to take the new Show Profile Previous When you load a new Show Profile Element remembers the previously loaded Pro file until you exit the Show Profile screen The Previous command functions as a speed key highlighting the previously assigned source in the source list and allowing the operator to re turn to it should they change their mind Press to take Figure 5 14 Show Profile selection screen DON T PANIC Element is full of options intend ed to make life on air easier and more intuitive for today s talent However it s possible for tal ent not yet familiar with the way Element works to get lost in the option settings
286. se Gate will operate if set to Ac tive Adjustment range is between OdB and 50dB NOISE GATE DEPTH Sets the amount of noise reduction that will be applied to the mic audio if the noise gate is set to Active and the Noise Gate Threshold is reached Adjustment range is between OdB and 30 dB COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD De termines the point at which the Compressor will op erate if set to Active Adjustment range is between OdB and 30dB COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD Sets the threshold at which compression will be applied to the mic audio Adjustment range is between 30 and 0 dB COMPRESSOR RATIO Sets the amount of com pression that will be applied to the mic audio Ad justment range is between 1 1 and 16 1 DE ESSER THRESHOLD Determines the point at which the De Esser will operate if set to Active Adjustment range is between OdB and 20dB DE ESSER RATIO Sets how aggressively the de esser will remove sibilance from the mic audio Ad justment range is between 1 1 and 8 1 COMPRESSOR MODE Toggles the voice compres sor between Freeze and No Freeze modes POST PROCESSING TRIM GAIN Some process ing settings will result in a reduction of overall signal level This setting allows you to adjust the amount gain to compensate for any gain lost by compressor processing What is this stuff Radio engineers don t need a lesson in dynamics processing but for the ben efit of any jocks reading this here s a quick ex
287. sed according to Award is that the BIOS will attempt to display error codes for other non video related problems on screen if at all possible If the BIOS cannot initiate the display adapter is issues the POST code for a display error which must be corrected before any other errors can be determined However some other POST codes are known to exist Consult the table that follows Video card error replace or re seat the card Memory Error Memory is either damaged or badly seated Damaged or overheating CPU Overheating CPU Jostling in transit has been known to loosen the edge connected cards used in Element s CPU If you hear only a POST code beep upon plugging in your CPU disconnect power remove the screws from the top of the Element GPIO Power Supply and remove and re seat all cards found on the internal mainboard typically this will solve the problem If it does not please contact Axia support for further assistance Installing A New Module Adding a module to Element is a very simple straightforward procedure but some minor disassembly of the surface will be necessary if the new module is ac companied by an overbridge alphanumeric display Figure C 5 Underside of module showing 1 RJ45 connectors 2 display panel connector and 3 module ID encoder Before beginning the installation inspect your new module Take note of three features on the underside of the module the RJ45 conne
288. set up the board exactly the way they want it then use the Capture command to save their work This way talent gets the satis faction of personalizing their own Element con figuration and saves you the work Show Profile Options Although the ability to create Show Profiles using Element s capture function is powerful there are more options available exclusively via the Element Web interface You will probably find that a combination of console setup capture and Show Profile edit works best Charnes desc ptos Owe 01 Darvel O2 Crewe 03 Figure 6 1 Show Profile Settings Menu In the last section we showed you how to capture the current configuration of your Element easily creating a Show Profile which was immediately added to the Show Profiles list Now click on that newly created profile It s prob ably named something like Capture 2009 2 12 0 800 the date and time the capture was made You ll see the menu shown in Figure 6 1 Notice that there is an entry for each of your Element s faders as well as a link for Auxiliary Send amp Return s Monitor Section Record Mode Group Start s Phone We will now look at these in detail 2011 Axia Audio The Channel Description Screen Click on any of the Channel links to examine the settings for a fader Many of the options will seem fa miliar to you you ve seen them before during Source Profile setup Remember
289. sh want to operate an entire show this way it s valuable to know that VMIX changes saved on the fly will affect your output streams immediately In the HTTP pages of the StudioEngine there is a Virtual Mixer section and a V Mode section We ll get to the V Mode portion later in this chapter The portions 2011 Axia Audio 7 Virtual Mixer 103 7 Virtual Mixer 104 of this page that display settings on a grey background are indicators only not controls Settings displayed on white backgrounds are controls and can be adjusted At the top of the page you can see the name of the Engine you are logged into Below are eight submix ers each with five stereo inputs All eight submixes are summed into the VMIX Main You re probably already thinking that there are a lot of things you can do with this setup Figure 7 1 shows a portion of the VMIX setup found in the Studio Engine web pages It shows the first of the eight Submixes VMIX 1 Let s look at the controls and see what they do VMIX Main is the sum of all eight submixes Unless you really need a stream that combines the audio outputs of all the submixes you may leave this disabled it doesn t need to be Enabled for the submixers to work In Figure 7 1 the channel is Disabled default setting If you need to use this mix verify that the Channel num ber assigned to it is a unique channel number just as you would in configuring the channel numb
290. show split mode for Nx12 T window will appear as shown in Figure D 3 select the Aaii m audio channel that you configured in VX Engine un DPI ETE der Studio configuration In the list you should see a a Conferencing allowed No Livewire channel number and short description of the E EEA Hybrid give it an Element source name such as VX Hybrid1 and select Phone for Source Type Figure D 4 Show Configuration options 2011 Axia Audio Working With Hybrids e 153 Appendix D Working With Hybrids e 154 Appendix D specific fader channel emulating a dedicated hybrid Normally this is used with a 4 Fader Module If you wish to use a Hybrid in this mode specify one of your VX _ system s fixed hybrids in the Primary Source field In the VX Engine studio configuration you configure both fixed and selectable hybrids enter a Fixed Hybrid number in this field if you wish to associate this source with a Fixed Hybrid The other fields in the Source Profile page are non phone specific and may be configured as you wish Repeat this procedure to create a source profile for each hybrid in your studio You ll now need to load the hybrid sources onto the fader channels This can be done either manually or automatically using Show Profiles Naturally we rec ommend that you make this assignment in each Show Profile which will use the phone system since leaving manual assignment to air tal
291. source is assigned to a Phone Fader the fader and its controls operate exactly like a stan dard 4 Fader Module described in the previous section But when a Telos telephone hybrid is assigned to one of these faders extra functional ity is enabled Taking Calls The Status Symbol box above the alpha dis play indicates an available line by displaying a single dot A call ringing in shows a ringing icon It is answered by pushing either the On or Preview button If Preview is already on tog gling to Off and then On answers the call When the call is answered an up arrow icon displays Also a window on Element s screen will show call status and incoming caller ID if available When the phone channel is off and in Pre view press Off to drop the call When the chan nel is on press Off once to put the caller on hold twice to drop Making Calls To dial out from the console press any con trol key Off On Hold Set or Preview on a fader that hosts a Phone source This assigns the Keypad on the Monitor Module to that fader Di aling works like a mobile phone enter all digits then press the Enter or Pound key to place the call The Status Symbol icon above the fader indicates first that a line is active and then that the call is proceeding The Element display screen will also indicate the numbers dialed and call status e Set Key Figure 5 2 Phone Module Fader Channel
292. stem Fader Mode Defines fader start actions and states Normal conforms to the US method of requiring talent to manually turn the channel on and off Fader Start follows the common European standard of activating the channel and associated machine logic when the fader is raised from Fader Start with Arm works just like the Nor mal setting when the fader is not set to minimum position When the fader is set to the minimum position it can be in an Armed state Armed state is entered by pressing the ON But ton when the fader is down The armed state About Telos Phone System Modes Telos multi line broadcast phone systems work in two different modes US Mode and Euro Mode In US Mode one of the phone system s hy brids is assigned to a console faders and tak ing a caller to air is accomplished by using a switching control to select a line on that hybrid and turning its fader ON In Euro Mode the switching control is not used instead each line from the phone system is per manently assigned to a separate fader which may be turned ON or OFF at will Element supports both US and Euro modes The next few settings are used for setting up the desired style of phone operation Phone hybrid ip 192 168 230 7 Phone ine 7 Phone hybrid for Nx 22 1 Use 2 show split mode for Nx 12 O Phone Module ID No Hybrid Nr 0 None 0 Conferencing allowed No iw Fixed line 1 to 24 0 No 0 Figure 3
293. stomer Solid State Relays ann Current 0 Devices p Limiting Resistors e ee I eeuen a et i ji t LF ie 2 mto Ue t T OV GND z se eens E SE o o 5 Volt Outputs r HSR312L Customer Solid State Relays Current 1 0 Devices Limiting a Resistors 165 VA j Figure 4 5 GPIO output connections 2011 Axia Audio Chapter Five Element Operations Once it s installed in your studio Element looks a lot like a traditional radio broadcast console but that s where the resemblance ends Element isn t a console it doesn t actually mix or process audio It would be more accurate to say that Element is a control center a very fancy keyboard if you like allowing the operator to take charge of the delivery system the PowerStation or StudioEngine mixing rout ing engine the phone system the recorder editor and other sources With Element our goal is to provide you with the most efficient human machine interface possible for fast paced complex programs where board operators must multi task without error As such Element brings a whole new level of control and sophistication to the broadcast studio while providing very intuitive opera tion Overview Element was designed to perform equally well in air or production studios In the air studio the clean interface enhances speed and accuracy without clutter or c
294. stration of your Livewire network or an exter NTP server you ll need a gateway If you have one installed enter its IP Address value here Engine IP Address Each Axia control surface controls a unique Studio Engine Enter the IP of the controlled Engine here 1st NTP Server IP Address Element supports NTP Network Time Protocol timekeeping to synchronize time of day clocks across your fa cility If you have an NTP server enter its IP Ad 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections 5 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections 6 dress here 2nd NTP Server IP Address Element v2 x software supports redundant NTP servers Enter the IP Address of your backup server here Web Page User Password You can password protect your Element s web server connection by entering a short numeric password here Note If you set a password for HTTP access you will not see your password displayed in this field upon re entering the IP Address book This is a security feature intended to prevent over the shoulder password theft If you want to reverse changes you ve made and haven t saved press the Undo knob to erase them Press Save to save changes you ve made Press Reboot to immediately reboot the Ele ment e You can press Exit to leave the IP Address Book at any time without saving your changes Note After making changes to any Element IP address settings you must reboot t
295. sum L R to mono and feed to both sides or Retain Existing Setting e Aux Return A B Panorama Setting Trim Pan Balance for the selected Aux Return or Retain Ex isting Setting e Aux Return A B Assign to PGM1i PGM2 PGM3 PGM4 Choose On to fold the selected Aux Return into any of the four PGM buses or choose Retain Existing Setting e Aux A B Source ID If this drop down box looks familiar that s because it s just like the ones you used earlier to construct Source Profiles and map I O to Axia Audio Nodes Click in the box and select the audio device that will be providing source audio for the Aux or Aux 2 Return e Save Changes button applies any changes made to the Auxiliary Send Description and returns you to the Show Profile Settings menu e Back to Show Profile link takes you back to Show Profile Settings without saving changes Monitor Section Screen The Monitor Section Data screen captures the Moni tor settings found in Element s Monitor Options menus Since you re working on a captured Show Profile this page will of course mirror the choices you made when you set up Element in the beginning of this chapter From the Show Profile Settings web page choose the Monitor Section Data link You ll find the page divided into four sections general options Control Room Moni tor options Control Room Headphone options and Stu dio Monitor options 2011 Axia Audio General M
296. sword theft Rotating the Action knob chooses between the fol lowing options Save stores the changes you ve made to the IP Address Book Undo reverses any changes you ve made if you haven t yet saved them Reboot immediately reboots the PowerSta tion Press the Exit knob to leave the IP Address Book at any time without saving your changes Note After making changes to any IP address settings you must save your changes and re boot the PowerStation Use the REBOOT soft key to begin an immediate reboot sequence Engine IP Address Not required for PowerSta ist NTP Server IP Address Element supports 2nd NTP Server IP Address Element v2 x software supports redundant NTP servers Enter Web Page User Password You can password Other Advanced Options What about making changes to monitors and me ters you may ask The detailed configuration of tim ers clock monitors and metering is not necessary for basic setup but this is important stuff too Please refer to Chapter 5 Element Operation where these topics are discussed in depth Now that your Element has a basic configuration the next section will walk you through setting up your Pow erStation 2011 Axia Audio PowerStation Setup Connections and IP Configuration In previous sections we discussed the physical con nections to your PowerStation In the last section we discussed how to assign an IP address to your Powe
297. t consoles use standard Javascript code for some routine functions This screen is for diagnostics and custom programming only and should not be used without instructions from Axia Support V Mixer Menu Element allows you to mix up to 40 sources using a built in Virtual Mixer consisting of eight submixers con trolling five inputs each Setup and use is described in Chapter 7 Virtual Mixer Note that the Element when used with StudioEngine may have VMIX settings associated with the Element This is available for backward compatibility only Cur rently all VMIX and VMODE functions reside com pletely within the StudioEngine If you are using a Pow erStation this is not a concern since the Element and Engine functions reside within a single unit NTP Menu Each individual Element in your network can use ei ther its own internal clock or an external time server for timekeeping Here is how you set up NTP time sync NTP Settings NTP On off Oot Oon NTP server address primary 9 0 0 0 NTP server address secondary 0 0 0 0 Tene mre GMT j GMT 3 mio save Fig 8 8 NTP Menu controls 1 Choose the NTP ON radio button 2 Enter the IP address of an NTP server in the Primary box and a Secondary NTP server if available 3 Set your Time Zone offset using the dropdown box 4 Click Save To disable NTP service simply choose NTP OFF and click Save You can tell if your NTP connection is working by observing t
298. t engineers prefer the master clock function to reside in their central equipment room so it is common for any stu dio devices such as the PowerStation to be set at clock master priority level 3 default With this setting the PowerStation will normally be a clock slave however if it should ever lose the connection to the master clock it will assume a local clock function and local audio will con tinue without interruption Clock mode should always be set at the default of IP Low Rate unless directed otherwise by Axia Support Live Audio Clock Streams 802 1p tagging PowerStation Controls e 134 10 Quality of Service QoS The QoS page has advanced settings related to the should always be enabled for Live Audio and clock streams This is a way of marking all high priority packets The VLAN ID is not set at the device level but rather at the port of the Ether net switch For this reason the VLAN ID set ting is greyed out The 802 1Q priority for all levels for quality of service and Livewire click synchro nization Default settings almost always usually suitable Figure 10 3 shows the page for QoS settings e Synchronization Livewire Clock In all Livewire systems only one device may be the Live streams is set at 6 and there is not a need master clock at any given point in time If that to change this unless requested to do so by Axia 2011 Axia Audio tech support The DSCP Class of Service setting should be le
299. t left and right reverses phase on both channel inputs FADER TRIM GAIN Lets you specify an amount of from 25 to 25 dB that is applied to the signal just before the fader Note that this parameter may be controlled by a SoftKnob as described earlier FADER TRIM LOCK Prevents operators from mak ing changes to the above trim gain setting PANORAMA POSITION Lets you preset pan set tings for this input Pan is variable in 49 steps center being 0 far left 24 and far right 24 This setting can be adjusted on the fly by the operator if permit ted by show profile settings AUTO START TIMER Determines whether the event timer found in Element s right hand meter display will reset to zero when this source s fader is turned on Disabled timer will not reset when this source is activated Enabled timer resets when the source is acti vated About Element EQ Equalization is available for all audio sources and can be pre defined or adjusted on the fly Our EQ model is three band quasi parametric Controls are provided for center frequency and boost cut with a unique SmartQ automatic bandwidth system SmartQ works by varying the Q of the selected parametric band proportional to the amount of boost or cut you specify A small amount of boost or cut will affect a broader range of frequencies for a warm musically pleasing ef fect As gain is increased the Q sharpens af fecting a narrower range of frequencies f
300. tation An IP address has two parts the identi fier of a particular network and an identi fier of the particular device which can be a server or a workstation within that network Since networks vary in size there are four dif 2011 Axia Audio Appendix C FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance e 143 FAQ Diagnostics Maintenance 144 Appendix C ferent address formats or classes you can use to construct them We recom mend that Livewire networks be con structed as Class B networks to allow enough unique device addresses for ex pansion To learn more about IP addressing and network construction we recommend reading Cormac Long s excellent 4 part IP Network Design available at http tinyurl com 64bb5 Figure C 2 IPCONFIG command displays computer s IP settings 4 Write down the values displayed and type exit to close the DOS command box Compare the two IP addresses to be certain that your computer is on the same network as your Element in a Class B network this means that the first six digits of the IP addresses must match If they do not change the IP address of your computer s Network Interface Card Consult your Operating System s documentation for specific instructions on how this is done Also compare the Subnet Mask values these must be exactly the same on both your computer and your Element If they are not change your computer s Subnet Mask settings to match that of Ele
301. tells you the type of link with which the Engine is connected to the local network switch This should always be 1 Gbs Network Usage In and Out show how much bandwidth is being consumed on the Engine to switch link Temperature monitors the temperature of the StudioEngine CPU If the temperature exceeds operating limits a warning will appear on the Engine s front panel display Fan 1 and Fan 2 Speed Monitors the fan speeds of the Engine s two internal cooling fans if your engine is of the variety with fans 2011 Axia Audio e The Configuration Management section lets you make backups of and restore your Engine settings Use the Browse Backup and Restore buttons to accomplish these actions Use the Reset Cfg button to reset all of your StudioEngine s settings to an as shipped state This command will completely erase any choices you have made and reset your Engine to the way it came from the factory so use with caution StudioEngine By default the user name is user and there is no password The Hardware and Firmware section is where you upload and apply new operating software for the StudioEngine Use the File field and the Browse and Upload buttons to upload new software to the Engine Bam byi a i Where are my buttons Unlike the Element enya od mA mre console itself where you can store multiple ver har sions of operating software the StudioEngine EEEE S
302. tem SmartQ works by varying the Q of the selected parametric band proportional to the amount of boost or cut you spec ify A small amount of boost or cut will affect a broader range of frequencies for a warm musically pleasing effect As gain is increased the Q sharpens affecting a narrower range of fre quencies for tighter control of target bands At aggressive cut levels the EQ becomes a tunable notch filter SmartQ keeps the EQ sounding natu ral at virtually all settings To activate the Production Module press the Options key on any fader strip The Production Module s overbridge dis play will immediately mirror the number of that fader and the name of the source you re adjusting EQ for Once the Production Module is active you can quickly adjust EQ using the con trols described below To quickly set EQ for multiple channels rotate the SELECT knob on the overbridge panel to choose a different fader source and press it to TAKE that source AUX SEND A B C D These controls allow you to send the output of the ac tive fader to any or all of the four Aux Send buses for Figure 5 4 Production Module overbridge display The three central pairs of knobs are EQ Controls HI GAIN HI FREQ MID GAIN MID FREQ and LO GAIN LO FREQ The GAIN knobs provide 40 dB of adjust ment range for boost or cut of the three parametric bands from 25 dB to 15 dB The FREQ knobs each act slightly differ ently
303. that these settings are saved with the Show Profile not the Source Profile we discussed in the previous chapter In the case of a Channel these settings apply only to one fader for one specific Show Profile Settings that are intended to be global in nature should be established in the Source Profile that way they will apply to ANY fader to which the source is applied Let s look at these options one by one notice as we go that the fields match the choices you made for this channel using Element s Options menus prior to cap turing the Show Profile Note in addition to active options choic es that are actively made to Element settings when loading a new Show Profile there is also a passive option for many items Retain Source Setting Choosing Retain allows the setting for this option to cascade from the Source Profile attached to the source loaded on this channel For example you ve set a Show Profile to load the Control Room Host mic on Channel 1 You specified an EQ boost of 2 dB 1200 Hz in the Source Profile for the Control Room Host mic checking the Retain Source Setting option here in the Channel Description Screen allows that previously defined EQ setting to ride along when the source is loaded without your hav ing to specify it again Channel Description Section SOURCE ID The name of the source you assigned to this fader You can change the source using the
304. the Monitor 2 speakers will dim when Talk To or Preview is in use Use as much as 30 dB of cut turn the option Off or Re tain Existing Setting GPIO CHANNEL FOR STUDIO MONITOR In this box you assign Monitor 2 a channel number effec tively making it a source to which logic commands can be associated You ll enter this channel number in the GPIO Setup web page to assign a GPIO port for these logic functions See Chapter 4 GPIO Con figuration for more information This option should typically be programmed with the same logic channel number for all show profiles on a single Element since this function is primarily used for on air warning light control Staying ahead of the game You might not have a second studio controlled from your Ele ment but we still recommend that you pro gram this option for each Show Profile Why The Studio Monitor logic has other functions and works in conjunction with the Control Room Monitor logic If you program it now you won t have to go back and do it later 2011 Axia Audio Master module control lock map Channel options Master options General Source Monitor Delay control Program amp Dynamics Meter J Timer control aux Sends Pan amp Mode Sends amp Returns _ Talk to Monitor 2 external Aux Sends Fader Preview to HP Feed to Source Link Numeric Keypad Program Monitor 2 source selection Aux Sends external Monitor 2 sou
305. the StudioEngine should any fault conditions exist take only 1 2 minutes but it will seem like forever e The Install Bootloader and Upload Intercom The Front Panel Passcode fields allow you to buttons allow you to update both Do so upon the passcode protect the physical controls on the En suggestion of Axia tech support What s Next gine s front panel By default access is open However if your Engines are located in a public space in your facility you The next chapter covers PowerStation controls may wish to set a code to limit front panel access to authorized personnel To enable this feature enter a If you have managed to remember everything you four digit code in the top box shown in Figure 9 9 have read up to this point congratulations If there was then enter it again in the lower box to confirm Click an exam you would pass with flying colors Well there Apply to activate passcode protection is no exam but there is more great information on spe cific topics in the Appendices be sure to check them e The Remote Access Password fields allow you out to change the user password for HTTP access to the 2011 Axia Audio 9 StudioEngine Controls e 125 9 StudioEngine Controls e 126 Meters dance in time Waveforms swirl around my Skul Musc looks so cool 2011 Axia Audio Chapter Ten PowerStation Controls In this chapter we ll look in depth at all of the con trols and options found in the
306. the active software image Set Current Image When you want to change 2011 Axia Audio the active software package click on the radio button next to the image you wish to activate and click this button A reboot is necessary to load the new software choice y Delete Current Image Click the radio button next to software you wish to delete and click this button Note that you cannot delete the active software image Good Housekeeping It s best not to keep too many old software images around They clutter up Element s flash memory leaving less space for Show Profiles syslogs and other important data We recommend that you keep only one previous software package stored in Element Upload New Image From time to time Axia makes new software packages available for download from www AxiaAudio com Use the Browse and Upload Image buttons to install new software as described in the Technical Bul letin that accompanies each software release Reboot shuts down Element and restarts it y Remember that mixing takes place in the StudioEngine so this can be done even while you are on the air Interruptions of your program stream if any will last less than 1 second A re boot is required after changing active software The Customize Menu e User Logo This utility allows you to place your sta tion s logo on the Element operator display To do so create a PNG file in Photoshop or any similar ima
307. the fader is turned ON CHANNEL ON turns Preview OFF If this source is assigned to Preview for off air audi tioning turning its channel ON will cancel its Preview assignment Preview ON turns Channel OFF Does just what it says sometimes used for Phone channels HYBRID ANSWER MODE This setting allows you to tailor Element s Hybrid Answer mode to suit your facility s operating style It is intended for hybrids that use external GPIO for device control Normal Auto Answer Disabled Element pro vides no auto answer logic when a fader with a hybrid assigned is turned On Channel ON Answers Hybrid When a hybrid has an incoming call turning its assigned fader ON will answer the call Channel ON or Preview ON Answers Hy brid When a hybrid has an incoming call turn ing its assigned fader ON or pressing that chan nel s Preview key will answer the call Knob Function Allows you to specify the func tion of a SoftKnob that can be used for tweaking the channel gain structure The SoftKnob is accessed by pressing the Options button on the fader channel None disables this function Fader Trim Level adjusts trim gain in the channel s signal path just before the channel fader Pre Amp Gain adjusts the source gain of the Axia node or PowerStation I O source associated with this source BACKWARD FEED ENABLED DISABLED Al lows you to enable or disable backfeeds to this audio source B
308. these items requires service To enter the diagnostic mode Standard Monitor module only press and hold the and 2 and keys found on Element s Monitor Module for 5 seconds Upon entering the lamp diagnostic mode the moni tor connected to Element will display an initial screen with a list of all installed modules as shown in Figure C 13 You ll see a description of the type of each mod ule preceding the description are a set of numbers in brackets To begin fader diagnostics use the Arrow keys to highlight the fader you wish to test and press the Enter key You will see onscreen a graphical representation of the selected module s controls including faders lighted selection keys and on off switches In the first phase of the test all of the module s lamps are lit and you are instructed to turn each one off This serves as a combination lamp and switch test When the lamp switch test is complete you ll be prompted to perform a fader operation test As you move Test Mode 1 1 FN 4 fader 0 4 11 01 2 3 FN Europhone 0 4 11 02 3 2 FN US Phone 0 4 11 03 5 5 FN User 0 4 11 35 UP DOWN Select Module ENTER Begin testing HELP Exit test mode Figure C 13 Module diagnostic selection the faders on the module being tested you will see their onscreen images move as well and the alpha displays on Element itself will display changing encoder values as the faders are moved W
309. thing to indicate the room or studio where the unit is located 2011 Axia Audio PowerStation Controls e 135 10 PowerStation Controls e 136 10 e Network Address Do not change this ad a Dos tep dress is automatically assigned during boot up lt e Netmask Do not change this value is auto matically assigned during boot up e Gateway Do not change this address is auto matically assigned during boot up e Syslog Server and Severity Filter This sec tion also includes the syslog server IP address and syslog level settings Under certain circum stances Axia tech support may request that you collect logs of system activity Otherwise the syslog settings should be left at default settings e User Password The user password may be changed here Be sure to record any changes you make to the default user password which is blank It is difficult for anyone to help you out if the password is not known Be aware that making changes to device pass words after your PathfinderPC server has been configured is going to make your life more com plicated We encourage you to make password changes at the beginning of your setup or leave the passwords at the default value e Firmware Version This section is where you will update the firmware for the Switch section of the PowerStation As with most other Axia devices there is provision for two different ver sions of firmware The Switch will reboot when the
310. tilization Network utilization transmit and receive data rates expressed in Mbps e File System Information provides informa tion on memory and solid state disk utilization for the operating system Tech Support may ask for this information if you are experiencing any problems Setup This section contains the network configuration in cluding the base IP address for your PowerStation If you need to make changes to the IP scheme this is where you do it PowerStation Control Center System Sale Network configuration NTP Setar Horne maple t009 P ackress 192 168 0120 Say oa Tof E En CAN bus mimada Gawa 192 168 0 10 Rrigeaa jonio Phora Cherie Uber Mod tes ONS 0000 SIEM omnei Some Pig log Fana log stov Mamul log see Customize Scere Mix Facer chars Rat and mon in Prog md mon aut oreo 0000 Web access password Paswoord Confrematers change J Fig 10 2 PowerStation Setup Screen e Hostname Displays the name that has been as signed to your PowerStation This name is as signed in the MixEngine Network menu It is recommended that you keep this name short so it is more easily displayed in other areas of the system e IP Address This is the base IP address for your PowerStation For the example shown here the base address is 192 168 0 120 In this case the PowerStation s Ethernet switch would be auto matically assigned 192 168 0 121 I O Subsys tem MAIN will be 192 168 0 122
311. tions cg E e Optio gt Host mme PowerStnton_Studio Engine Source Shanty Sorma charg Sources lockable normal Element operation O Sources sharable SmartSurhees compathility mode aeey Abo musg mode Stereo Us backup power yee mw _ Apply Fig 10 4 PowerStation MixEngine Options e Host Name Displays the name of the Power Station that has been configured in the Network Menu e Audio Mixing Displays the mixing mode ei ther Stereo or Surround e Source Sharing This parameter should al ways be set to Sources Lockable since this is the compatibility mode for an Element The PowerStation is not intended to be used with the SmartSurface console e Backup Power This setting tells the Pow erStation how it should generate a power fail ure alarm If Backup Power is disabled in this 2011 Axia Audio screen the PowerStation MAIN amp ws mym pose i be cxe will generate an alarm only if the Mewerstaten ain inge rta power supply in the PowerStation MAIN should fail When Backup Power is set to YES a front panel alarm will be visible if there is a failure or disconnection of either e J Mp 1992 148 0 eo centre mance 3 P S Foweitaber 3u Enges pan POA tap md metast s E Waag Treen well mret afm t rag maline e CP wp main or backup power supplies ae Note that both the PowerStation Hite eae in EG i aaoi a U IM O MAIN a
312. tor 2 fader module key to exit Capture Mode Your Ele ment hardware is now ready to use Hello Moto If you have motorized faders you can mirror other motorized faders while you 2011 Axia Audio are in Capture Mode A motorized fader that is slaved to a master fader will move automati cally to mirror the movements of the master Mirrored faders both control gain for the same source but the master can override the setting of the slave useful for split Element setups where talent has a local set of faders that may be used to control certain sources but you still want the Board Operator to have master control To mirror a fader press the Options key above the fader you wish to make the slave An apos trophe will be displayed next to its numeric indicator Pressing the fader s PGM1 and PGM2 keys will change the numeric indicator indicating the Master to which this fader is now slaved a display reading means that the fader is slaved to fader 2 Pressing the Options key again returns the fad er to non mirrored mode Short Navigation Tutorial There are several different ways to change on screen options The first way is with Element s SoftKnobs lo cated directly above the Monitor Module and shown in Figure 2 11 u o Figure 2 11 Element SoftKnobs If your Element is equipped the standard Monitor module you will have six SoftKnobs as shown The 2 fader Mast
313. tors are muted 2 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates whenever control mon Return room monitors are DIMMED 3 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when PREVIEW is mon Return active 4 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when Talk to mon Return External is active Open Collector to Logic Com mon Return Active whenever a source has activated its TALK to CR function Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 Fused if source is not providing voltage active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT NIC 5 4 3 2 1 s l7 l6 Ts T4 f3 To Th EE EE IE E E E N N N N N N 5V 5 4 3 2 1 COM POWER SOURCE GPIO v ZA 4 2009 2011 Axia Audio Configuring GPIO e 49 4 Configuring GPIO e 50 4 GPIO Studio Monitor Logic MUTE Studio Command Active Low Input Allows external muting of Studio monitor speakers DIM Studio Monitor 2 Active Low Input Allows external dimming of Command Studio monitor speakers Remote Event Timer Trigger Active Low Input Resets Count up Event Timer Command to zero and starts timer e Ive Notes Remote Countdown Timer Active Low Input Resets
314. trique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada CE Conformance Information This device complies with the requirements of the EEC Council Directives 93 68 EEC CE Marking 73 23 EEC Safety low voltage directive 89 336 EEC electromagnetic compatibility Conformity is declared to those standards EN50081 1 EN50082 1 Important Safety Information To prevent risk of electric shock Disconnect power cord before servicing If fuse replacement is required please note For continued protection against fire re place fuse only with same type and value Caution The installation and servicing instructions in the manual are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid Electric Shock do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instruc tions unless you are qualified to do so Refer all ser vicing to qualified personnel Electrical Warning To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not expose this product to rain or moisture Keep liquids away from the ventilation openings in the top and rear of the unit Do not shower or bathe with the unit This equipment is designed to be operated from a power source that includes a third grounding con nection in addition to the power leads Do not defeat this safety feature In addition to creating a potential ly hazardous situation defeating this safety ground will prevent the internal line noise filter from func tioning
315. ts for your audio sources 3 2011 Axia Audio 3 Configuring Inputs e 39 3 Configuring Inputs 40 CAT 6 small and light pet sound and data pour forth What magit vs this 2011 Axia Audio Chapter Four Configuring GPIO Since the days of rotary switch source selectors it s been a challenge to properly route machine logic along with audio Some complicated schemes have been de vised over the years but broadcasters wanted a simple fast way to associate logic with audio in a routable en vironment Since the Axia IP Audio system was designed as a true computer network we were able to start with a clean sheet of paper to design the first truly routable ma chine logic audio interface Unlike conventional logic connections which require each command circuit to be wired individually Axia sends machine controls over the same Ethernet your audio travels on further reduc ing infrastructure cost and tedium Along with controlling external audio devices Element s GPIO General Purpose Input Output inter face also includes logic commands for routine studio control room operations such as tally lights monitor muting On Air lights and more The last chapter explained source profiles and showed you how you can associate GPIO with a source This chapter explains how to set up Element or Power Station GPIO to handle these functions We also invite you to read the GPIO Node User s Manual for more in
316. tting and auto matic fade up fade down time parameters The VMIXer works completely independently of the Element surface and can be used without an Element if desired In addi tion to static control of VMIX through its web pages Axia s PathfinderPC software can also be used to dy namically control VMIX and create mixing functions based on a variety of system wide parameters StudioEngine VMIX Controls In an Axia system all audio processing occurs in the StudioEngine the Element console itself does no au dio processing That s why VMIX settings are found in the StudioEngine HTTP pages You may have noted that the Element HTTP pages may also have a VMIX section This is the remnants of an earlier implementation of VMIX wherein the control was shared between the Engine and the console With Element 2 0 software we have begun the process of transi tioning to VMIX control on the StudioEngine side only but controls are mirrored on the Element configuration pages to provide a smooth transi tion for users upgrading from earlier versions This chapter may make reference to the earlier implementation for clarification reasons Even though the V in VMIX stands for virtual you can in fact perform a certain amount of hands on mixing Although you don t have physical control of the virtual faders or virtual ON OFF switches adjustments made to the VMIX take effect as soon as you apply them While you may not wi
317. turn on the Element power supply and the attached VGA monitor Setting IP using the Standard Monitor Module When Element has completed its start cycle meter screen appears find the section marked Global Op tions on the Monitor Module Press and hold the key marked Fader Options located in the top right corner of the module for five seconds to enter the IP Address Book Figure 1 11 To set the IP address rotate the leftmost SoftKnob to highlight the line titled Element IP Address and push the knob to select that line Now use the numeric pad to enter the IP address Press the leftmost SoftKnob again to take the new IP value Repeat this process to set the subnet mask value Continue down the screen and in the same way en ter the other fields values as appropriate Figure 1 11 IP Address Book Standard Monitor Module Rotate the Select Set SoftKnob to scroll through the list of available options To select an option to modify push this knob While modifying an options rotate the knob to change an option s value and push the knob to move to the next field Available options include 2011 Axia Audio Element IP Address Every piece of Livewire gear must have its own unique IP Address Set the IP Address for each Element in this field Subnet Mask Enter your network s subnet mask value here usually 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address To enable remote ad mini
318. u can define a different phone system to control for each Show Profile if you wish tailored to spe cific on air needs You will need to know the following things in order to configure Element for use with your phone system 1 The IP address of your Telos phone system s 2 The user name and password of your phone system s 3 The name of the phone system Show you wish to connect to Configuring the Element Show Profile The major change to Element phone configuration is that the IP address of your Telos phone system must be entered in the Phone section of your Element or Power Station Show Profile instead of in the Phone Channel section as was previously required The phone system IP address is now stored in Element s Show Profile settings allowing you to create different show profiles which con nect to different Telos devices 1 Enter the Telos phone system s IP address Navi gate to Element s Sources and Profiles page Se lect the Element Show Profile you wish to config ure and click on Phone In the Phone URL field enter the IP address of the Telos phone system you re connecting to The format begins with ap to define that you will be using the AP protocol followed by a login a pass word and finally the IP address In Figure D 6 the user is telos the password z hone configuration Phone Module 1 Phone Url vx ap user pass host ap telos 192 168 100 106 Show Name Hybrid 1 amp 2 Host
319. uce annoying and unnatural results you ll wind up sounding like you re talking through a cotton sock Stick to small amounts to get the effect you want Function Exit 2 Fader Monitor module only This control changes the processing control function at which the other two controls operate Expander Compressor or De Ess Pressing this knob will exit the Dynamics Menu screen Rotating the Exp Gate Thresh Bypass Ac tive SoftKnob varies the level of signal thresh old needed for the Gate function to activate be tween 50 and OdB Pushing this knob toggles Dynamics between Active and Bypass states 2011 Axia Audio Figure 5 10 Dynamics menu screen The Exp Gate Depth knob sets the amount of gain reduction when audio level falls below the Exp Gate Threshold value adjustable between 3 and OdB Comp Thresh Bypass Active sets the upper limit of the level at which the compressor will begin to work between 30 and OdB Pushing the SoftKnob toggles between Active and Bypass states Comp Ratio Freeze No Freeze sets the com pression ratio variable between 1 1 and 16 1 Pushing the SoftKnob activates and deactivates the compressor s Freeze Gate function When the Freeze function is active a red lamp illumi nates just above the Compression Ratio bargraph meter De Ess Thresh Bypass Active sets the audio level above which the de esser will be engaged from 20 to
320. udio GPIO Computer Playback Device Logic INPUTS ON Command OFF Command PREVIEW Command Not Used READY Command OUTPUTS NEXT Pulse OFF Lamp lve Notes ee 0 ann ee 1 100 msec STOP pulse ewet CS Active Low Input Illuminates OFF lamp to indi cate source s readiness Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 mS PULSE sent when mon Return ON button is depressed ex cept when initially turned ON Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when channel is mon Return OFF and READY is active START Pulse STOP Pulse POWER amp COMMON Source Common Logic Common Logic 5 Volt supply Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 ms PULSE sent when mon Return channel is first turned ON Open Collector to Logic Com A 100 ms PULSE sent when mon Return channel is turned OFF Logic Common Connect to ground of source device or to Pin 8 Internal 5 Volt return Can be connected to Pin 7 if source is not providing com mon Logic Supply Individually Can be connected to Pin 10 Fused if source is not providing voltage active only when source has been assigned to channel Common for all 5 inputs Connect to power supply of source device or to Pin 9 Source Supply NOT CONNECTED PREVIEW Lamp 3 Open Collector to Logic Com Illuminates when PREVIEW mon Return is ON OUTPUT COMMON RETURN V GND SOURCE OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT NIC 5 4 3 2 1 s l7 l6 Ts T4 3 To Th EE EE IE E E E N N N N N N 5
321. ure IP address settings for Element and the PowerStation You will also need to setup Livewire channels and assign your audio inputs and outputs as described in Chapter 2 Factory default IP address is 192 168 2 50 Software Setup The configuration of your PowerStation is accom plished by accessing its web interface No dedicated software is required Configuration is not complicated but does require a little planning and setup When you ve completed physically connecting your Axia hardware read through the remainder of this man ual to begin configuring the software options that de termine how your new PowerStation will operate when used in a Livewire network with your other Axia gear e Chapter 2 Setup and Connections e Chapter 3 Working with Sources explains how to generate Source Profiles and construct backfeeds for selected sources e Chapter 4 Configuring GPIO tells how to associ ate routable logic commands with any audio source e Chapter 5 Element Operations takes you under the hood to explore in depth software options e Chapter 6 Show Profiles illustrates how to set and save unique snapshots tailored for specific opera tional situations that can be recalled when needed Enjoy your new Element console 2011 Axia Audio Chapter One Element with StudioEngine Introduction There s nothing quite as much fun as taking some thing new out of its box That sense of excitement as protect
322. urrent Limiting Resistors Host Powered Inputs Fully Isolated 4N36 OPTOCOUPLERS Customer Figure 4 4 GPIO input connections 2011 Axia Audio 4 Configuring GPIO 57 4 Configuring GPIO 58 Output Connections The GPIO port s outputs are opto isolated Current should be limited 100 mA through each output with the total current draw from the 5 Volt supply not to exceed 3 amps Figure 4 5 shows the recommended connections for outputs Note Some external devices will allow a logic control input sink to ground to activate Thus some devices may not work with an Axia GPO control because they may not fully achieve ground through the output transistor The volt age drop between the collector and emitter may not be low enough to activate the device so an external relay controlled by the GPO may need to be used to provide a dry contact closure to the external device 6 to 24 Volt Outputs Host powered isolated Please note that this section is provided as a jump start introduction to Axia GPIO nodes For a fuller understanding of the GPIO node s options and require ments you may wish to read the GPIO Node User s Manual that is available for download at www AxiaAu dio com downloads What s Next When you re ready join us in Chapter Five for a com prehensive walk through of Element operations 9 AAA i C HSR312L 5 Cu
323. ush the knob to Take the new value HEADPHONE MODE knob Works exactly like the MONITOR MODE knob described above but affects the board operator s Headphone chan nel Pressing Monitor Options or Options exits this menu e Meter Options Key Pressing this key opens the Meters screen where you can choose preferences for the two on screen meters that are on the right side of the Element display enable six more meters and set other meter preferences In addi tion Element now supports numerous international me tering standards This is one area where there have been numerous recent changes Right Most Meter display options are PGM 4 bus default setting Monitor 1 Preview means the meter will show levels for the bus assigned to Monitor 1 or the 2011 Axia Audio 5 Element Operations 81 5 Element Operations 82 Preview bus when any source is in Preview mode Meter Peaks can be hidden or viewed by selecting Show or Hide as desired PGM 3 meter source options are Program 3 default Record Program 4 post fade pre on off Phone Program 4 pre fade pre on off External 1 External 2 Figure 5 17 Standard Meter Options Menu Note The 2 Fader Monitor module does not have a Meter Options key To enter the Meter Options screen simply press the Monitor Op tions button twice The first press will give you Monitor Options the second press will take you to Meter Option
324. usical guest interviews one for unattended operation that need only to be loaded to instantly reconfigure the board for use with a different situation Creating A Show Profile Build A Show Element s Web interface which you ve used to con struct Source Profiles is also used to help build Show Profiles so make sure a computer with a Web browser is connected to your Livewire network within easy reach Your Element is shipped from the factory with a de fault Show Profile This loads the first time you turn on your Element it provides the template you ll use to construct custom Show Profiles You ve no doubt been exploring your Element so you might want to reload the Default Show Profile using Show Profiles key lo cated on Element s Master Module to make sure you re in ready mode The first step in building a Show Profile is to set up Element using the Channel Options Monitor Options and other board options as described in Chapter 5 Ele ment Operations Get started by assigning a source to each Element fader using the Options keys at the top of each channel Reminder You can speed the setup process by Channel Jumping while using the Options menus For example to quickly assign sources select the Options key on Channel 1 and choose Source from the Channel Options menu Use the Soft Knobs Control Knob or Nav Keys to select a source from the list take the source and then press the
325. uts and outputs The Green indicator is considered safe The meter bar will change to Yellow at 20 dB below full scale and it will change to Red at 10 dB below full scale To make gain changes the small arrow will increase or decrease gain by approximately 0 1 dB The large ar rows will increase or decrease gain by approximately 1 0 dB We recommend that all system levels be normalized at 20 dB below full scale At the output of an audio node or the PowerStation IO Subsystem this will be a stan dard 4dB That s about 1 23 volts for those who want to measure it with an analog RMS meter System This section has the configuration for the IP settings of the PowerStation s I O subsystem section as well as the provisions for software updates Figure 10 8 shows the web page for this section w ot ee ete fen a a R Ex o kapiunpeus mep ran IO Subsystem Main one Saro bermeen FW Sebutben Gb oe oo Fig 10 7 Audio I O Subsystem Meters As described previously in this manual it is recom mended that all IP address information be entered in the PowerStation Setup menu IP addresses are automatical ly assigned to the IO Subsystems and Ethernet switch If you make changes to IP settings in this section they will be over written the next time the PowerStation is restarted e Host Name You should enter a short logical name here to describe the IO Subsystem We Abas PowerStation Control Center ay 10 Subsystem
326. w to 3 Use another CAT 5e or CAT 6 cable to connect generate Source Profiles and construct backfeeds for the Ethernet port on the back of the Element selected sources GPIO Node Power Supply to a 100Base T port e Chapter 4 Configuring GPIO tells how to associ on the switch ate routable logic commands with any audio source 4 Packed with your Element is a cable with 6 pin Chapter 5 Element Operations takes you under Molex connectors This is the power commu the hood to explore in depth software options nications cable Lift the Element meter panel and Chapter 6 Show Profiles illustrates how to set and connect the end of the cable without the strain save unique snapshots tailored for specific opera relief to the corresponding port on the Element tional situations that can be recalled whenever the connection panel Connect the other end of the need arises cable to one of the jacks labeled 48VDC OUT PUT amp COMM on the back of your Element Enjoy your new Element 9 2011 Axia Audio Introduction ix Introduction x Quickstart Element with PowerStation The subsequent chapters of this manual will give you an in depth understanding of the capabilities of your new Axia Element and PowerStation from installa tion to advanced functions This Quickstart section isn t meant to take the place of the following chapters but it will help you get everything connected fast and point you to the parts of th
327. we highly suggest that you refer to Network Engineering For Audio Engineers Chapter 8 of our Introduction to Livewire IP Audio System Design Reference and Primer 2011 Axia Audio Appendix F Worksheets 167 Axia IP Address Assignment Worksheet Location Notes Device Name IP Address 89T S A0YSHIOM 74 XIpuaddy SOURCES Axia Audio Channel Assignment Worksheet Notes Device Name Device Location Channel ID Number 69T SI Y4SJJOM 74 XIpuaddy DESTINATIONS Axia Audio Channel Assignment Worksheet Notes Device Name Device Location Channel ID Number OZT SJ22YSHIOM 14 XIpuaddy Warranty Axia Audio Limited Warranty This Warranty covers the Products which are defined as the various audio equipment parts software and acces sories manufactured sold and or distributed by TLS Corp d b a Axia Audio hereinafter Axia Audio With the exception of software only items the Products are warranted to be free from defects in material and work manship for a period of five 5 years from the date of receipt by the end user Software only items are warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 90 days from the date of receipt by the end user This warranty is void if the Product is subject to Acts of God including without limitation lightning improper installation or misuse including without limitation the failure to use telephone and
328. will work with different types of consoles so you need to tell it which type you re pairing it with 1 Navigate to the Engine ID menu and find the Ap plication Interface Options section Be sure that Element is checked for the Console Type 2 Click Apply Advanced Settings You ve no doubt noticed that there are many more options for your Element and StudioEngine than we ve covered here That s because Chapter One was meant to get you up and running as quickly as possible For an in depth explanation of the other available settings please refer to Chapter 8 Advanced Element Controls and Chapter 9 StudioEngine Controls What s Next Take a break You re done with initial set up of your Element and StudioEngine When you re ready you may skip Chapter 2 Power Station setup and jump to Chapter 3 Working with Sources for a walk through one of the most important Element concepts Source Profiles 9 2011 Axia Audio 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections e 9 1 Element with StudioEngine Setup amp Connections e 10 Do digital streams dream of electric Djs Just Bradbury kwows 2011 Axia Audio Chapter Two Element with PowerStation Note Chapter Two of this manual discusses system setup when using the Axia Element con sole with PowerStation If your Element is being used with a PowerStation this section is for you If you are using the Axia StudioEngine
329. with your Element please refer to Chapter 1 Introduction If you are starting here you are the proud owner of an Axia Element and a PowerStation You have prob ably read the Quickstart section and are hungry for more knowledge If your system consists of more than just a basic Element console and PowerStation you know there is Axia PowerStation Main more to it than just plug and play After admiring these beautiful pieces of hardware you may be wondering what to do next But before you dig in be advised that you need to assemble the rest of your Livewire network first Because so much of the configuration process depends upon hav ing access to audio sources and destinations you must have a plan to connect and configure your other Axia peripherals Audio Nodes GPIO Nodes etc according to the instructions supplied with each You should do this prior to configuring the PowerStation The PowerStation Family At this time there are two products in the Power Station family PowerStation MAIN and PowerStation AUX PowerStation AUX normally used as an expan sion unit is similar to PowerStation MAIN but it does not contain the CPU DSP module and has a single Ether net port PowerStation AUX can be used as a standalone IO unit if desired PowerStation MAIN and AUX pro vide power supply redundancy to each other when con nected We will do our best to indicate where features apply to a specific model PowerStation Aux
330. y Filter This sec tion also includes the syslog server IP address and syslog level settings Under certain circum stances Axia tech support may request that you collect logs of system activity Otherwise the syslog settings should be left at default settings User Password The user password for the IO subsection may be changed here Be sure to re cord any changes you make to the default user password which is blank It is difficult for any one to help you out if the password is not known Be aware that making changes to device pass words after your PathfinderPC server has been configured is going to make your life more com plicated We encourage you to make password changes at the beginning of your setup or leave the passwords at the default value Firmware Version This section is where you will update the firmware for the Audio IO sec tion of the PowerStation As with most other Axia devices there is provision for two differ ent versions of firmware The IO Subsystem will reboot when the version is changed DOP Cone of Saree 31 OS reo Poem Sat bahaa Standard Audio Streams Sze ih shame de ELETA Recebe butler poe re arfeut 100 300 a ay wyg bdie F map van m Qrey 3 pirre DOP Cont of Srce 20 pela bor arIo orrera Cees Fig 10 9 Audio I O Subsystem QoS and Clock device is unavailable another Livewire device will automatically and seamlessly assume the master clock function Mos

Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents